ISBN 978-81-88152-06-3

PUBLISHED BY EFY
ISO 9001:2000 CERTIFIED
Electronics Projects
Vol. 13
 1 —

EFY Books & Publications

EFY a reputed information house, specialising in electronics and information technology

is

magazines. It also publishes directories and books on several topics. Its current publications are:

(A) CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

1. Electronics Projects, Vol. 1: A compilation of selected construction projects and circuit ideas published in Electronics For You maga-
zines between 1979 and 1980.

2. Electronics Projects, Vol. 2 to 19 (English version): Yearly compilations (1981 to 1998) of interesting and useful construction projects
and circuit ideas published in Electronics For You.

3. Electronics Projects, Vol. 20, 21, 22, 23 and 24 (with CD): Yearly compilations (1999 to 2003).

4. Electronics Projects, Vol. 16(fi?^0 <f'W>t u i): Yearly compilations (1995) of interesting and useful construction projects and circuit ideas
published in Electronics For You.

(B) OTHER BOOKS

1. Learn to Use Microprocessors (with floppy): By K. Padmanabhan and S. Ananlhi (fourth enlarged edition). An EFY publication with
floppy disk. Extremely useful for the study of 8-bit processors at minimum expense.

2. ABC of Amateur Radio and Citizen Band: Authored by Rajesh Verma, VU2RVM. it deals exhaustively with the subject —giving a lot
of practical information, besides theory.

3. Batteries: By D. Venkatasubbiah. This publication describes the ins and outs of almost all types of batteries used in electronic appliances.

(C) DIRECTORIES
1. EFY Annual Guide (with CD): Includes Directory of Indian manufacturing and distributing units. Buyers' Guide and Index of Brand
Names, plus lots of other useful information.

2. Technical Education Institutes Directory: Includes course-wise and stateArity-wise listings of technical education institutes in India,
besides the alphabetical main directory offering all the relevant information about them.

(D) MAGAZINES
1. Electronics For You (with CD & without CD): In regular publication since 1969, EFY is the natural choice for the entire electronics
fraternity, be it the businessmen, industry professionals or hobbyists. From microcontrollers to DVD players, from PCB designing software
to UPS systems, all are covered every month in EFY.

2. Linux For You ((with CD & DVD): Asia's first magazine on Linux. Completely dedicated to the Open Source community. Regular
columns by Open Source evangelists. With columns focused for newbies, power users and developers. LFY is religiously read by IT
implementers and CXOs every month.

(Information Technology ): A monthly magazine for 'Techies' and those who want to be. Its readers have two things in common
’
3. 'Ll
a background related to IT and the thirst to know more. Topics covered boast technical depth and aim to assist in better usage of IT in
organisations.

4. Facts For You: A monthly magazine on business and economic affairs. It aims to update the top decision makers on key industry trends
through its regular assortment of Market Surveys and other important information.

5. BenefIT: A technology magazine for businessmen explaining how they can benefit from IT.

6. Electronics Bazaar: A monthly B2B magazine for sourcing electronics components, products and machineries. Ideal for buying decision
makers and influences from electronics and non-electronics industry.

Registered Post or Courier Delivery for Books and CDs: Rs 40 for first copy and Rs 15 for every additional copy of any book or
directory. Add Rs 50/- on an outside Delhi cheque. Important.

* Payment should be sent strictly in advance by demand draft/money order in favour of EFY associates Kits ‘n ’Spares.

For retail orders: For magazine subscriptions: For bulk orders:

Kits‘n’Spares EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd Paramount Book Agency

D-88/5, Okhla Industrial Area, D-87/1 Okhla Industrial Area, Phase- Arch No. 30 (West Approach), Below
Phase- 1, New Delhi 110020 New 110020
Delhi Mahalaxmi Bridge, Mahalaxmi, Mumbai
Phone: 26371661, 26371662 Phone: 26810601-03 400034. Phone: (022) 23541463, 23541871,
E-mail: kits@efyindia.com Fax: (011) 26817563 40497411, 40497474, Fax: 24950392
Website: www.kitsnspares.com E-mail: info@efyindia.com E-mail: circulations@ibhworid.com
ELECTRONICS
PROJECTS
VOL. 13

EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd

D-87/1 Okhla Industrial Area, Phase-1
New Delhi 1 1 0020
 © EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd. 1996
First Published in this Edition, 1996
Second Edition 1999
Third Edition April, 2003
Forth Edition January, 2009

All rights reserved. No

part of this book may be reproduced in any
form without the written permission of the publishers.

ISBN 978-81-88152-06-3

Published by Ramesh Chopra for EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd,

D-87/1, Okhla Industrial Area, Phase-1, New Delhi 110020.
Typeset at EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd and
Printed at J.K. Offset & Packages, C-21, DDA Shed,
Okhla Phase-1, New Delhi 110020.
 FOREWORD
This volume of Electronics Projects is the thirteenth in the series pub-
lished by EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd. It is a compilation of 24 construction
projects and 81 circuit ideas published in ‘ Electronics For You ’
maga-
zine during 1992.

In keeping with the past trend, all modifications, corrections and

additions sent by the readers and authors have been incorporated in the
articles. Queries from readers along with the replies from authors/EFY
have also been published towards the end of relevant articles. It is a
sincere endeavour on our part to make each project as error-free and
comprehensive as possible. However, EFY cannot resume any responsi-
bility if readers are unable to make a circuit successfully, for whatever
reason.

This collection of tested circuit ideas and construction projects in a

handy volume, would provide of electronics enthusiasts be
all classes —
they students, teachers, hobbyists or professionals with a valuable—
resource of electronic circuits, which can be fabricated using readily-
available and reasonably-priced components. These circuits could
either be used independently or in combination with other circuits, de-
scribed in this and other volumes. We are confident that this volume, like
its predecessors, will generate tremendous interest amongst the readers.
 11

CONTENTS

Section A: Construction Projects

1 . Make Your Own Audio Cassette Copier 0

2. Make Yourself this Special Two-way Intercom 05

3. Full Featured Touch Control Programmable Power Supply 08

4. Hit the Target an Electronic Game - 12

5. Stereo Spectrograph 15

6. Digital Time Switch 20

7. Digital Frequency Counter 26

8. Fire Sensing Systems 30

9. Spectacular Spectra 33

10. Clap-operated Remote Control for Fans 38

1 1 . 8W+8 W Stereo Amplifier Module 4

12. Make Yourself Automatic Music Search Systems 45

13. Digital Volume Control 48

14. Cook Timer 52

15. Variable Speed Multi-output Running Mode ‘LED’ Display 55

16. CMOS Pocketable Timekeeper 58

17. Electronic Number Shooting Game 6

18. CMOS Digital Clock with On-off Timer 66

19. 70/40 Watts Hi-Fi Amplifier 7

20. The Universal Timer 75

21. Automatic Voltage Stabiliser 81

22. Digital Car Lock with Alarm 84

23. AM/FM Radio Receiver Using BEL 7220 86

24. Electronic Switch Starter .. 90

1 . Stereo Balance Indicator 95

2. Versatile Auto-Cut Off Unit 96

3. Staircase Light Switch 98

4. Wireless Recording 100

5. A Versatile Decibel Meter 100

6. Sound Operated Musical Bell 102

7. Fuzz Effect Box for Gutarists 103

 4
6
211
5

8. Video Distribution Amplifier 104

9. Low-cost Musical Horn 104

10. Ten Channel Sequential Lighting for Cars 105

1 1 . Convertion of DMM into Frequency Counter 106

12. Auto Power Off for Motor Pumps 107

1 3. Beeper cum Visual Indicator 1 08

14. Electronic Washing Machine Control 109

15. Trangular Waveform Generator 1 1

16. Auto Changeover from Genset to Mains Supply 1 12

1 7. Transformer Test Circuit to Overcome Line Voltage Variation 1 1

1 8. Automatic Gate Light 1 1

19. Pocket Radio Using LA4510 1 14

20. Telephone Melody Ringer 1 1

21. Dynamic Display 1 1

22. Steam Whistle 117

23. Programmable Timer 118

24. LED Stop Watch 119

25. Lie Detector 119

26. Temperature Controlled Soldering Iron Station 121

27. Mini Emergency Light 122

28. Automatic Time Indicator for Telephone 1 23

29. Wind Sound Generator 1 24
30. Automatic Cut-off Power Supply 1 24

31. Battery Charger with Overcharge and Deep-discharge Protection 125

32. Electronic Ballast for Tubelight 127

33. Compressor/Expander Unit (Compander) 128

34. Adjustable Bipolar Voltage Regulator 129

35. Hex to Binary Encoder 1 30

36. Electronic Siren 1 3

37. Self Switching-off Power Supply 131

38. Sound Operated Timer 1 32

39. Telephone Amplifier cum Broadcaster 1 33

40. Quiz Display with Seven Segment Indicator 134

41 . Electronic Staircase Switch 1 35

42. Fully Automatic Induction Motor Starter 135

43. Temperature Controlled Oscillator 136

44. Power Back-up for Digital Clocks 137

45. Analogue Frequency Meter with Over-range Indicator 1 37

 11

46. Versatile Stroboscope 138

47. In-circuit Ohmmeter (Ohmmeter for Electronic Circuits) 1 39

48. Priority Lamp System 1 4
49. Miniature IC Organ 142

50. Quartz Watch Tester 142

51. Automatic Control for Sitout Lights 1 43

52. Simple Power Supply Resumption Alarm 144

53. 1/86400 Hz Generator 145

54. Programmable Frequency Multiplier Using PLL565 145

55. Auto-off for Cassette Players 146

56. Electronic Charger 147

57. Transistorised Warning Alarm 148

58. Electronic Number Scoring Game 148

59. Rain Sound Generator 1 50

60. Double-Tune Car Reverse Horn 1 5

61 . Traffic-Light Controller 1 5

62. Sophisticated Ni-Cd Charger 152

63. Three Bit Flash Analogue to Digital Converter 153

64. Programmable Digital Timer 154

65. Multi Pattern Running Light 1 56

66. Eight-Sound Generator 157

67. A Novel Display 157

68. Audio Running Lights 159

69. Hearing Aid 159

70. Fuel Level Drop Indicator 160

71. Automatic Suction Tank Motor Control ler 161

72. 1 2 Hindi Song Tunes Producer 1 6

73. Simple Frequency Meter 1 62

74. 100 Rung Exclusive Counter 162

75. Inexpensive Guitar Amplifier 164

76. Video Transmitter 164

77. Wireless Code Practice Oscillator 165

78. Light and Touch-operated Music Bell 165

79. Electronic Fuse 166

80. Multisound Buzzer 167

81 . Crystal Controlled Inverter 1 67

 Section A:
Construction Projects
 Your Own Make
Audio Cassette Copier
Ashok Kumar T.

A
wiH be interested
ny audio electronics hobbyist
in a quality cassette
.
signals during recording.
frequency response is
The high
deliberately
i boosting; potentiometer at mid posi-
tion
4
0’) and increasing the high fre-
copier to enrich his music collection, boosted in order to give a high signal- quency by keeping the pot above 4 0\
Here is a quality recording circuitry to-noise ratio on playback and to in- the mid position,
which has been tested and used for over crease the clarity of the recorded sig- Listening to the depth of the tone of

BIAS
OSCILLATOR

ACTIVE RESISTOR
FROM
TREBLE AND RECORDING
PLAY BACK
BASS AMPLIFIER
HEAD
CONTROL
TO RECORDING
HEAD

the playback signal and one’s prefer-

ence, the overall tone of the recording
signal can also be controlled using ac-
Fig. 1: Rlock diagram of audio cassette copier volume tive tone control circuit besides high
mono CONTROL
for version. frequency emphasis. One must note
RECORDING TO that a very good quality in recording
SIGNAL RECORDING
RESISTOR can be achieved by proper setting of the
HEAD
tone control section.
The third section is a recording am-
plifier. The gain of the amplifier is

around 85, which is more than suffi-

HIGH FREQUENCY
OSCILLATIONS
cient. The gain is determined by the
FROM ratio (R7 + R9)/R9.
BIAS
OSCILLATOR
VR3 is which
a dual potentiometer
controls overall recording signal to be
supplied to the recording amplifier in
Fig. 2: Modulation of signal.
stereo applications. Using two separate
six months and found working effi- nal. In this circuit this requirement can potentiometers for VR4, individual
ciently.
The whole circuit is in fact an inte-
gration of some well-known circuits. A
cassette copier has four main sections.
First, a head preamplifier to pick-up the
signals from the playback head and,
second, a high frequency booster to
boost the amplitude of high frequency

TheaDihorisalecturerinDepartmentofGlcciron-
ics, K.V.G. College of Engineering, P.O. Sullia
(Karnataka). Fig. 3: IMI curve of the magnetic tape material.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTSlD*
 —
——

BASS
i
VRl
PARTS LIST
10K 100K
LOG Semiconductors:
Hh IC1-IC3 — pA741. operational
Cl C2 12 V amplifier
0.047n T1 — SL100B/BC107
silicon transistor
TO RECORDING
INPUT FROM AMPLIFIER
D1.D2 1N4001 rectifier
HEAD PRE THROUGH diode
AMPLIFIER BUFFER STAGE
O/p fT'ci
uA741 Resistors (all M ± 5% carbon, unless stated
otherwise):
C3 IZ
0.0047»t VR2 R1.R2. R6
10K
-12V R8. R14,
i LOG R15 — 10-kilohm
R3.R9 — 1-kilohm
TREBLE
Fig. 4: Circuit of tone control used for high-frequency boosting. R4.R5 — 220-ohm
R7 — 85-kilohm
R10.R11 — 68-kilohm
BUFFER
RECORDING
AMPLIFIER ™ IC2
FROM BIAS
OSCILLATOR R12
R13
—
—
47-ohm
33-kilohm
R8
10K
^A 41 VR1 -
100-kilohm log
potentiometer
VR2.VR4 10 kilohm log
potentiometer
VR3 — Dual (10K+10K) log
Capacitors:
C1.C2 — 0.047pF ceramic
C3.C13 — 0.0047jjF ceramic
C4-C7 -
220pF, 16V
electrolytic
C8-C10 — 2pF. 16 electrolytic
Fig. 5: Circuit of buffer and recording amplifier. -12V C11.C12 — 220pF styroflex
CHAN NEL 1 , . C14 — 313Kpf
DETECTOR IFT .
NELCO OR Miscellaneous:
“°P PHILIPS 3«44
SI On/off switch
C12 XI 230V AC primary to
220p
12V-0-I2V, 500mA
Cl 3 secondary transformer
CHANNEL 2 4.7|Cff' |SL1 00/AC 167/0CP7
LI — Detector IFT (Nclco
or Philips 3044)
— Recording head
AC C14 SR12 — Erase head (AC type)
E«ASE 3.3KfF R14 >470 — Neon lamp
HI AO 10K — Fuse, 500mA

Fig. 6: Circuit of bias oscillator,

independently . The recording signal can must be above audibility, i.e. in the oscillator can be used to feed the erase
also be tapped out from the volume range of 75 kHz tolOO kHz. The bias head
control of the power amplifier section of frequency can be set by adjusting the Final recording quality, sharpness,
any tape recorder set.
core depth of the oscillator coil or IFT. channel separation etc depend upon
The final section is of a bias A detector IFT with a capacitor can be one’s skill in adjusting Master and Slave
oscillator. Bias signal is applied to the used as an oscillator coil. The heads and amplitude of the recording
oscilla-
recording head from a high frequency tions must be ensured and set properly signal. More and more signal ampli-
oscillator. The bias places the record- using a CRO. It is highly impossible to tude leads to saturation of the magnetic
ing signal into the linear portion of record the signals without proper bias particles on the tape which increases
the tape’s magnetisation curve which voltage. (Ref. Fig. 3.) The bias must be the distortion during playback. A head
brings about improved linearity, low- above 18 volts. similar to the playback head does the
ered distortion etc. An AC bias (sinu- Finally, the tape recorder must have function of recording in the recording
soidal) is preferred over a steady DC a provision for erasing previous record- set.
bias.
ings. Here also AC erasing is preferred
The frequency of the bias signal over DC erasing. The output of a bias

Il l ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 .

fO RECORD) NG
Fig.7 : Actual-size PCB layout of Figs 4, 5, 6. HEAD

Fig. 8 : Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig.7

xi
bias oscillator.
230V AC PR1 TO si The bias oscillator can be checked as
12V-0V-12V, 500mA SEC. ON/OFF
04 TRANSFORMER
follows without a CRO. Connect the
SWITCH
output of bias oscillator to an AC erase
FUSE " head and play a pre-recorded cassette in
500mA the recording deck.

230V The recording will be erased, only if

AC the oscillator is giving the oscillations
and working well.

O
Fig.10: Power supply.
Some important tips 4. All signal connections must be
1. Good and smooth running mecha- done with shielded wires.
nism solves most of the problems con- 5. Frequency booster and preampli-
cerning the project. Mechanisms should fier circuits must be less noisy. Any
be properly grounded. tone control circuit built around tran-
2. Both mechanisms must be oper- sistor may also be used.
ated in play mode and the heads should 6 If the buffer stage is not used, the
be aligned properly for sharp pick-up playback signal to the power amplifier
using any standard pre-recorded cas- will be reduced significantly.
sette. Construct a provision such that the
3- The bias oscillator works with buffer stage gets connected to the pre-
detector IFT (Philips 30044. 30043 amplifier only when the record button
brown) or Nelco detector IFT (black) is pressed.
and delivers a peak-to-pcak
output volt- For a stereo construction, the above
age nearly twice the input.
PCB must again be duplicated except

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 3
Authors’ comment: nal amplitude from a preamplifier is
350 mV 600 mV. This recording
to
circuit does not give any unwanted
noise other than preamp noise. One
In response to several letters received can use low-noise operational ampli-
fiers if necessary.
from regarding my con-
EFY readers
struction project published in Jan. ’92 Please note, our intention is to
issue, I’m pleased to give below some have a recording circuit with inde-
clarifications: pendent controls for both the chan-
7. The circuit should be kept away
The cassette copier is mean, nels. Therefore an automatic control-
1. to
from the transformer. A separate trans-
he a stereo copier, though only one ler has not been discussed.
former may be required for the motor
channel was shown for simplicity. An Potentiometer VR3 is a dual con-
supply. Try to isolate the power sup-
identical channel has to be made for trol and common to both the amplifi-
plies of motor and recording circuits.
stereo. ers for simultaneous control on the ems above
Keep the circuits at least 3
The bias oscillator is however com- balanced channel. Each channel can
the cabinet’s base. Ground the bodies
mon to both the channels. This oscil- be balanced by using two individual
of all the potentiometers.
lator delivers a frequency of about 80 potentiometers (VR4) for the two
channels, if required. One can mark To get better bass effect, connect a
kHz when the FT core is at the top
I
lkpF or 4.7kpF capacitor in place of
position and about 65 kHz when the the ‘normal’ position of level controls
core is at the^ bottom. The oscillator by recording the signals from a stan- 220pF.
output is directly fed to the recording dard pre-recorded cassette of a re- ASHOK KUMAR T.
puted make. Some trial and error may Sulim
head through the capacitor.
The value of C13 should have
2. be required in doing so.
been 4.7 kpF and of C14 3.3 kpF. 5. No special noise limiters are re-
Transistors such as BC549C or BC149 quired. Hissing noise will increase if
can also be used in place of Tl. the 'treble' is boosted highly.
3. IC 741 is a bit noisy only if used C a level VU meter can be added to the
to amplify low-level signals of less output point A of the recording ampli-
than 100 mV. Usually the output sig- fier as follows

4 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 1.

Make Yourself This Special

Two-Way Intercom
Amrit Bir Tiwana

J
ful
ntcrcom sets are immensely use-
and almost indispensible at places
This article
and constructional
describes functional
details of a simple,
most zero)
signals.
for sending and receiving

where a communication link between fail-safe, mains operated, integrated two-

two or more persons is required.The way intercom set. The circuit, in addi- Working
installation of most of the commer- tion to being extremely versatile and The circuit of the two-way inter-
cially available intercoms involves the low in cost, possesses a number of com is shown in Fig 1 I x>w-cost op-
.

cumbersome process of laying the sig- desirable features like in-built calling amp IC 748 forms the heart of the
nal transmission wires, which results facility, self-contained solidstate power circuit. Resistor R1 drops the mains

in increased expenditure and fre- supply, activation indicator, APO (auto- voltage to a suitable level. This voltage
quent failures (due to snapping of wires power off) etc. As the circuit uses no is rectified, filtered and stabilised by
etc). transformers, transistors etc, it is ex- Dl. Cl and D2 respectively. The 12-

D1 volt regulated supply thus obtained drives

©1N4001 the rest of the circuit. Resistors R3 and
Cl R1
SI
R4 tap this voltage which in turn biases
1000m .L 10K
5W PUSH-TO-OFF the non-inverting input of IC1. Resistor
.

16V A 12V02 SWITCH

R2 biases the condenser microphone.
400 mW Capacitor C2 couples the same to the
inverting input of IC1. Resistor R5 is

used to attenuate this input signal.

ResistorR6 determines the gain of 1C1
VR1
IK
A Capacitor C4 is used to couple the out-
put signal to the speaker and to the
LS other set/sets, while VR1 is used to
to 80 attenuate the output signal to a suitable
level.

The calling function is obtained by

$ pressing switch S2. When S2 is pressed,
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram of two-way intercom. capacitor C3 is introduced as a feed-
tremely compact. back clement between the output and
The circuit elimi- non-inverting input of 1C1. IC1 thus
nates the need for anv begins to oscillate and an audio tone is
extra connecting i
generated at the output When switch S
wires by utilising the i
is pressed, the circuit gets deactivated
AC mains wires. The and vice versa.
circuit uses the live
and neutral wires for
powering itself, and Construction
the neutral and The PCB pattern of the circuit and
ground wires (the pot- the components placement on the PCB
ential difference be- arc shown in Figs 2 and 3. Soldering
Fig.2: Actual-size PCB layout for two-way intercom. I tween which is al- should be done using good quality sol-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 5
 set cabinet itself.
4700

^ r?
'
.

Jr
should
Switch

mounted on the
SI
be Sent iconductors:
ICI
PARTS LIST

—
748C op-amplifier IC
—
l pi
IK 7 *e I
^
T *
> -W
5
cabinet in such
a way
circuit
that the

is
D1
D2
1N4001 diode

diode
—
12 volt, 400mW zener

r' w -r afl*Y
T
\j
’% Yl
,
f
!?* t- switched
when the hand-
on Resistors (all
stated otherwise):
1/4W, ±5% carbon, unless

— 10-kilohm, 5W wirewound
CON
z * k 4
R1
Mfc

. ..: '
_
-
;

mm
C 0 o
set is lifted,
switched
when
back in
it is

its
and
off
kept
orig-
R2.R5
R3.R4
R6
R7
VRI
— 12-kilohm
— 18-kilohm
— 250-kilohm
— 470-ohm
— -kilohm preset
1
Fig. 3: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 2. nal position.
dering cote and flux. Extreme care should The speaker and mic. may be fixed Capacitors:
be taken in soldering the components, inside the cabinet using a strong adhe- Cl — lOOOpF, 16V electrolytic

A recom- The LED should be mounted on a

C2 — 2.2 pF, 16V electrolytic
especially IC1. socket is sive.
C3 — O.OlpF ceramic
mended for use with IC1 The pin con- . LED holder. Finally, points A, B and C C4 — 33pF, 16V electrolytic
figuration of the IC is shown in Fig.5. on the PCB should be connected to a 3-
Miscellaneous:
51 — Push-to-off switch
52 — Push-to-on switch
LS — 8-ohm, 0.5W speaker
— Condenser microphone
— IC socket
1. — 9V battery
— Ribbon cable
— LED
live, neutral or ground) arc interchanged.
Fig. 4: Interconnection of the two intercoms through the mains. It is advisable to colour code the 3-core
pin mains plug using a 3-core colour input-output cable, using red for live,
coded cable. black for neutral and green for ground
in all the sets.
Adjustment and installation No part of the circuit should be
The adjustment of the circuit is touched when the intercom is in use as
very simple. Only VR1 has to be ad- it is directly connected to the mains.
justed for the optimum level of output.
Keep VR1 in minimum resistance posi- Useful tips
Fig. 5: Pin configuration of IC 748C. tion which will produce a whistling The circuit may be used as a multi-
sound from the speaker. Increase the channel intercom by utilising digital or
in-circuit resistance of VR 1 so that the electromechanical switching techniques.
whistling sound stops. 2. A battery back-up may be pro-
l”he circuit, if used between places vided by connecting a 9/1 2- volt battery
having common live and netural mains as shown in Fig. 6.
wires, needs no extra connections ex- 3. Use the smallest possible speaker

cept those with the mains lines. The for a compact assembly.
connections between the two sets should 4. The circuit may be used as a

be made as shown in Fig. 4. The com- door-answering system after increas-

After the soldering on the PCB has pleted intercom should always be kept ing the value of R6 and replacing the
been done, excessive flux should be facing downwards so that switch SI small speaker with a larger one.
removed with the help of petrol. All remains pressed and the circuit remains 5. The call-tone frequency may be
connections with the PCB should be deactivated. changed by changing G3.
made using flat ribbon cables. The The complete circuit (one side) would
circuit may be housed in a suitable Precautions cost around Rs 30 only, excluding the
plastic cabinet. The circuit, being quite The circuit may be irrepairably dam- cabinet.
compact, can be enclosed in the hand- aged if any of the three mains wires (i.e.

6 | ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 4.
Readers’ Comments:
In ‘Make Yourself This Special 2-way Can I use loudspeaker as a mic.?
in 8-pin DIPs, can be directly used in-
Intercom’ project in Jan.*92 issue, since A. NAGABABU stead. Results were not found to be as
the output of one intercom is con- R^jahmundry good with some other makes and with
nected to the speaker of thesame set, The components layout shows it as the TO -3 metal-can package and
how can we expect the output to reach a carbon mic. while the parts list indi-
RAM741 and CA741.
the other end? cates a condensor mic.! Which one is
Although this design will work best
And, instead of IC 748C, can we to be used?
without additional wires, in absence
use general -purpose op-amp IC 741 or If IC 748C is not available, can it
of ground wiring one may run an extra
any other easily available IC? be replaced by pA741?
wire, or run the circuit on batteries (9
J. RAV1NDRA The circuit as such seems excel- to 12V) like a normal intercom.
Davangere lent. This circuit was a much awaited
No protection circuit may be fea-
In our house we are having common one.
sible at a reasonable cost and is not
live’and neutral mains wires but we SUNISH ISSAC —
needed provided you take care in
do not have any ground wire in our Calicut wiring and use a plastic enclosure for
electricity board. So how do we use The author, Mr Amrit Bir Tiwana, housing the intercom.
replies:
this circuit? The terms condenser mic. and car-
MAHAVIR D. CHHAJED I ts quite heartening to see a bundle of bon mic. are invariably interchange-
Pune letters from EFY readers for my inter- able. It is the button-sized component
Please clarify: com design. Some common queries used in cassette recorders. The idea of
1. Can I use IC 741 for IC1? are replied below: using a speaker is not feasible. In any
2. Can a protection circuit be used, The output will reach the other case, it would be costlier than using a
in case mains wires get interchanged? end since the two speakers are con- Rs 7 mic.!
3. If I use the circuit for a door-an- nected in parallel. For using as a door phone, you may
swenng system. Is one-side circuit As for IC 748 used, on practical use one side only if you wish to talk
enough or both sides would be re- verification it was found that IC 741, ‘one-way’. Otherwise, both sides are
quired? specifically makes pA741 and LM741 needed.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Full Featured Touch Control
Programmable Power Supply
Kalpesh Dalwadl
*I*ouch control of electronic gadg- selectable rotary switch to select a par- Those who
slight touch of the finger!
ets is no longer a dream. Almost all ticular output or a potentiometer to have a power supply can just add this
electronic hobbyists have their own vary the output smoothly. feature while those who do not have
power supply using the most common Here is which will change
a circuit one may construct it fully as presented

IC regulator LM317. They may have a the output of the power supply by a here.

Fig.l: Circuit for programmable power supply.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 .

Fig.2: Actual-size l‘CB layout for programmable power supply.

The circuit and off turn by turn, thus selecting re- mono-shot mode with output pulse width
The logic of the circuit is very simple sistors R2 through Rll one by one. of slightly more than a second. Touch
and even a common hobbyist can easily Thus, instead of a single-pole 1 0-way plate TP1 is connected at base of Tl 1

understand it. Moreover, it uses easily rotary switch, we are using transistors The 50Hz hum of our body is coupled
available components which are also to select a particular output voltage at a through this touch plate to the base of
very cheap, thus suiting a common man’s time. Capacitor C2 is used to improve Tl 1 and switches the circuit ‘on’, thus
wallet. the transient response of the power grounding pin 2 of IC2. This low-
Here diodes D1 through D4 act as a supply, while C3 is used to filter the going pulse applied at pin 2 triggers
rectifier bridge while capacitor Cl is 50Hz hum. IC2. The output pulse at pin 3 of IC2 is

used for smoothing. Finally, IC1 regu- in turn given to pin 14 (clock) of IC3
lates the output voltage which is se- Touch control which is a 4-bit decade up/down counter.
lected by T1 through T10.
transistors The touch control is achieved by a At the positive transition of each clock
These transistors are made to switch on very simple principle. IC2 is used in pulse at pin 14, the counter advances in
 1 1,

low output. The output pins 1 through

PARTS LIST
1
1
go low according to the BCD input
‘ *

T14 at pins 12 through pin 15 of IC4. Thus, Semiconductors.

AC188 R27 lR28 l

in > 10 >R29 R30 the outputs of IC4 are used to switch the IC1 LM317T voltage
iw ? 1W <4700 5.6K
particular transistor ‘on’, changing the
regulator
IC2 NE555 tinier
voltage across A-B. IC3 74190 up/down decade
R31 counter
.1000 C8
,
470m Short circuit protection IC4 7442 BCD-to-decimal
< LOAD 25V decoder
R32‘
SCR2 Fig. 4 shows a fully solidstate short
4700
A
ICS 7805, +5V regulator
SMC power
circuit protection for the given
SCR1 SN102W D1-D6 1N4007 silicon diode
TYN supply. The current value over which T1-T10 BC557 pnp transistor
short circuit protection to be ach ie ved T11-T13 BC547 npn transistor
//
START STO9 is
S? S3 T14 AC 188 pnp transistor
can be set by VR1. SCR1 TYN 604
C9 cio :
The circuit is a simple capacitor- SCR2 SMC SN102
0.0068m 0.0068m oommutated SCR flip-flopOn con-
necting the load as shown in 4 and Resistors: (all 1/4W, ±5% carbon unless
Fig.
stated otherwise)
pressing S2 momentarily latches SCR 1, R1 — 150-ohm
and the load gets the supply. Parallel R2 — 33-ohm
combination of R27 and R28 senses the R3 — 220-ohm
TESLA
TYN604 load current while R26 along with VR R4 — 390-olim
R5.R25.R29,
varies the base bias of transistor T14.
R32 — 470-ohm
When load is operated, capacitor R6 — 560-ohm
K A C8 charges through R30. When short R7 — 820-ohm
circuit detected, which depends on
R8 — 910-ohm
Fig.4: Circuit for short circuit protec*
is
R9 — 1.2-kilohm
VRl T14 conducts and fires
settings. RIO — 1.8-kilohm
tion.
SCR2. This discharges C8 through SCR2 Rll — 2.2-kilohm
forward (up mode) direction when pin and SCR1 commutates, thus tripping R12-R21 — 1-kilohm
5 kept low through T1 Thus, in load. If we wish to
R22 — 10-kilohm
is 3. this the stop the load |

R23.R24 — 100-kilohm
condition touching TP1 each time will from conducting in-between, pressing i

R26 — 22-ohm
change the output such that it goes on R27.R28 — 1-ohm, 1W
R30 — 5.6-kilohm
[
R36^ R37^ R38<[ R39^ R4o| R41J R31 — 100 -ohm
R33-R42 — 120-ohm
“1 L 1 1
43 43 43 43 43
JL
41 1 1 JL LED 10 R43 — l.lkilohm
43 % 43 43 4 VRl — 1-kilohm
potentiometer
Capacitors:
Fig.5: Circuit for indication of
R33-R42: 1200
output voltages.
Cl — IOOOuF, 50V
electrolytic
increasing. Touching TP2 makes pin 5 disconnecting the load. C2 — 47pF, 50V eletrolytic
of IC3 switch to logic 1. Now for each The only disadvantage using this C3,C4,C7 — nF ceramic
0.1

clock at pin 14, the counter advances in short circuit protection is that mini-
C5 — 0.33pF ceramic
C6 — 10nF, 25V electrolytic
reverse down mode direction. mum of 4.5V is required across A-B C8 — 470nF, 25 V electrolytic
In this condition, touching TP1 each terminals. For the value shown in Fig. C9.C10 — 0.0068pF ceramic
time will change the output across A-B 4, VRl can be calibrated to achieve
Miscellaneous.
such thatgoes on decreasing. IC4 is a
it short circuit protection from 30 m A to —
XI 230V AC primary to
BCD-to-decimal decoder with active 1 A. Also, the load must consume more 0-15VAC, 2amp
~ than the holding current of SCR 1 secondary transformer
which in this case is 15 mA. SI — On/ofT switch
S2.S3 — Push-to-on switch
— 100mA fuse
Indicating output voltage — LEDs
The indication of output
voltage can be done using a Both the above methods are expen-
voltmeter across A-B terminals sive and bulky too. Here we are using
) or an analogue-to-digital con- simple indication using LEDs. Depend-

Fig.6: l’CB layout for the Figs 4 and

J vertcr which in turn drives the ing upon the output voltages, which in
5. 7-segment display. this case are in standard steps of 1 .5 V,

10 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 1

lem x lcm. Copper plates can be detected.

also be used. If aluminium foils (4) Touch TP1 with your fingertip
are used, the surface has to be and see the response with a multimeter
roughened up using a file, oth- across pin 3 and ground of IC2. It
erwise the solder will not ad- should give a pulse of approximately 1

here. Use shielded wire to con- second.

nect the bases of transistors T1 (5) Check the outputs of IC3 in re-
and T12 with the touch plates. sponse to each touch on TP1 This must
.

Wire lengths must be kept as increment the counter upwards. Now

small as possible. touch TP2 and then touch TP1. This
Fig.7: Components layout for PCB shown in Fig.6.
must decrement the outputs of IC3 (in
3V, 4.5 V, 5V, 6V, 7.5V, 9V, 12V, 15 V Fault finding and testing the BCD fashion).
and 18V, a particular LED will glow circuit (6) Finally, check the output across
giving a simple but still reliable indica- After assembling the circuit on a A-B terminals repeating the procedure
tion of output voltage (Fig. 5). PCB and switching the power supply in steps 4 and 5.
on, carry the following tests: (7) To calibrate the current limit in
Construction (1) Check the voltage across ca- case of short protection, connect a wire-
IC1 be mounted on a relatively
is to pacitor Cl. It must be between + 18 and wound potentiometer across the load
large heatsink because it will dissipate +2 IV. If a good quality transformer is terminals. Now vary the potentiometer
a maximum of 18W on full-load cur- used, it will be +21 V approximately. and for each setting measure the cur-
rent of 1 -amp. IC5 is to be mounted on (2) Check the output of 7805 (1C5) rent drawn. Keeping multimeter across
a small heatsink as very little heating is which must be +5 volts. the pot, vary VR1 until the load trips.
expected. IC2. 1C3 and IC4 must be (3) Measure the collector current If all the tests are satisfactory the
mounted on sockets for convenience. drawn by IC2, IC3 and IC4. It should be power supply is ready for operation.
Touch plates can be constructed using 30 to 40 m A. If it is more, there may be The circuit costs around Rs 250.
aluminium foils. Each should measure some wrong connection which should
 Hit The Target
An Electronic Game
Sakthidharan K.A.

^^^ideo games are very popular in Theme of the game the aim and timing is accurate, the
urban area, even though video game Shoot ing down a fast movipg object red planercmainsonthescreenwhilc
equipment are very exclusive and ex- in the sky is not easy. Here a number of other planes fade away. The player thus
pensive. The constructional details of military aeroplanes appear at different wins the game,
an electronic shooting game are de- positions for very short durations. All
scribed here. It employs a minimum green except one which
,h e aircraft are How to play
number of low-cost and easily avail- s red. This one is considered to be the
j
First switch on the gadget. Set the
able components, and has all the actual enemy’s bomber. The player has to chance indicator to zero by pressing
functions of electronic games. In place immobilise this particular plane with reset switch SI. Then press START
of video screen, this project uses an the help of a pushbutton switch, which switch S3. The LEDs (planes) start
LED display. is supposed to be the trigger of a gun. If blinking, emulating the zigzag move-

Fig.l: Circuit diagram for shooting game

12 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Fig. 2: Actual-size PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 1

LED14

IC4
MN4017

LED?

mmm
Fig-3: Components layout for PCB shown in Fig.2

mcnt of planes. Press SHOOT switch panted by an actual gun sound and one indicating that has been shot. Press
it

S2 to hit the target. Each shot is accom- of the LEDs (planes) stays on thescreen the START switch to animate the dis-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IIE1

 sound.

The zigzag idea

As a common practice, the LEDs on
the output pins of IC4 (MN4017) are
expected to glow in a sequential order.
But in this project they are positioned
haphazardly to confuse the player.
This is achieved by the following tech-
niques.
Fig.4: Display panel,
1. The positions of LEDs on the

play again. pulses and drives the LEDs. display board ard not kept in sequential
The player gets eight chances for The reset pin 4 of IC3 is connected order.
shooting. The number of chances availed to the output of IC2 timer, which is 2. Some LEDs are connected in

is indicated by LEDs. On ninth attempt wired as a bistable latch. By pressing series to the same output so that the si-

the whole circuit becomes invalid and a S3, the voltage at trigger pin of IC2 is multaneous illumination of two LEDs
long tone is sounded to indicate that the brought below 2/3 Vcc. As a result, at different points confuses the player
game is over and it is time for cease the output goes high and remains further.

fire. in that stage until the voltage at Adjust preset VR1 to get a fast

threshold pin 6 of IC2 goes above 2/3 LED drive so that the player is not
The circuit Vcc by S2 (SHOOT). This
pressing able to win the game easily. How-
IC4 (MN4017) along with the LEDs brings the output of IC2 to low level ever, it seems that the effective resis-

connected to its outputs functions as a and sets the functions of IC3 as well as tance of VR1 should be below 22-
sequential running light. IC3 is wired IC4. kilohm. Fig. 1 gives details of the
as a clock pulse generator. The input The audio oscillator wired around circuit.

pin 1 4 of IC4 is connected to the output IC5 produces the gun sound effect. The
of IC3. IC MN4017 counts the clock positive voltage obtained through S2 is Construction
fed to the timing capacitor C2 through The actual- size PCB pattern is given
PARTS LIST D2, R7, R9 and RIO. The charging and in Fig. 2.A11 the three NE555 timer ICs
Sem iconductors: discharging of capacitor Cl produces a can be soldered directly on the PCB.
IC1, IC4 — MN4017 decade decay effect to emulate the actual gun Use sockets for CMOS ICs.
counter
sound. D2 checks the charge of Cl Plastic or laminated sheet may be
IC2, IC3, IC5 — NE555 timer af-

D1-D2 — 1N4001 silicon diode fecting threshold pin 6 of IC2. used for the panel. To make the gadget
IC1 MN4017 is also a decade counter. more attractive, the display panel should
Resistors (all 1/4W, ±6% carbon unless
Its input pin 14 is connected to the be covered with glass or transparent
stated otherwise)
plastic sheet, as seen in calculators.
R1.R12.R13 — 150-ohm output of IC2. Each time the output of
R2 — 470-ohm IC2 goes high, IC1 counts one and the 'Hie rear of this glass should be painted
R3 — 10-kilohm corresponding LED glows. When power dark to make it opaque, leaving aero-
R4 — 4.7-kilohm is applied to the circuit through S4, the plane-shaped spaces as shown in Fig.4.
R5.R7 — 68-kilohm The LEDs should be
R6.R9 — 100-kilohm QO output of IC1 goes high to indicate correctly posi-

R8 — 220-kilohm chance number zero. If it is not so, it tioned just below these spaces. The
RIO — 33-kilohm may be brought to zero by pressing switches should be placed at most con-
Rll — 22 hm-kilo
reset switch (S5/S1). Each time the venient positions. Switch S5 is mainly
VR1 — 33-kilohm preset intended for commercial use of the
start switch is pressed, the chance counter I

Capacitors LEDs advance one step. project. It should not be under the con-
Cl — 10nF, 12V electrolytic The Q10 output (pin 11) of IC1 is trol of player.
C2 — 0.0033^iF ceramic
connected to the base of transistor T1 The miniature form of the elec-
C3, C7 — 0.01 \xF ceramic
tronic game described here can be
C4 — 220nF, 12V electrolytic through resistor R4. On the ninth at-
C5 — lOpP, 10V electrolytic tempt of shooting, pin 1 1 goes high and modified to a commercial one by re-
C6 — 2.2 nF, 6V electrolytic the saturated transistor connects pin 4 placing the LEDs with AC mains lamps
of IC2 to ground which resets its out- and SCR/triac circuits for a larger dis-
Miscellaneous
S1-S3.S5 — Push-to-on switch put. The positive voltage present at pin play. This modified model may be
S4 — On/off switch 11 of IC1 is applied to the frequency- used for gambling in exhibitions and
LS — 8 -ohm speaker determining RC network of IC5 to pro- fairs.
LEDs
duce a continuous tone instead of a gun

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Stereo Spectrograph
Dinesh Kumar Raheja and
J. Ramamurthy

Mos stereo systems have some providing a smart, two-dimensional

‘dancing’ effect on a square matrix of
Working
Thissystem’s working depends not only
kind of music level indicator, The indi-
cator may be as sim pie as a set of LEDs, 100 LEDs. on the type of music being played but
00 LEDs also on the ‘stereo’ effects of the
music.
ordinary low-voltage lamps or V-U In this system, out of 1 ar-

ranged square matrix, only one Greater the stereo effect, hater the move-
(volume-unit) meters. These were later in a

replaced by bar-graph type LED indi- LED glows at a time and it keeps danc- ment of the dancing LED. As you know,
ing within the so-formed LED array a stereo signal is recorded or played on
cators. Though attractive, they pro-
‘movement’ along with the music being played on two independent channels which arc
vide only one-dimensional
Now the stereo system. The movement or purposely isolated from each other.
of LEDs with the music. this sys-
dancing of the LED depends basically Therefore, at every instance the signal
tem has also become very common.
‘stereo’ effect of the music. strengths of the right and left channels
Presented here is a spectacular sys- on the
Hence, the system may be called a are different from each other. As shown
tem to replace the outdated music level
stereo spectrograph. in the schematic block diagram (Fig.l).
indicators. This system is capable of
10
IU LEVELS
LCVCLU DIGITAL
WlCii i PEAK DETECTOR
1
1

FROM LEFT VOLTAGE 1

VOLTAGE
I _J T
CHANNEL AMPLIFIER 1
FOLLOWER 100 LEDs
10 LEVELS
PREAMPLIFIER 1 FOR EACH 10
(SQUARE
COMPARATOR
O
"C'
> 1

1
CIRCUIT
ROW
(NPN
ROWS MATRIX)

tj 1
TRANSISTOR)
1

SENSITIVITY J
"1 10
0 LEVELS DIGITAL PEAK DETECTOR
j 1
COLUMNS
I

VOLTAGE I
VOLTAGE
FROM RIGHT AMPLIFIER I

CHANNEL I

10 LEVELS EX OR FOLLOWER
INVERTERS FOR
PREAMPLIFIER COMPARATOR GATES
EACH
I> CIRCUIT
COLUMN
(PUP
TRANSISTOR)
J

Fig. Is SchematTcT)(ocTc diagram for stereo spectrograph

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
Fig. 3: Pin configu rations of the ICs.

the audio signals from the left channel move along the vertical columns and j
vide the movement of the Lt:D along
|

are made to force the glowing LLi I ) to the signals from the right channel pro- the horizontal rows, lienee, we see

Fig.4: PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig.2.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS lufl

Fig. 5: Components layout for the PCI1 shown in Fig. 4.

‘movement’ of the glowing Llil) in a Ibis is required only to boost up suffi-

i

PARTS LIST
two-dimensional square area where the cient current required for an LCD. If
Sem icon doctors:
vertical and horizontal movements are — LM these transistors are not used then the
ICl 458/LF353 dual
1

isolated from each other, just like audio op-amp or LF442/LF412 XOR gates will get damaged due to
signals in both the channels. IC2-IC6 — LM339 quad comparators excessive current taken by an LED as
The audio signals from the left
IC7-IC11 — C D4 030, CD4070 quad compared to the source current capa-
exclusive OR gates
channel arc first amplified by a high- (CMOS) bility of the XOR gates. In a similar
gain voltage amplifier that is built around IC 12. IC13 — CD4069 hex inverters fashion, the signal is amplified, com-
an op-amp. The gain of this amplifier (CMOS) pared and XORed from the right chan-
can be controlled by controlling the
TI-T10 — BC547B npn silicon nel.Then using invertor logic, one
transistor*
negative feedback. Thereafter the TI 1 -T20 — BC557B pnp silicon column is made low and all others are
amplified signal is rectified using di- transistors kept high. Again we use voltage fol-

odes. Then it is com-

fed to a 10-level D1.D2 — 1N4148, silicon diodes lower (pnp transistors) to drive the
parator circuit using I.M339. The out- columns of the LED matrix.
Resistors (all I/4W, *5% carbon, unless
put of these are XORed (using CD4030/ slated otherwise/: Hence, only one row will have high
4070). So it works like a digital peak- Rl-Rll — 1 -kilohm voltage and only one column will have
detector for 0 levels. R12 — 27-kilohm low voltage at a time. Therefore, only
1
R13.R32 — 100-kilohm
The output of an XOR gate is high
R33-R42 — 470-ohm
one LED that is connected between
only if one input is high and the other is VR1 — 100-kilohm linear these rows and columns will glow. And
low. The output is low only if both the (dual pot) it will keep on dancing with the stereo

Capacitors ;
inputs are either high or low. Hence, we effects of the music being played.
C1.C2 — 0.1|ijyi2V ceramic disc
get high voltage at only one row that
C3 — 470pF/16V electrolytic If you play a mono record or cas-

corresponds to the peak level of the sette then the movement of the dancing
audio signal in the left channel. An Miscellaneous: LED will be equal in both the horizon-
Vmitlcr-followcr using npn transistor
LED3- and vertical directions or the move-
LED 102 — (»mm -round) red LED
tal

(I3C547B) is connected to each row. ment will be inclined at 45° typically.

iFl ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 llic dual potentiometer, which is
used in the feedback path of the op-
amps, acts as a sensitivity control po
lentiometer for the system. You should
j

adjust it properly to get a full wide area

movement of the LCD.
As shown in the circuit diagram
(Fig.2), the system is driven by the
preamplifier of the stereo system. There-
fore. the visual effects must he made
in-
dependent of the volume level of the
power amplifiers used in your stereo
systems. As this circuit requires a number
of chips, the pin diagrams of the used
chips arc shown in Fig.3 (a, b. c and d).
You am construct this spectogrnph
as per your convenience. The number
of I .CDs can be reduced or increased as
required, but it must form a square
array. As it requires very less power,
you can directly take the supply lines
I
(12V) from your stereo system. This
stereo spcctograph will surely add a
1

new dimension to the visual effects of

your stereo system.
j

Readers’ Comments:
Stereo Spectrograph project published
inEFYMarch’92 issue is good. Please
convey my thanks to the author for
this very innovative idea.
The circuit uses too many ICs,
transistors and however.
resistors,
The entire idea could have been real-
ised by using three ICs (one LM1458
and two LM3914), 10 transistors and
20 resistors, besides a few other com-
ponents.
The new circuit can be constructed
even on a general-purpose PCB and
consumes very little power.
T.S.SHANKAR
Hyderabad
The author, Mr Dineah Kumar i?a-
heja, replies:
I’m thankful to Mr Shankar for his
suggestion. His approach is very
nice. His circuit can be further im-
proved by connecting all the ten out-
puts of IC3 to +Vcc (12V) through
pull-up resistors of 10K ( 1/4 W) each.
This is required as the outputs of
LM3914/3915 are ‘current-regulated
open collectors’. However, IC2 docs because the ‘open collectors’ of IC2 ant* transistors network,
not require these pull-up resistors are connected through LED matrix

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IB 9
 Digital Time Switch
S. Batra

Y~
lights
might have noticed the
suddenly switching on in the
street I
through diodes D1-D24 and D25-D48.
Common points are connected to limit-
Relay control
In fact, the adjustment of ‘on time/
evening and switching off early in the ing resistors R1-R24, which are con- off time’ is nothing but setting of two
|

morning. Such operations for a com- nected to common-cathode display drips alarms for two synchronous clocks. When
plete row of lights are achieved auto- FND500 or their equivalent. The dis- the alarm of ‘on clock’ is active, pin 25
matically with the help of a 'time switch’ play will normally show the real clock of IC2 will be high and hence SR latch
which is usually mounted on an electric time. will set. Please note that four gates of
pole. It is generally an analogue type IC 401 1 have been used as SR flip-flop.
of 'time switch*. Digital time switches Set switches 'lhe output *Y* will be high. Hence,
are not yet commonly available in our 1

S. F and R are the slow set, fast set saturating transistor T1 activates relay
country. and reset controls respectively. Apply- RLl to operate the device under con-
ing VecxBjat pins 32, 33 and 34 simul- trol. Indication LED2 will light when-
Principle taneously, reset the clock to 0000 hour ever the relay is operated.
Using the principleof Master Slave ‘ (as the clocks arc operating in 24-hour Whenever the alarm of ‘off clock’
Clock’ (published in EFY Nov.'91), 1 mode). As it is desired to run both the is active, SR latch will reset and the
have developed a digital time switch. clocks synchronously, reset operation
j
output Y will become 0. This in turn
The block schematic diagram of the is made common through diodes D49- will release the relay RLl. LED 2 will
j

same is given in Fig. 1 Basically, there

. D54.
I
be no more lit.

are two independent clocks running Toset ’on time’ bringswitchSl to- Please note that the ‘device under
synchronously. The ‘on’ clock gives a wards ‘on CTL\ Pressing the switch I) control’ will be controlled by the time
criterion lor switching on the device. will display the on time for the device, switch only when the auto/manuul switch
The desired on time can be adjusted up By keeping D pressed, set the desired S7 is kept in ‘Auto’. Whenever the time
to the last minute. Similarly, the ‘off* time by operating respective switches S switch circuit poses problems or the
clock gives a criterion for switching off and F. device has to be operated in addition to
the device. l*he desired off time can Similarly, by throwing the switch the automatic set time, the device can
also he adjusted (up to the last minute) SI towards ‘off CTI,’. off time of the be controlled manually by operating
for any time up to 24 hours. The ‘on time switch can be set to desired lime. I
switch S7 to ‘Manual’ mode.
clock* criterion operates the relay and RESET

the ‘off clock’ criterion releases the

relay through a relay control circuit. '

This way, any device can be controlled

for a desired duration.

Circuit description
'The complete circuit diagram of the
project isshown in Fig.2. IC1 uses 5369
as a master oscillator/dividcr and sup-
plies 601 Iz drive at pin 1 . IC2 and 1C3
use 8361, a 40-pin clock chip. The
601 Iz input at pin 35 receives the drive
through 100-kilohm resistors R26 and
R27 respectively. To economise the
design, a common display is used for
both the identical clocks. Segment
outputs of 1C2 and IC3 arc paralleled Fig. 1: Block diagram for digital time switch.

2 jM\ ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Power supply tor IC1, memory of clocks and SR flip- componentsexcept the transformer and
The power supply is a conventional flopcnergiscd even during power inter- |
the relay whereas a display board (75mm
D55 and D56
1

one. Diodes arc used as ruplions or failures. Only the display x 35mm) will accommodate only four
full-wave rectifier with transformer XL will be inactive during power failures, i
display chips. Both the PCBs arc intcr-
Vcc(A) is the supply with battery back- Under no-load conditions, more than connected through 26 flexible wires,
up whereas Vcc(B) is without back-up. 12V appearing on Vcc(A) bus may The completed time switch can be
Two Ni-Cd batteries of 3.6V each can cease oscillation of IC1. Introduction given the shape of a wall-hanging and
be used. Varta’
' make Ni-Cd recharge- of LED3and D60-D62 keep Vcc(A)/ kept near the device to be controlled,
able batteries arc now easily available Vcc(B) within 12 V and result in better Before starting the assembly check
in the market. However, A 9V ordinary stability. all resistors, capacitors, transformers,
battery can also be used. transistors etc with the help of a mul-
Vcc(B) is supplied through SI to Assembly limetcr or otherwise. First, assemble
pins 23 of IC2 andIC3 whereas Vcc( A) The project can be simplified if the display PCB and check all the seg-
is extended to pins 28 of 1C2 and 1(3 as '
components arc arranged as per two ments of all the four display chips by
well as pin 8 of IC1 and pin 14 of IC4. recommended PCBs. A motherboard extending lest bench supply to +1 2V or
This arrangement will keep the oscilla- (155mm x 135mm) will house all the 9V battery to anodes of every LED seg-

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for digital time switch.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 2 I
 Fig. 3: Actual-size PCB layout for the circuit.

ment, one by one, in series with a lk approximately 150mm length. Connect note the position of SI and with Jhc
resistor. After the display PCB is tested, the various leads on the motherboard hclpof respective Sor F switches make
stan assembling the motherboard. Mount which go to various switches. Through the display steady.

all the diodes and resistors and solder these leads test the functioning of both (b) By pressing R reset both the
them. the clock chips. clocks.

After soldering check all the di- Now fit rest of the components, (c) By keeping SI in ‘off CTL'
odes/resistors on the PCB with the help e.g. IC4, XI. switches, power supply position adjust the real clock time.

of a multimeter once again. circuit and two Ni-Cd batteries. These Similarly, in ‘on Oil.* position adjust

Complete the assembly of master batteries will automatically gel charged the real clock time.
|

oscillator IC1, quartz crystal and asso- and supply back-up current during power (d) Keep SI in ‘on CTL* position,

ciated resistors and capacitors. Extend interruptions. Mount the motherboard and by keeping I) pressed, adjust on

9V or 12V through test bench power on the back cover of the box and mount lime wiih the help of respective S and F
supply and test the functioning of the display PCB, switches and indicators switches.

master oscillator. If oscillating, 6011/ on the front panel. (c) Keep SI in ‘off CTL* position

output should be available at pin 1 of and similarly set off time.

IC1. This can be easily seen through a Testing Now the lime switch is ready for

DMM (digital multimeter) having pro- After Ihe assembly job is over, test use. Extend the power socket to device
vision for frequency measurements. the project as follows, keeping switch under control through auto/manual
Now complci^ the soldering job of S2 in ‘on' position: switches S7 and S8. Switch S2 is an
both the clock chips. Interconnect both (a) When the time switch is switched optional switch, which when operated

the PCBs through 26 flexible leads of i

on, the display may be blinking. If so. to disable position will prevent clock

EE1I ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 TO*VO)S^
SWITCHES

31

Fig. 4: Components layout for the FCB.

time from getting disturbed by acci- the device may remain switched off clock time ahead by 24 hours with the
dental pressing of S or F switches. Keep when it should be on. and vice-versa. respective F and S switches. It may
switch S2 in enable position while set- U nder these cond it ions, keep he sw it ch
t set to correct position after one or
ting the time etc. SI to 'on CTL* or
Sometimes it may happen that, de- ‘offCTL’ position
pending upon the setting of SR latch. and make the real

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 23
 '

PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 —
5369 quartz controlled
oscillator
IC2, IC3 — 6361
IC4 — CD4011 quad two input
NAND gat*
D1-D54 — 1N4 149 silicon diode
D55-D62 — lN400Uilicon diode
T1 — BC147/SL100 npn
tranaiator

Resistors (all 1J4W, ±5 % carbon unless

stated otherwise)
R1-R24, R30 — 1 -kilo Km
R25 — 1.5-kilohm
R26.R27 — 100-kilohm
R28 — 10- megohm
R29 — 220-ohm
R31-R35 — 4.7-kilohm

Capacitors:
Cl — 500pF, 25V electrolytic
C2 — 15pF ceramic
C3, 04 — 0 OlpF ceramic
C5 — 0.22pF trimmer
Miscellaneous;
XI — 220V AC primary to
12V-0-12V AC, 300mA
secondary transformer
XL — 3.579MHz crystal

SI — DPDT switch
S7 — 1-pole, 2-way switch
S2-S6, — Push-to-on switch
S9.S10
S8 — Oa'off switch
RL1 — fiV. 200-ohm SPST relay
MINUTES
DIS1-DIS4 — FND500
— Battery 3.6V
— PCBs
— LEDs
— 5 amp two pin socket

The most popular application of this

time switch can be in controlling the

daily pump-motor operation, the dura-

tion of which is normally fixed, de-
pending upon the water consumption.
This time switch can be designed for
5A or 1 5 A of the load current. The relay
contacts will have to be of the appropri-
ate rating, the com plete design remain-
ing the same.
It has typical industrial applications
Fig. 7: Pin configuration of the ICs. such as controlling street lights, com-
pound lights and in oil heating installa-
two trials.
tions, water processing plants, electric
The digital time switch will be more
healers etc. In general, it can be used to
useful when the device has to be con-
control any electrical device or appli-
trolled precisely up to the last minute.
ance.
The analogue time switch has a least
count of about 15 minutes.

El| ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

Readers' Comments: The author, Mr S.Batra, replies: wish the radio to switch off automati-
Capacitor C2 and crystal XL are shown cally after a desired period when you
correctly in Fig. 2 whereas they have are going to bed. With the pushbut-
I could not make the Digital Time
ton pressed, if the desired time is set
been shown wrongly connected in
Switch project published in EFY through the slow set switch, a maxi-
March'92 issue because of certain the PCB layout. Inconvenience caused
regretted.
mum 59-minute down counter is acti-
discrepancies in figures. is
vated and the radio is switched on.
Capacitor C2 and crystal XL are IC8361’s pin 24 is used when alarm
Pin 27 is a ‘sleep out’ point which
facility of the clock is in use. When
shown connected between pins 5 and is used to activate the radio while
6 in Fig. 2 but they arc shown between
the alarm rings, but you want to
using the sleep down counter,
pins 5 and 8 in the PCB pattern! sleep some more (snooze), a high
and give some more potential (snooze input) is extended to
Please clarify
this pinthrough a pushbutton. This I have gone through the technical
information about pins 24, 26, 27 etc
enables snooze and the alarm rings data of both the ICs and have found
ofIC 8361.
SAYED JAFAR NAQVI automatically after nine minutes. One
them pin-to-pin compatible to MM5397
can have this facility for an hour. Pin except for a minor difference which is
Aligarh
26 is used to stop the alarm. When the not relevant to this project. Therefore,
alarm is ringing, if the high potential 8362 may be used in place of the 8361
I am thankful to the author for his is extended to pin 26 (alarm off in-
without any hesitation.
superb Digital Time Switch project put), the alarm stops and rings the
published in EFY Mat *92 issue. As next day at the same time.
IC LM8361 is not available in the Pin 30 comes into action when IC
market can I use IC LM8362 instead? 8361 is used for a clock-cum-radio.
This pin for ‘sleep display’ feature
SAN JAY SARAWAGI enables one to listen to a radio up to
Vapi 59 minutes. It is found useful if you

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 125

 Digital Frequency Counter
Sanjay Goel

^\digital frequency counter (DFC) paratively cheaper. unknown signal is passed through the
is used for building, testing and design- A DFC normally has several mcas- AND gate for 1 sec. and the waveform
ing analogue and digital circuits. It can uring ranges. It is possible to add a few frequency or the number of pulses per
also be used for measuring the fre- digits to the display by a method known second are counted by the counter. The
qucncy of any periodic waveform. as ‘over ranging’. frequency is displayed on the 7-scg-
The fundamental operation is shown ment LEDs with the help of a digital
in the block diagram in Fig. 1. Block diagram panel meter.
The cost of a DFC is largely gov- A clock oscillator circuit generates The unknown input frequency should
emed by the number of digits in its approximately 1001 Iz signal whose be a perfect square wave. For this, we
display and the maximum input fre- Irequcncy isdividedby the divider net- use the schmitt trigger which converts
qucncy it can handle. An inexpensive work. At the output of the divider 11 Iz any waveform into a square wave. This
instrument would typically offer a 4- signal is obtained. This frequency has unknown input signal must not be greater
digit display. This frequency counter, 1-sec. time period. The 1-scc. pulse is than 4V. If the input signal is very low
incorporating all the features, is com- applied to the AND gate. Therefore, the (millivolts) it should be amplified with
the help of an amplifier before being
I

fed to the schmitt trigger circuit.

The circuit
IC 555 is used to generate the clock
frequency and the output frequency at

pin 3 is given to pin 1 of 7490, i.e. IC2.

IC2, 1(3 and IC4 use decade count-
ers. The frequency at pin 12 of IC2 is
Fig. 1; Block diagram.

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram of digital frequency counter.

El ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 the ENABIJ: gate signals. ITiis time
period is used for measuring the fre-

quency of input signals.

The output at pin 12 of IC2 is con-
nected to pin 1 of IC5 by the DPDT
switch SI. I"he 1C5 is a dual J-K flip-
flop with separate sets, clears and clocks.
If 1 Hz square wave is used to drive the
J-K flip-flop, its output 0 will be 0.5 Hz
square wave.
The output Q will be high for ex-
actly 1 see. and low for 1 see., and it

will thus be used for the enable gate

signal. Note that 10Hz square wave
Pig. 3: Actual-size PCB layout for frequency counter. will generate a 0.1 -sec. gate and the
0. 1 Hz square wave will generate a 10-
sec. gate enable time.
When the J-K flip-flop is toggled

|
high, measurement period starts. Now
the unknown input signal passes through
the count gale IC7 (7408) and ad-
vances the counter. Assume that the

counter is at (X)(X). At theend of the gate

time, say 1 sec., the counter reading is
the final frequency. Positive transition
of Q of IC5 triggers the monostablc
multivibrator IC6 (74121) one-shot.
Therefore. at pin 6 of IC6, a positive
RHSET pulse appears. This pulse is used
Fig. 4: Components luyoul for tlie PCB shown in Fig. 3.
to reset the counters. Now to latch the

OF IC6
Fig. 5: 4-dlgit counter and display circuit.

exactly 10 Hz. Atpin 12oflC3and IC4 generating pulse at pin 12 of IC2, IC3 contents of counter, a negative pulse is
the frequency is 1 Hz and 0.1 Hz res- and IC4 is 0.1 sec., 1 sec. and 10 sec. required, lienee, the output Oof 1C5 is
pcctivcly. Hence, the time period of respectively. These pulses are used for used for this purpose. The input signal

ELECTRONICS PROJECTSlEui
 2 17

nun

1
14

2 13

3 12
74121
4 11

5 p
I
Fig. 6: Actual-size PCB layout for Fig. 5. GND 7 a

fo
CPil |i J 16

2 15

3 14

4 13 GNO
SN7476
VCC 5 12
9
IMI CP2 IS6 11
Mg.
IMH- sn?7 10

8 9

Fig. 8: Pin configurations of ICs.

counter of the IC advances on each

negative edge of the clock pulse, which
is received at pin 12 by IC7. A high
signal on display sfjjxt, i.e. pin 6.
through 1-kilohm resistor selects the
Fig. 7: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 6.
number in the counter to be displayed.
can be of any form. To convert these nal output latch
la and a source driver for Low signal on latch enable input latches

signals into square wave, sdimitt trig- the display.

display, the count at the output. The display
ger is used. The schmitt trigger is built The CMOS 1C is an
TheCM( 18-pin, dual-in- used for this chip is 7-segment com-
around timer 7555. A square wave of line package
package. It has four decade count- mon-cathode type. IC 74C926’s range
equivalent frequency of input signal is ers, latches and
s reset input. It consists of supply is +3 Vto +6V with high noise
received at pin 3 of ICS and is fed into of an entemal
enterr multiplexing circuitry immunity (noise swings IV).
AND gate. To count the frequency, m
with four multiplexed outputs. This The signal generated by 1C6 is fed
AND gate is used as count gate which multiplexed circuit has its own free- to the reset terminal of 74926 IC. This
passes the frequency for the selected running oscillator.
osci reset pulse hasan arbitrary width of
gate time. The gate time is selected by A carry out
< pin, i.e. pin 14, is also lps. set by capacitor C3 and preset
switch SI. fo cascading the counter.
available for VRl timing components. The end of
The display circuit is built around Ilcncc we can
Hence ca also increase the range of the reset pulse is the end of one meas-
the National Semiconductor IC 74C926. this frequency
frequent counter. With the help urement period.
It has a 4-digit counter with multi- of this pin, w can
we increase the number If we select one second gate lime, at
plexed 7-segment output drivers, inter- of digits fron four tocight. The internal
ofdigitsfrom that instant the decimal point will be at

28 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
|
 0

the right of the third digit (D1S1) and he Ip of presets VR1 and VR2. When it
PARTS LIST
the counter will he capable of counting ,
displays the input frequency correctly,
ICl — 555 timer up to 9999 Hz full scale. With the help 1

the calibration is complete. Now the

IC2-IC4 — 7490, decade counter* of this counter we am measure up to frequency counter ready for measur-
IC5 — 7476 dual JK flip-flop
1 is

IC6 — 74121, mono*table kHzbysclcctingdiffercnt gate timings, ing any unknown frequency of an input
multivibrator and the accuracy is compatible with signal. All the above circuits, including
IC7 — 7408 quad 2-input fJAND I

! that of the counter. the display, may be enclosed in a metal

gate 1

IC8 — 7555 CMOS timer You can set the reset pulse by a cabinet. For better results, the oibinct

IC9 — MM74C926, 4-digit i

suitable combination of capacitor C3 should be shorted to ground.
counter and preset VR2, as shown in Fig.2.
T1-T4 — SL 00 npn transistor
1
|

Conclusion
Resistors (all 1/4W, ±5% carbon, unless |
Assembly, testing and calibration A DFC is not difficult to use, but
stated otherwise): This project is easy to assemble on you need to be careful about the choice
R1 — 27-kilohm a general-purpose or the suggested PCD. of the test-point when testing LC oscil-
R2 — 220-ohm
All the ICs should be mounted on IC lator, especially the high frequency types.
R3-R9 — 100-ohm
R10R14 — 1-kilohm sockets and soldered carefully. All com- In general, it is best to choose a low
R15.R16 — 100-kilohm ponents should be checked before as- impedance part of the circuit and, as far
R17.R18 — 1 -megohm sembly. After completing the assem- as possible, avoid taking the signal
VR1 — 100-kilohm preaet
power supply should be checked.
VR2 — 10-kilo hm preset
bly, the directly.
It should not be greater than 5 volts Remember there will be a certain
Capacitors: regulated. Also check whether IC 555 amount of capacitance in the test leads,
Cl — 0.33|iF ceramic is generating clock pulses or not. The and the DFC have a small
itself will
C2.C4 — O.OljiF ceramic
amount of input capacitance. This can
C3 — 0.1 jiF ceramic
output at the counters should also be
examined. significantly reduce the operating fre-
Miscellaneous For calibration of the circuit give quency of the circuit and, in an extreme
D1S1-DIS4 — LTS543S known input frequency at the input case, damp the oscillator to the point
SI — 2-pole 3-way *witch
terminal and set it at display with the where it will ccasc to function. Q
 Fire Sensing System
Kalpesh Dalwadi

P"ire isone of the mast hazardous depending on temperature increase prin- j

sensor. The system, besides giving an
natural forces. Sensing fire and fight- ciple. We
can also use opto devices to i
alarm, also visually indicates the exact
ing it in the early stages can prevent sense smoke. One of the projects pub- position where the fire has taken place.
losses to a great extent. Sensing fire lished in EFY Vol.6 used Japanese Figaro 'ITiis system becomes very necessary in

electronically has become one of the *

TGS gas sensors. Such sensors are large multistoreyed buildings, hotels,
most reliable fire-fighting techniques expensive and are not easily available. offices etc.
today. The system presented here uses the It is very flexible and can take in-
I

Sensing fire needs reliable smoke/ most common yet very reliable bime-
I
puts from any number of sensors. It is
fire sensors. Thermistors can sense fire tallic strip of a tubclight starter as a heat very simple to construct and is quite

*5V DC

Fig.l: Circuit diagram of fire sensing system.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
Fig.2: Actual-size PCB layout for fire sensing system.

lOOOu
1«V

3x1 N4 148
‘-VW-* I

r — i
—
1
100K

Fig.3: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 2.

Fig. 5: Power supply.

sponding latch circuit.Here latching CD4049 ICs.
property is need at so that once the fire When sensor A is operated, the input

is sensed the alarm remains ‘on’ until of gate N2 (pin 5) is at logic 1 through
Fig.4: Sensor. adequate precautions are taken. the 680-ohm limiting resistor. After
economical too. When the bimetallic strip gets heated two inversions, output of N1 (pin 2) is

due to the fire flame, it connects the at logic 1 which is fed hack through

'Hie circuit positive supply line to the input of switching diode 1N4 148 to the input of
The entire system works on a very digital Latch circuit, thus latching the N2, thus latching the circuit. LED2
simple principle. The bimetallic strip latch. The digital latch circuit is built connected across the output of N1 and
acts as a switch to switch on the corrc- around easily available CMOS inverter ground indicates the particular position

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IHB

 Headers’ ( uinmonts:
Power supply
While thanking theauthor for this
The power supply for the system is
wonderful project, I request him to
very straightforward and simple. No
inform me:
regulator is required as the CMOS IC
1. Can I use a failed starter as a
needs no regulation. fire sensor?
Full-wave bridge and smoothing ca- 2. How to use a thermistor as a fire
pacitor form the main components of sensor 9
the power supply. A 9V dry cell is used 3. How to use a loudspeaker in-
as battery back-up in case of mains fail- stead of buzzer?
ure. In this case, instead of an electric In the power supply section I think
Kg. 6: 1‘hotngraph of author's prototype.
bell a buzzer operates. RL1 is a DPDT the author unnecessarily used a relay
where sensor A is installed. indirectly
(double-pole, double-throw) relay which for battery back-up. Perhaps a single
indicating the place where the fire has DR50 germanium diode in series with
connects the 9V battery in the circuit
occurred. At the same time, diode D8 and the buzzer driving transistor. Flat-
battery would have sufficed.
conducts and provides base bias to tran-
tery back-up does not affect the re-
S. RAVI KUMAR
sistorTl and the relay operates the Jagtial (Karimnagar Dist.)
maining operations of the system ex-
hooter or an electric bell. The author, Mr Kalpesh Dalwadi,
cept the sound of the alarm. replies:
TheO. 1 pF capacitor at input of latch
circuit filters the noise pick-up by long
A failed starter may be used
only if
Construction the capacitor in parallel with bimetal-
wires leading to sensors, thus prevent-
The complete circuit can be con- lic strip has failed and not the bime-
ing any false triggering of the alarm.
structed on a general-purpose PCB even tallic strip itself.
Switch SI acts as a master reset
A thermistor (NTC type or even
though the suggested PCD layout is
switch, OR logic is implemented at the
provided for readers* convenience. PTC type, as shown below) can b«
base of traasistor Tl to sense signal used.
A tubclight starter element is taken
from each sensor. In this circuit only * V« l00K
out of its aluminium/plastic covering
six sensors are shown but they can be
and is used as a sensor. With great care
increased without changing the main
the glass bulb covering of the bimetal-
circuit.
lic strip is to be broken. Only the upper
PARTS LIST half of the bulb is to be broken so that

the bimetallic strip is exposed.

Sent iconductors:
IC1, IC2 — CD4049 Hex inverter Now the sensor is ready for use. It is
D1-D6. to be installed at the nearest point pos-

D8-D13 — 1N4 14 silicon diode may occur so that maxi-

sible where fire
D7, mum sensitivity is achieved. The bime-
D14-D17 — 1N4 001 silicon diode
Tl, T2 — BC547 npn transistor tallic strip is basically a fast acting
sensor which gets connected within 4 to
Resistors (all J/4W, zA'i carbon, unless 5 seconds when in direct contact with a
stated otherwise):
fire flame.
R1-R6 — 680-ohm
R7-R12 — 620-ohm •

R13-R18 — 100-kilohm Testing the circuit

R19 — 1-kilohm After completing the fabrication,
lightup a candle. Switching on the
Capacitors:
C1-C6.C8 — power supply, bring the candle near the
O.IijF ceramic disc
C7 — 1000(iF, 16V electrolytic bimetallic strip. Within 3 to 4 seconds
the strip gets connected and the particu- results, such as sensitivity. Ther-
Miscellaneous:
LliD lights up and simultaneously mistors will need such adjustments.
Xl — 230V AC primary to lar

0-6V AC. 500mA the relay operates. If the circuit oper- Using a loudspeaker instead of
secondary transformer ates in the given sequence, the system buzzer will need extra circuit to gen-
RL1 — 9V, 100-ohm DPDT relay is ready for installation and use. erate alarm sent through speaker.
RL2 — 9V, 100-ohm SPST relay
The complete system with power This will unnecessarily make the cir-
S2 — On/off switch
the
cuit more complicated.
SI — Push-to-off switch supply and a good metallic cabinet would
Use of DR50 is not feasible as the
Buzzer — 1CPB27 (Canon make) or cost around Rs 150 which is quite rea-
PEC 271 H (PEC make) buzzer ringing circuit has to be con-
sonable as compared to such systems
— 9V drv battery
available in the market.
nected at the output at times of power
— LEDs’ failure. Use of DPDT relay kills two
-I birds with a single stone.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Spectacular Spectra
Uttiya Chowdhury

y^J verv electronics enthusiast dreams encourage hose enth usiasts who would
t I
tinuously lit.

of making a hi-fi deck at least once in like to realise their dreams. I’ll deal The movies and
visual effects in
While hedreams, he plans,
his life time. with the spectrum part of it. Yes, intro- television etc arc based on this prin-
“the deck set will have excellent sound ducing to you, a 10-band. 10-level, ciple.
quality and wattage. It will be equipped spectacular super spectrum analyser at Bach column in this 10-column
witha 10-band graphic equaliser, Each i a down-to-earth cost! spectrum analyser will show the level
band of the graphic equaliser will be One IC 3914 is necessary for a 10- of a particular frequency. The display
accompanied by a 10-level spectrum * level spectrum analyser for one input shall show only one such column at a
analyser. And when lights in the ten channel. So a 10-band level spectrum time. We shall display the columns one
bands of the spectrum analyser will analyser conventionally built requires after another, and after displaying the
dance with the beats of drum and throbs ten such ICs. But LM3914 is expen- tenth column we show the first
shall
column. But we finish this
|

entire process in less than

1/10 second, so that each
column is shown more than
ten times a second. It will
thus appear as if all the
columns are being lit at a

time.
|

Circuit
"Hie display matrix is
the easiest pan. Here all we
have to do is to solder 1 00
small LEDs in a Ox 10 ma-
1

trix. The PCB should be

made as shown and the
LEDs should be soldered
on it such that all the an-
odes go to the columns and
all cathodes go to the rows.
You can, alternatively, buy
Fig. 1: Block diagram of the spectacular spectra display. a 10x10 readymade LED
of cymbals, what a great display will it sive, and ten such ICs wilt certainly be !
I
matrix.
be!” But when he comes back to reality outside our limited budget. Test the matrix by giving positive
and faces the great expenses involved, supply to the columns and negative to
he has to omit a lot of features. lie Principle you give positive to the nth
the rows. If
comes deck he can
to realise that the The solution for making such an column and negative to the mth row,
afford to make has so few attractions eye-catching project lies in persistence the mth LED in the nth column should
that it is hardly worth making. He aban- of vision, i.e. if a person secs some- be lit. Cheek all the LEDs in this way
dons the idea after realising that his thing, its image remains in his brain for because any mistake here will be hard
dream calls for a loaded wallet which about 0. 1 second. For instance, if a bulb to correct later. Faults may be caused
unfortunately he doesn’t have. blinks at a rate of more than ten times a by putting the LEDs in the wrong way.
But why sigh? Here is a project to second, it appears as if the bulb is con- bad soldering and of course by bad

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 33 I
 N4O01

Kig- 2: Circuit diaigmni of the fipnlmm immIvmt.

31 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 the non-inverting input is higher than they are active. So the outputs of the
that at the inverting input. LM391 4 are called ‘active low’ and the
Now we have ten op-amps with others ‘active high* outputs.
their inverting inputs getting 0, 0.5, The LM3914 has an extra feature.
1....4.5 volts, respectively through a In an actual op-amp chain, the first op-

chain of ten resistors in scries. All the amp stays active when the second one
non-inverting inputs arc shorted and is lit. But in the LM3914, there is a pin

are getting the input signal. So, when called mode selector. Putting this pin
the input signal is 0 volt, none of the op- high (connected to positive) you select
amps will have a high output, and so the bar mode and get a display as in an
none of the outputs will be active. actual op-amp chain. But you groundif

Let’s imagine that the input voltage this pin, you select the dot mode where

is growing higher. When the input volt- the previous op-amp goes inactive when
age crosses 0.5 volt limit, both the first the next one is lit. So in dot mode, there
LEDs. Now you have a 10x10 matrix '

and second op-amps willbc active. The is only one output active at a time.

which may be useful in many other

(
reason is, the non-inverting input of the We’ll use the bar mode in our circuit.
electronic projects as well which you’ll second op-am p is getting more than 0.5 You can try the dot mode too, but I
probably make in future. volt whereas the inverting input is get- think you won’t take it.

The main circuitry may be divided ting 0.5 volt, which is less than the As shown in the circuit diagram, the
into two parts: the row drive and the voltage in the non-inverting input. Thus, ten outputs of the LM3914 arc the row
column drive. The column drive gives when the input signal crosses 1, 1.5, 2. drive outputs. The input signal goes to
ten output lines for the ten columns of 2.5 4.5 volts respectively, the 3rd. the input pin after being filtered by a
capacitor and a resistor. And another
resistor is used which determines the
LED brightness.
The column drive has a timer, a
counter and some switches. Let’s start
with the timer which gives out elec-
tronic pulses.
The capacitor between pinsand 2
1

of the 555 determines its pulse rale and

the two resistors at pins 6, 7 and 8
determine the proportion of the time
the output remains high and the time it

remains low.
Counter 1C 401 7 counts the number
of square wave pulses passing through
its input. The 4017 has ten outputs.
Before any pulse comes, its first output
stays high. When the first pulse passes
Fig. 4: Actual-size PCB layout for the spectnculnr analyser.
by, the second output goes high. Thus
!

the matrix and the row drive gives ten 4th, 5th op-amps become ac-
10th when the nineth pulse passes by, the
outputs for the ten rows. The row drive tive. Thus, 10 op-amps pul in this fash- tenth output goes high. And when the
will give negative signal and the col- ion can show the input voltage limit, !
tenth pulse ptisses. the counter returns
umn drive will give positive signal for just as a mercury thermometer shows to its first output and restarts the proc-
lighting the LEDs in the matrix. the temperature. ess.
Ijci’s make
row drive first with
the |
Since the op-amp compares the In a 4017, only one output stays
IC3914, two resistors and a capacitor. voltage between its two input pins, it is high at a time. Therefore it is called a
LM3914 is used here just as in a one- called a comparator. Hut there is a I
mutually exclusive output counter.
band spectrum analyser. The IC has ten I
difference between an actual compara- Besides, its outputs are active high.
op-amps, each of which has two differ- tor chain and the chain in LM3914. In The outputs are used to put some
ential inputs and one output. One of the ]
actual comparators, the voltages in the switches on and off. I Iere, we are using
inputs is non-inverting while the other outputs go high when they are active. two kinds of switches —analogue and
is an inverting input. The voltage at the But because of a different circuitry, the SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers). Both
output line goes high when voltage at outputs of the LM3914 go low when of them have a pin called gate. The

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 135

 PARTS LIST
Semiconductot;
IC1 — NE555 timer
IC2 — CD4017 counter
IC3-IC5 — CD4066 analogue
•witch
IC6 — LM 3914 spectrum
analyaer
IC7 — 7805, a 5V regulator
D1-D22 — 1N4001 rectifier diode
c/>

SCR1-SCR10 — D400SCR
Resistors (all 1/4 W, ±5% carbon unless ,

stated otherwise):
R1-R12, RU — 1-kilohm
R13 — 4, 7-kilo Km
«OW 0RIVE Capacitors:
OUTPUTS
Cl — 3300|iF 25V electrolytic
f

C2 —
minim
COLUMN 0«VE OUTPUTS
C3
Miscellaneous:
—
l|iF, 12V, electrolytic
4.7jtF, 10V electrolytic

LEDl TO
LED100 — 10 x 10 LED matrix
Fig. 5: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 4.

switches are put on when the gate volt- columns. This is necessary as the cur- 401 7 is high, the first SCR is put on and
age goes high. The analogue switches rents obtained from the outputs of the the first column gets positive current.
arc like mechanical switches, but the :
4017 arc insufficient for so many LEDs. So the analysis of the LM391 4 is shown
SCRs actually are rectifiers that are Now each of the ten analogue column. That is because all
in the first
enabled to pass current only when the i switches has two points. One of the of the columns are getting negative
gate voltage is high. points of each switch is shorted to- from the 4017, but only the first one
We’ll use 10 SCRs (D400) and 10 gether and goes to the LM3914 input. gets positive from the SCR At this time .

analogue switches. Ihc analogue ITien remain the ten other points for the the first analogue sw itch ison and hence
switches come in IC packages, such as ten analogue switches. These points get the LM3914 gels input from the first
IC 4066. Each oT these ICs has four the input signal from the graphic equal- input source. So the analysis of the first
switches. The gates of the ten SCRs and iser. A band equaliser gives us ten out- source is shown in the first column.
the ten analogue switches arc connected puts (five from the right channel and When the second output goes high, the
of the 40 17. Here ten
to the ten outputs five from the left channel). The outputs second column is enabled, the second
resistors of lk and ten rectifiers are arc to be taken from the output of the analogue switch is on and the LM3914
used for safety. op-amps (741. TL084. LM338 etc) if gets input from the second source. So
The positive ends of the rectifiers the equaliser is made using op-amps. the analysis of the second source is
(in the SCRs) are connected to the 5- But if that is not the case, and you have shown in the second column. This
volt power supply and the ten negative only two channels (for stereo input), continucsuptocolumntcnand then the
ends are taken as the ten columns drive you can still divide them by a simple whole procedure is repealed.
outputs. So when the outputs of the capacitor network. So the circuit is doing an analysis of
4017 go high, the gale voltage of the Now its about time we got the simple the ten input sources one by one, and is
SCRs go high and the SCRs are en- algorithm of this complex circuit. The displaying the analysis at the ten corre-
abled. So positive current can pass timer 555 is set such that it oscillates at sponding columns one by one. But the
through the rectifiers and go to the
j

a rate of more than 100 Hz (more than rate of doing this is so high that it
hundred pulses per second). Its output appears to us that the analysis of the ten
is fed to counter 4017 and after every sources is being done and displayed
ten pulses its outputs arc repeated. When simultaneously.
no pulse has passed, the first output is The diagram and the PCB
circuit
high. Then after 10 pulses it goes high layout arc sufficient for assembling the
again. Thus the first output is repeated spectacular spectra display. After as-
after every 10 pulses. This is true for all sembling it, lpF capacitor
replace the
the outputs. So the outputs will go high at pins 1 and 2of the IC555 with a 47pF
at a rate of more than 100/10, i.e. ten capacitor. I am sure you’ll gel the idea
Fig. 6: Actual-size PCB layout for the times a second. once you assemble the circuit and try it.
LED matrix. Now, when the first output of the Happy assembling and viewing!

36 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
Readers' Comments: in the ciruit, cananalogue switches The author, Mr Uttiya Chowdhury,
like CD4066 be employed here? Or replies:
With reference to the fascinating can transistors in switching mode be Other SCRs (D401 etc) and transis-
Spectra Analyser project published used here? tors in switching mode (SL100.CI383
in EFY May ’92 issue, I would like to KULKARNl RAMESH D. etc) can be used instead of D400 SCRs.
make a few enquiries: Pune Analogue switches like CD4066,
Can SCRs D401 be used in place I have found the circuit good but I however, can’t be used as their maxi-
of the ten D400 SCRs used in the see no use of diodes Dl through D20. mum current capacity is small.
circuit? Since the output of CD4017 remains Diodes DI-DIO can be done with-
The cost of the circuit has in- high only, there is no need of safety. out, but if the SCRs go bad and
creased considerably due to the SCRs. UMESH MEHRA connect positive supply to the output
As these have been used as switches Kota of 4017, the 1C may get damaged.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 137

 Clap-Operated Remote Control
for Fans
Narpat Singh Rana

You should find this clap-operated

remote control system quite useful in
summers as il would enable you to
control the speed of your fan or cooler,
besides switching it on or off. Nor-
mally, a fan has three to five speeds but
this remote control can control up to
ten-step speed control fan. Besides, it

provides visual indication of the speed

of the fan. Fig. 1: Schematic block diagram for dap-operated remote control fan.

This circuit may be considered in fics the audio signals in class-C mode, three BEL187 (or AC187) transistors.
four parts: sound-operated trigger pulse The clock pulse gcncratorstage is based so that they could operate three sepa-
generator, clock pulse generator, clock on NE555 IC while the clock pulse rate relays. The other method, which
pulse counter and load operator, as shown counter is based on the popular decade excludes the relays and transistors, uses
in the block diagram (Fig. 1 ). counter IC CD4017BE. The load op- three triacs which have long life but
The trigger pulse generator is built erator stage is constructed in two ways, include greater danger of electric shock.
around transistor BC148 which ampli- One method mentiond here is to use The condenser microphone converts

Fig. 2: Circuit dingram for the clap-operated remote control fan.

Eal ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 — NE555 timer
102 — CD4017BE decade
counter
T1 — BC148 npn transistor
T2-T4 — BEL 187 npn transistor
Dl, D2 — 1N4001 silicon diode
Resistors (ull 1/4W, tS% carbon unless
stated otherwise):
R1 — 10k
R2 — 1.2M
R3 — 2 2k
R4 - 150k
R5 - 220k
R6 — 10k
Fig. 5: 1*CB layout for the circuit shown in Fig.2.
R7-R9 — 100-ohm
Capacitors:
Cl, C2 — O.lpF, 16V electrolytic
C3 — 4.7pF, 16V electrolytic
C4 — O.OlpF ceramic disc
05 — lOOOpF, 12V electrolytic
Miscellaneous:
— Condenser microphone
34LOD
— Red LED
— Green LED
— Yellow LED
- 6V-0-6V, 500mA
transformer

to reset pin 15.

Fig. 4: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.
Though all the ten outputs can be
is given by the relationship
used to control ten separate relays or
T = 1.1R*C*.
triacs, normally only three relays or
In this circuit, the values of R* and
triacs arc sufficient for this job. The
C* are so chosen that the clock pulse
first relay or the first triac is to control
duration is approximately one second,
the first gear while the second relay or
so that no more than one clap within
the second triac is used to control the
one second can change the gear (and
second gear, and he t last relay or triac is
thus speed) of the fan.
used to control the third gear.
The clock pulse is then applied to
Fig. 5: Pin configuration of triac. pin 14 of decade counter IC CD4017
A 100-ohm resistance is used in
series with each LED. Green LED indi-
the sound of a clap into an electric which counts the clock pulses. 'I'his IC
cates the first gear, while the yellow in-
signal and supplies it to the base of has ten outputs, viz, 0, 1, 2....9. The
output number 0 (at pin 3) is high
dicates second, and the red LED indi-
transistor BC143. The transistor pro-
cates the third gear. The fan is switched
vides a trigger pulse to pin 2 of mono- without any clock pulse applied to the
offon the fourth clap.
stable multivibrator IC NE555 timer. IC. So wc have used only output 1 at pin
The circuit can be assembled on a
The duration for which the output of 2, output 2 at pin 4 and output 3 at pin 1

general-purpose circuit board. IC sock-

monostable multivibrator remains high 7. while output 4 at pin 10 is connected
ets should be used to protect the ICs
from the soldering iron’s heat. Besides,
Assembly with Triacs the ICs can be replaced very easily if
There are only a few things to he kept in mind for xnakingthe remote control using triace mounted on their IC sockets.
these are
instead of transistors and relays.
There is only one jumper used in the
1. Exactly at the same place where relay driving transistor BEL187s are, we have
to mount the triacs. The gate G of the triac will be at the point of transistor's base, MT2 PCB of this circuit, which is from the
will be at collector point, while MT1 will be at ground. 2. Diodes 1N4001 and lOOOvF, collector of transistor BC1 48 via a 0. pF1

12V capacitor is removed. capacitor to pin 2 of IC 555.

Rest of the circuit remains the same.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 39
 Readers’ Comments:

The Clap Operated Remote Control should be kept in mind that the
It
forFans in EFY May’92 issue is no f?£C*CLfltoR lower terminal of the power supply is
doubt an excellent article, but it has filTSO <vu
common, and so the circuit should not
-rue itorwt
not been fully explained. For instance, be touched when working, from the
CO/M/>
there are two jumpers <J1 and J2> in safety point of view.
the circuit whereas in the last para- There no need of using current
is
graph of the article only one is men- coils in series with triacs. But all the
tioned. triacs should be mounted with proper
1.
Besides, the article does not indi- heatsinks, if necessary.
cate how the input of fan is to be con-
not advisable to use CD4022
It is
nected.
instead of CD4017 beacuse much more
SAROSH MINOO DALAL gear system could be used with CD4017,
Bombay if necessary.
have a few querries:
I
1 1 is possible to use in fra-red trans-
For assembly with triacs, how should
mitter and receiver, but it is beyond
the power be given to the circuit when
the scope of this article.
it is transformerless?
To control just one relay with torch-
Aren’t current coils required in
2.
light, only pins 15 and 4 ofICCD4017
series with the triacs?
should be used. To increase the range,
3. Is it advisable to use IC 4022 in- CovWci-
100k preset should be removed.
stead of 4017? Q*cun
4. Is it possible to use an infra-red Fig. 1: Connecting the assembly to ceiling fan.

transmitter and a receiver instead of

the second relay energise. On third
condenser microphone?
clap, red LED should glow and the
V. NARAYANAN
third relay energise. On fourth clap,
Akola the controlling circuit is reset.
As I wish to operate a relay by illu-
The whole prototype, along with
minating a torch using two cells, I
the relays, should be assembled in a
have selected the second portion of
transparent case so that the indicat-
the circuit (IC2 onward) and used an
ing LEDs are visible. The assembly
IC 555 circuit for triggering. But the
should be fitted near the fan’s switch-
operating range obtained is too low,
board.
which I wish to increase to about 10
The diagram given above shows
metres.
how to connect the assembly to the
SANTANU SA MANTA ceiling fan.
Bankura (W.B.)
In triac assembly, power to the
The author, Mr Narpat Singh Rana,
transformerless circuit should be given
replies:
using a circuit such as the one shown
Some confusion appears to have been below.
created by excessive editing of my
article. I’m therefore giving below the
—vw -N-
10K 1N4007
10W
missing information.
I, ZhNER
The circuit may
be powered after
carefully assembling it. Green LED MAINS
X
* 400mW
«2V
*[
_ IOOOm
T

should glow on clapping once near the

condenser microphone. On clapping
again, yellow LED should glow and Fig. 2; Power supply for triac circuit

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 8W+8W Stereo Amplifier
Module
Amrit Bir Tiwana

^^n endless variety of stereo am-

plifiers arc available in the market. But
the prices of good quality amplifiers,
equipped with graphic equalisers etc,

are not within the reach of all audio

enthusiasts. The cheaper varieties are

on discrete transistors,
generally based
and suffer from drawbacks such as
uncontrolled hum, ineffective tone | Fig. 1: Block diagram.

O * 18V

* •GRAPHIC EQUALISER- POWER AMPLIFIER

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for 8W+8W stereo amplifier module.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 41
 XI commercially available graphic equal-
230V AC PRIMARY
TO 1SV-0-18V. 3A iser kit itself!). The complete circuit
SECONDARY TRANSFORMER costs just around Rs2G0.

Working
^230V 18V
O AC The block diagram of the complete
GNO
amplifier module is given in Fig. 1 . The
circuit of the complete module is given
Each channel consists of an
in Fig. 2.
independent 6-band graphic equaliser,
Fig- 3: Circuit for the power supply.
OUTPUT POWER VS each channel. The module contains an power amplifier and a common power
SUPPLY VOLTAGE inbuilt 6-band graphic equaliser, which supply.
can be used to control and blend fre- The graphic equaliser is built around
quencies and tones over a wide range, adualop-ampLM1458.Thegainoflhc
thus ensuring perfect sound reproduc- op-amp at various frequencies is deter-
tion. mined by the setting of the correspond-
llie module can be used as an AF ing pot. llie audio frequency spectrum
output stage of a record player, cassette is covered in six different bands of tone
;

player or just as an independent stereo control. The frequency control pots and
I

amplifier itself. The system offers a the corresponding frequencies controlled

i

,
high degree of flexibility as it can oper- by them are listed in Table I. VR13 and
ate in environmental temperatures be- VR14 serve as volume controls for the
tween 0° and 70°C, and operate off volt- left and right channels respectively.
Fig. 4: Output power vs supply voltage. ages in the 5 -20V range. Ibe system is As the circuit provides excellent
control over the frcqeuncics, use of the
conventional graphic equaliser which
requires at least a dozen op-amps was
deemed unnecessary.
The power amplifier section is built
aroundtwo low-cost, monolithic power
amplifier ICs LM2002A. The ICs arc
current limited and thermally protected.
The input is fed to the non-inverting
input pin 1 through the lOpF coupling
capacitor.The output is coupled to the
speaker through the 2200pF capacitor.
The 1-ohm resistor and the 0.1 pF ca-
pacitor, serially connected across the
output terminal (pin4) and ground, help
in noise reduction. At a supply voltage
of 20 volts, each amplifier IC provides
an output exceeding 9 watts into a load
of 4 ohms, and about 1 watt at a supply
voltage of 5 volts. Ihe output power at

different voltages may be calculated

Fig. 5: Actual-size PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2. from the manufacturers’graph given in
controls, poor bass response, thermal internally protected against input and Fig. 4.
runaway etc. The use of interstage trans- output shortcircuiling. The module can
formers in such circuits reduces their automatically protect itself on being Power supply
versatility. accidentally connected to a high volt- It is preferable to operate Ihe mod-
This article describes the funtional age supply line (up to 40V). 'Hie noise ule at its upper voltage limits to obtain
and constructional details of a compact and distortion level is extremely low the maximum output power, llie cir-
and complete solidstate stereo ampli- and no tum-on transients occur. cuitcan operate off voltages between 5
fier module, which is capable of pro- The main feature of the module is and 20 volts. The power supply circuit
viding an output of over 8 watts into its low cost (which is less than that of a

42 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 3. The circuit is capable of providing an
output of 18 volts with an accuracy of
aboul-fcO.25 per cent. XI, Dl, D2 and
C29 drop the mains voltage to about 24
volts, which is then stabilised at 18
volts by IC4. The LED indicates the
presence of output voltage.

: Construction
I The complete circuit may be as-
sembled on a single PCB, pattern of
which is given in Fig. 5, and the compo-
nents should be mounted as shown in
Fig. 6. Pin connections of all ICs and
transistors arc given in Fig. 7.
l ip temperature of the iron should
not exceed 275°C under any condition.
Shielded cable should be used for all

input and output connections and colour

coded ribbon cable should be used for

Components layout connecting the pots. Proper heatsinks

Fif. 6: for the PCB shown in Fig. 5.

(T 0-220 PACKAGE)

MC ?8fiec
TO -3(H) PACKAGE

Fig. 7: Pin configurations of ICs and transistors.

should be selected with the help of ihc
DEVICE DISSIPATION VS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE POWER DISSIPATION VS manufacturers data shown in the graphs
OUTPUT POWER in Figs 8(a) and 8(b). The common
heatsink should be bolted to the PCB at
an angle of 90°.
If the module is used as an indc-
1

pendent amplifier, it may be enclosed

in a matallic cabinet. The cabinet itself
may be used as a heatsink in this case.
1

10 » 30 40 SO 90 TO Testing
TA. AU0IENT TEMPERATURE <C>
OUTPUT POWER fW)
After construction, the module shoukl
be tested for proper operation. The
Fig. 8(a):
Device dissipation vs ambient module should be switched on and an
Fig. 8(b): Power dissipation vs output !

temperature. audio signal fed

power. in, with the volume

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IE 3
 - .

LETT CHANNEL RIGHT CHANNEL

L^0l -LED6— SOOmrr
T. LEOl
'//'/’//
^ LE07-LEDl2 500rn
BCS+7 // SS iiw>
Ihave assembled the circuit of *8W+8W
Hi-Fi system with 6+6 Band Graphic
Equaliser’ published in EFY June '92
issue and it is giving a lot of problems
as follows:
On increasing the volume a lot of
Fig. 9: Circuit diagram for LED dancing noise is heard. Only at very low volume
array (optional). TABLE I
the circuit gives better results.
Control Control common
Secondly, in the circuit the
Frequency PotrnUo meter line is connected to VR13, VR14, LSI
PARTS LIST and LS2. When switch on the set a
I
I*ft Right
Sem iconductors: Channel Channel cracklingsound is heard continuously
IC1 — LM1458 and ICs get heated Whereas on
IC2, IC3 — LM2002A 100Hz VRl VR7 disconnecting the common line from
IC4 — MC78T18C 300Hz VR2 VR8 LSI and LS2, I am getting slightly
D1.D2 — 1N5401 600Hz VR3 VR9 better results at low volumes. Also,
D3 — 1N4001 1kHz VR4 VR10
Graphic Equaliser part is not working
3k Hr VRS VRl 1
VR6 VR12 very satisfactorily.
Resistors (all 1/4W, *5% carbon unless 16kHz
stated otherwise): Volume VR13 VR14 G.K. BISWAS
R1.R8, Calcutta
R19, R20 — 4.7-kilohm The author, Mr Amrit Bir Titvana,
R2-R7 — 33-kilohm necessary.
replies:
R9.R12 — 1 00-kilo hm Now, feed in an audio signal from a The main problems are most probably
R10.R11 — 330-kilohm tape recorder and check the graphic
— due to long earth wire loops, high
R13-R18 33-kiIohm
R21.R22 — 4 7 0-kilo hm
equaliser for proper boost/cut in the input signal voltage and probable use
R23. R26 — - 2.2-ohm corresponding frequencies. If proper of non-shielded wires at input
R24, R27 — 220-ohm respcm.se is not obtained, check for open terminals. Since the design of the circuit
R25, R28 — 1 -ohm
wires. If hum check for leaky was tested by me. EFY lab. and so
R29 — 1-kilohm
persists,
many EFY readers, try to check the
VR1-VR14 100-kilohm capacitors,ordefectiverectificrdiodes,
in case the mains supply circuit is used above facts and you will get good results.
potentiometer

Capacitors:
Useful hints
C1.C14 — 50nF, 25V electrolytic
C2, C8 — 47nF ceramic The circuit maybe used with the
1.

03, C9 — 15nF ceramic less commonly used 2-ohm speakers in

C4, CIO — 8.2nF ceramic order to obtain higher output volume.
C5.C11 — 4.7nF ceramic
The L1:D dancing
06. CI2 — 1.5nF ceramic
2. arrays, the

C7.C13 — 300pF ceramic circuit of which is given in Fig 9, may

C 15-019, be added to the m ain module. The I .LDs
023 — 10pF, 25V electrolytic flicker with a brightness level which is
020, 022 — 470nF, 25V electorlytic dependent upon the output power.
C21.C24 — 2200nF. 25V electrolytic
The quality of the speakers must
C25-C27 — 0. 1 nF ceramic disc
3.

028 — 100pF, 25V electrolytic not be compromised as the quality of

029 — 2000, iF. 25V electrolytic the output mainly depends upon the
i

speakers. The prototype used 15cm.

Miscellaneous:
10-watt ‘Philips’ speakers.
Two 4Q, 10W speakers
— 18V-0-18V, 3-amp sec. 4. Active or passive crossover sys-
transformer tems may be used at the outputs; this
— LED. would facilitate the use of different
speakers for different frequency ranges.
controls at ‘maximum’ position. Let it 5. The module may be used as a
remain on for about 10 minutes and stereo cassette/ record player, al ter feed-
then check whether the tab temperature ing the input through a suitable pre-
remains below 40°C. If not, check for amplifier.
improper contact within the heatsink,
and apply some heatsink compound if

44 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 .

Make Yourself Automatic Music

Search System
T.S. Shankar

^^utomatic music search system, 2. The deck should be soft touch through R1 and R2 (47k) resistors. The
popularly called AMSS*, is nowadays control type. This is not absolutely im- mixed signal is attenuated by preset
incorporated in many commercially portant, but the pressure, or rather the VR1 to an optimum level. This attenu-
available cassette recorders. With AMSS force required to press a key to function ation is necessary because the saturat-
one can skip the present music or go to during Cue or Rew should not be a ;
ing amplifier should be over-driven but
the starting point of the presently played ‘hammer touch’ one. not excessively.
music by pressing ‘Cue (FF)’ or ‘Rew* 3. Your deck should be able to in- The saturating amplifier is nothing
keys. This reduces repeated cueing and corporate the additional components of but a voltage amplifier wired around IC
rewing of tape in order to reach the r
this project, such as relay etc, without T13A810 in a conventional fashion, but
I

desired point of the tape. disturbing the normal operation of the with a higher load resistor. The high
AMSS does not require elaborate
|
deck. value of load resistor makes the power
circuitry, but the mechanical modifica- The idea of AMSS is straightfor-
|
amplifier to closely approach the char-
tions necessary in the cassette deck ward. Holding the FF (or Cue) key or acteristics of a voltage amplifier. Any
mechanism alienate an average elec- Rew key while still playing the cassette I
other voltage amplifier design can be
tronics enthusiast. In this article, it will and releasing the key only when a gap substituted, but the prototype used the
be shown that the mechanical modifi- l
in music is noticed in the tape. That’s 810 circuit.
cations are not as complex as imagined all, and nothing more. ITic voltage output across load rc-

ELECTOO
MAGNETS

Fig. 1: Block diagram

and that the AMSS can be implemented The circuit |

sistor R6 is nearly equal to supply volt-
in almost all tape decks commercially The block diagram is shown in Fig. 1 age whenever the tape is Cued or
available today. The left and right channel signals are Rewed. This AC voltage is rectified by
To include the AMSS feature in mixed to form a single signal in the diode D2, the current through which is

your cassette deck, however, the fol- mixer block. This signal is amplified limited by resistor R7 and filtered by
lowing requirements are to be met: —
by a voltage amplifier the saturating CIO.
Your deck should have Cue and
1. amplifier. The amplifier’s output is Capacitor CIO forms a memory-
Rew facilities, which arc seen in almost limited to a constant value by a limiter like element because it stores charge as
60 per cent of deck mechanisms. If you block and fed to a schmitt trigger cum I long as signal is present. When there is

are buying a new recorder, ensure that time delay comparator, and finally given a gap in the music, the voltage across
its deck mechanism has these facilities. to an electromagnet through a buffer. the load drops suddenly, but the voltage
shows the complete circuit
Fig. 2. across CIO drops slowly as it has only
• AMSS is s Iso called Automatic Programme
diagram. The inputs are derived from one discharge path, i.e. through high
Search System (APSS)or Tape Program Sensor the outputs of preamplifiers of the ex- value of R9.
(TPS) or Music Quick Jump System (MQJS). isting cassette recorder circuit and mixed The combination of R9 and CIO de-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 145

 vcc
O
+ 13VTO*15V
500mA

RL2
RIGHT 02
INPUT 47K

RU.HU
2 * GV. 100C2
RELAY

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the automatic music search system.

Fig. 3: Use of relays as electromagnets.

cidcs the lime width of gaps in music for comparing. As soon as CIO dis- LED. (It should be only a red LED,
which should not be altered. These values charges sufficiently, the output pin (pin because i t funct ions as a 1 .65- volt regu -
have been selected after trying the val- 3) of IC2 goes high, driving off the lator in this circuit). This fixing of Ihe
ues in almost hundreds of music al- complementary pair’ formed by tran- max. voltage across CIO ensures cor-
bums. The gap works for all types of sistors T1 and T2. This removes power rect operation of the circuit, independ-
music. from the relay (which in this circuit is ent of the recording level of the tape.
IC555 is wired to work as com para-, used asnran electromagnet) and the elec- A word about the relay. The relay is
tor as well as schmitt trigger. Its com- tromagnet (relay) releases the FPor Rcw 6V, 100 ohms type critically. Hut the
parator voltage is kept very low by key to continue to play from that point of supply voltage is between 13V and
RIO, a 680-ohm the tape.
and the input
resistor, 15 V. This is done purposefully. When
is simultaneously given to pins 6 and 2 At pin no. 2 of IC2 there is a red T2 saturates , it almost sources 1 50 mA
through relay RL1 and makes it a very
powerful magnet — powerful enough to
hold the FF or Rew keys. TTiis may heat
up the relay and increase residual mag-
netism. but both the side effects can be
ignored absolutely.

Construction
Assembly of the electronic circuitry
being simple, there is hardly anything
Fig. 4: Actual-size PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2. to be said about it. However, construc-

46 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Readers' Comments:

For constructing the Music Search

System (EFY, Jun.*92) I took output
of record level indicator amplifier (built
around TBA810 in my tape recorder)
to give input to IC2. But whenever
there a beat in
is the music the relay
starts chattering.
The author has not mentioned any-
thing about push-to-on switch Si at
pin 2 of IC2!
Besides, found the relay coils
I

heat up with the supply mentioned by

Ffc S: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 4. the author.
T.SURENDRA
boo of tbe mechanical portion of the Fig. 3 shows how to use relays as
BITS, Pilani
project is a bit time consuming and you electromagnets. Remove the cover and
The author. Mr T.S. Shankar, replies:
may have to have patience while deal- terminal bases of the relays and fix
Input to the circuit should be given
ing with the fittings. them to a 4mm or so aluminium sheet
only from the output of a preamplifier
In the circuit diagram RLl and RI,2 as shown. Now fix the aluminium plate and not from a power amplifier. Oth-
are shown as a single inductor for sim- to the deck mechanism or close to it erwise, the relay chattering can’t be
plicity. But it is a parallel combination firmly. The restoring springs of the avoided.
of 6V, 100-ohm relays —one for hold- relays should be removed and the ful- Switch SI is meant to cancel out
opera-
ing the FF key and the other for Rcw crums should be glued with Fevicol for the search function while it i6

tive.
key. support. Even with the glue dried, the
As weare supplying 12V to a 6V
relay arms should move freely, to and
PARTS LIST relay coil, the coil may get slightly
fro. Now link the FF key to the arm of
warm. Since it dissipates more than
one relay and Rew key to the arm of the
Semiconductors: 1.4 watts, it can never get overheated.
IC1 - TBA810 other with dial cords used in radios in
Mr Surendra’s relay coil must be 4.5V
IC2 - NE555 such a way that, whenever the keys are
or 3V rated.
T1 - BC558 pressed, the corresponding arm moves
T2 — 2N3055
D1-D3 — 1N4001 silicon diode
a bit closer to the electromagnet. See
that the link cord is untwisted and tight.
Resistors (all 1/4W, ±5% carbon unless When IT' key is pressed during ‘play’,
stated otherwise):
the arm of the relay moves forward
R1.R2 — 47-kilohm
S3 — 100-kilohm
i
towards the electromagnet. Meanwhile,
R4.R7 — 100-ohm the signal is amplified, processed and
—
I

B5.R6 15-ohm, 1 watt fed to the electromagnets. As now the

R8.R11,
— arm is much closer to the electromag-
R12 1-kilohm
R9 — 220-kilohm net, it is drawn powerfully towards it

RIO — 680 -ohm and held as long as the electromagnet

VR1 — 22-kilohm linear
!
gets supply. The electromagnet holds
the key even you release your finger.
if
Capacitors:
Cl — 1<VF. 25V electrolytic It releases the key only when the circuit

C2, C3, C6 — IOOjiF, 25V electrolytic senses a gap in the music. When one
C4 — 4.7nF ceramic electromagnet is operative, it does not
C5 — 470pF ceramic
C7, C8 — 1000*iF, 25V electrolytic cause the pulling of the other key, be-
C9.CU — 0.1 uF ceramic cause the aim of the other key is far
CIO — luF, 25V electrolytic beyond the range of its corresponding
electromagnet.
Miscellaneous:
RL1, RL2 — 100-ohm, 6V relay If your deck has a leaf switch which
— 2 x Red LED operates during FF and Rcw only, then
— Green LED it may be used in series with the supply
SI — Puah-to-on switch
avoid unnecessary current drain
“ Soft touch deck
rail to

mechaniam during normal operation.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Digital Volume Control
R.Ravi Chandran
ost modern TVs and VCRs have umc. In digital control you have to volume control circuit can be used for
a digital volume control for either in- prcssaswitchinstcadofrotatingaknob tapcrccordcrs, amplifiers, TVs etc.
crementing or decrementing the vol- ! like in old sets. This versatile digital In the circuit IC 555 is used as an

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram of digital volume control.

Ea| ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 : 1. 1

Hence, there is no affect of pressing

PARTS LIST
the INCR switch in case of maximum
Semiconductors volume. This is what wc need. In case
IC1 — NE555 of minimum volume, the output of
IC2, IC3 — CD4011 counter to 04
IC4 — CD4001
is 0. 0, 0, 0 (Q1 all low).

IC5 — CD4510 This is the only case (out of 1 6 possible

IC6 — CD4514 cases) when 0 1 to 04 arc low. Now for
1C7, IC8, this condition, outputs of gate e and f
IC9 — CD4016 will be high, which is the input of

Resistors (oil 1 /4WP ±5% carbon, unless

NAND gate d. A low output at pin 1

stated otherwise): ensures that there is no effect of press-

R1.R3, R4. ing theDECR switch. So once the vol-
R6-R15 — 10-kilohm ume is minimum, the DECR switch is
R2, R16 — 4.7-kilohm
made and the volume
R5 — 15-kilohm
ineffective re-
mains minimum until wc press the INCR
Capacitors: switch.
Cl — 100*iF\ 10V electrolytic
C2 — 0.004^iF ceramic diac
Bower supply
C3,C4 — 470fiF f 16V electrolytic Fig. 4: Pin configuration oflC CD4514.
corresponding input The circuit works on +5V and -5V
is high. Hence, by
Miscellaneous: DC. The circuit uses a 6V-0-6V, 500
S1.S2 — using three such ICs wc have 1 2 differ-
feather touch
ent outputs. One terminal of each switch
mA transformer with AC input. Bridge
switches
connected rectifierand KKX)pF, 25V capacitors
Shield wire is to a resistive network, and
are used for rectifying and filtering.
the other terminal is connected to one
asfablc multivibrator, which produces Regulators 7805 and 7905 are used to
common output line. When NCR I switch
a clock pulse of Iz frequency at pin 3.
generate +5V DC and -5V DC respec-
1 1 is pressed, the resistance between input
tively.
'litis clock pulse is fed to the counter and output (in case of taperccordcr
(IC 4510) through a combination of ‘input* is the output point of preampli-
The main advantage of the circuit is
gales. Normally. N1 and N2 that it avoids the scratch noise problem.
will not fier and the ’output* is the input point of
allow any clock pulse because one of its power amplifier) decreases and so the
input is connected to ground through volume increases. The reverse is the
10k resistor. case when the DECR switch is pressed.
When the 1NCR or DECR switch is Till now gates a. b. c. d, c, f do not
pressed, the corresponding gate allows come in the picture. Now wc will dis-
the clock pulses to the counter through cuss the advantage of using these gates.
the gate N3. N4 gate is used to select I f wc keep on pressing the NCR switch I

the counter IC 4510 in up-down mode. the counter’s count will increment. But
Pin 10 of IC 4510 is normally high but after 16 steps Power supfih for * 5V
it will repeat the count.
goes low on decrementing the volume. The same holds true for the DECR
Each time the INCR/DECR switch switch. It means
Useful hints
after getting maxi-
is pressed, the count of the counter is mum/minimum volume, you will again, Remember that there are 2 steps 1

incremented or decremented accord- get minimum/maximum volume, and

from minimum volume to the maxi-
ingly. 'litis counter has four outputs most
mum. For each step, certain resistance
this is the irritating aspect of the
which give 16 combinations. circuit.
comes into picture. If you want a par-
The outputs of IC 4510 are fed to Gates a to ticular output ateach step, use a 100k
f provide solution to this
the IC4514, which is a 4-16 line de- preset for each of the resistor network.
problem. Consider that (he volume is
coder. has 16 output lines that go high Adjust the corresponding preset for a
It maximum. At this time the count is 1,
according to any of the 16 possible 1, 1 (01 to Q4 all high). This is the only particular step. Once you adjust all the

combinations of inputs. However, wc presets, your circuit is ready forgiving

case out of the 16 possible cases when
have used only 12 combinations out of a predetermined output at each step.
01 and 04 bits arc high, and we shall
16. For stereos, you have to use one
utilise this condition. As soon as 01
All the outputs of the decoder are more circuit for controlling the volume
and 04 go simultaneously high, the
connected to three 4016 ICs, which are of the second channel.
output at pin 10 of gate C will go low.
SPST switches. Each IC contains four As a result no high going pulse will
SPS Tswitches, which turn on when the occur by pressing the INCR switch.

50 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 :

IC5 when we again switch on the

Readers’ Comments: circuit?

The SAINI G.S. HAPYE

circuit of the ‘Digital Volume
Mohali
Control’ published in EFY Jul.TC issue
can be greatly simplified by remov-
ing the four most expensive ICs (IC6-
109) and using the following circuit
Only 12 outputs of IC 4514 have
instead.
been used and the gates a.b.c.d.e.f are
R1
QVCC

The main advantage of this circuit be avoided (after switching ‘off and
used with relerence to the 16th out-
that gives sixteen steps instead ‘on’) by connecting reset line of 4510
is it put. What about the counts from 13th
of twelve and the distortion through R-C network.
is very to 15th? Won’t the output come sud-
low. denly to the minimum as output ofIC
T.S. SHANKAR 4514 changes from 12th to 13th count
Hyderabad on pressing INCR switch?
The author, Mr R. Ravichandmn. re- Why two different types of regula-
plies: tor ICs (7805 and 7905) have been
Your circuit will work fine for the used in power supply instead of two of
first two steps. On the third step, i.e. the same type?
for 0011, 2.2 kilo-ohm and 1 kilo-ohm What is the total cost of the proj-
resistors will come in parallel and the ect?
resultant will be less than 1 kilo- RAJEEV DWIVEDI
ohm. The volume output will be lesser Lucknow
1001 and will not decrease below 0000,
in this case. This is repeated for the
since IC3(a) senses the 1001 and IC4
other steps also. Hence, this circuit The author, Mr R. Ravi Chandran,
(e,f) senses the 0000. This will avoid
does not give a linear output. replies
For stereo, connect three more 4016 sudden change in volume also.

ICs in parallel to IC7-IC9.

We are using CD40 16 for analogue
signal switching. So we should give
Additional steps are not possible
both +5V and -5V supply, and the sig-
as we are using 10-step counting. After
nal level should not exceed the IC sup-
9th step INCR button is disabled by
ply voltage.
Digital Volume IC3(a).
Control’ project pub- The cost of the project is around Rs
lished in July issue is somewhat dif- One can use the following circuit
150.
for visual indication;
ferent from all the DVC circuits pub-
lished earlier in EFY. The author may
Tech Editors Note:
please clarify: 1 . Please note that the volume control
1. For stereo channel (where dual meant only
is for 1 0-step control (0
pot is used) isone more identical cir- through 9)
cuit required or can I save some ICs?
2. Tactile switches should be used
2. Do we require one more IC 4016
for INCR. and DECR. function for
for remaining 13th to 16th step?
bounceless operation.
3. How to get visual indication for
min-max volume by connecting LEDs
at output pins of IC6?
4. Suppose we switched off the

power supply when output of CD4510

is 1001, what will be the output of

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 151

 Cook Timer
R. Raghunathan

going through this you will Well, we basically being smart, will general-purpose PCB as there is not
do neither of the above, Wc operate a
j |
start wondering what you have been j
much complication, or the suggested
doing without this. Yes, a simple kitchen 7555 (CMOS timer) in astable mode at PCB layout can be used. If you are sure
timer with 14 possible settings — the a frequency of 54 .6 Hz (clock pulse du-
|

you won’t make mistakes. D1 can be

minimum being 2.5 minutes and the ration 0.018 sec). We then divide this omitted. Just to safeguard against re-
maximum 45 minutes. What is more, 16384 timcs(!) in a single CMOS bi- verse polarity, it drops 0.7 volts out of
the repeat accuracy is in direct propor- nary counter 4060B and get a basic the available 6 volts,
tion to your patience in setting a preset, clock pulse duration (BCPD) of five
In any case, an accuracy of two to three minutes. This pulse is inverted and fed Calibration
per cent is easily achievable, and for to a decade counter 401 7B (CMOS It's presumed you have already
domestic needs even this is luxury. once again) and starting from 5, we can crossed the stages of wrong connec-

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for cook timer.

To set a delay of 45 minutes, a timer get a maximum interval of 45 minutes I tions, dry solders, missed components
in the monostable mode would have in steps of 5 minutes. This will be the etc.
been sufficient. But the repeat accu- ‘high’ range. (a) Insert all three ICs in their socket,
racy would suffer due to the use of For the ‘low’ range, starting from (Hope you have used IC sockets. All
bulky electrolytic capacitors. And by 2.5 minutes to 42.5 minutes, all we do ICs are CMOS and they need lot of re-
the time you satisfactorily finish set- is to directly feed the clock pulses from sped).
ting the timing preset, you will start !
4060Bto4017B without inverting. The (b) Set a value of 4.5k in preset *P1*
wondering why you need a timer at all Q 14 output of 4060B, after switch on before soldering in place. For this, the
(each trialneed 45 minutes!). Al-
will will go high after 2.5 minutes (remem- single turn presets are totally banned,
tentatively, if you want to take life easy her the BCPD is 5 minutes) and accord- Use a good multitum helipot.
(without any trials), you have to spend ingly the Q1 output of 401 7B will go (c) Switch-on ‘S3’ to test position
a fortune on crystal-based clock gen- high. Thereafter each successive out- (No. 1). SI should he in ‘Low’ position
erators and introduce a gang of ICs to putof40l7Bwillgohigh inintcrvalsof (d) Have a stop watch (or an ordi-
dividc and bring the clock pulse to 5 minutes up to 42.5 minutes (Q9 out- nary clock with seconds indication)
humanly recognisable timing durations, put). Thus with a basic clock pulse handy; if you believe in god, pray and
— of 5 minutes, we gel a resolution of then switch ‘S2’ on. Following should

Tfceautltor is working wiUVkkenSysteim liter-

2 5 minutes ' in lw0 ^"ges-Hlgh and happen!
ni tin nil lid, Madras as s Senior Application (1) LED Should blink at a rate Of 3.4
The circuit can be assembled on a Hz.

52 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
|
 PARTS LIST
Sr in icon due tors
ICl — 7335
IC2 — CD4060B
IC3 — CD4017B
Tt — BC 147 npn silicon

Resistors (all 1/4W, *5% carbon, unless

stated otherwise):
R1 — 1-kilohm
R2 - 8.2-kilohm
R3, R5 — 2.2-kilohm
R4 — 10-kilohm
R6 — 100-kilohm

Fig. 2: PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 1.

VR1 — 10-kilohm linear
potentiometer
LOW « —HGM
Capacitors:
Cl — l.OpF, 10V tentahim
C2 — O-OlpF ceramic disc
C3 - 10nF, 10V electrolytic
C4 — O.ljiF ceramic due

Miscellaneous:
SI DPDT switch
S2 — SPST switch
S3 — Single pole 8 way rotaiy
switch
"
Intermittent tone piezo
buzzer

I and you will end up wasting a lot of

time in calibration.
(d) With a current of 2mA, the four
pen torch cells should at least last a year
and a half. Hence, resist the temptation
to use the timer through a battery elim i-
nator. you cannot, go ahead, but
If

Fig. 3: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 2. remember to retain the battery back-up
38 seconds the buzzer Operation or else a supply failure in the middle of
(2) After about
should sound. Select the High or Low range and timing can laid to unpleasant conse-
If the buzzer does sound, the cali- you need on S3. Switch-
the exact time quences.
bration for all the fourteen settings is on S2. At the end of set liming, the (e) For BCPD other than 5 minutes
over and you arc the proud owner of a buzzer will sound. Switch-off S2. When use the following formula:

useful timer. Invariably, a few trials the timer is you can at liberty in-
‘on’
and minor adjustments on VR1 (1/4 to crease the setting in S3 but never touch 16384
l/2turnatatime)maybe needed. Once SI. To alter SI, first switch-off S2. FI = FI IN Hz
you are satisfied, switch S3 to position BCPD BCPD in seconds
‘2’ and switch-on S2. You should now Hints
time 1 50 secs. If you get this, no more (a) The draws about 2mA
circuit Once FI is known, setting up 7555
verification is required. during ‘on’ condition. Depending on to operate at that frequency is all that is

Calibration using an oscilloscope is the piezo buzzer, this will increase when tobe done by you. For calibration, put
very simple, assuming that setting up the burzer sounds. S3 in position 1 and set VR 1 for a time
the scope is easy. After patiently select- (b)Do not replace 7555 with ordi- equal to BCPD/4 secs.
ing the right time base, scale etc on the nary NE555 as the current consump- (0 Finally, during calibration don’t

scope, measure the frequency from pin tion will shoot up. Also do not lower the waste time in trying to get exactly 38
3 of 7555 and set 54.61347 Hz.
it to value of R3. This also will affect the secsorl50secs.Errorof±2secs.in 150
Obviously, if you can lay your hands on current drawn. secs is quite acceptable. An accuracy of
a frequency counter life will be much Cl should be tantallum and VR1
(c) ±1.3 per cent is more than enough for

easier and pleasant. should be multiturn pot. Save on these the domestic front.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 153

 - «

IC 4017 The author, Mr R. Raghunathan,

Pin 1 to pin 7: Outputs Q5, Ql, Q0, replies:

Q2, Q6, Q7 and Q3 in that order. Mr Kothadiya’s suggestion is right.

Readers’ Comments: Pin 8: Ground LEDs can be connected as shown by
Pin 9 to pin 11: Outputs Q8, Q4, him in which case the IC will be sour-
Q9 in that order. cing the LEDs. Otherwise connec-
The article Cook Timer’ in July*92
Pin 12: Carry out. Goes high after tions can be made as shown in the
issue of EFY very good. Please con-
is
9 clock pulses for a duration of 1 clock circuit diagram in the article with
vey my thanks to the author.
pulse. Used for cascading. just the direction of the LEDs re-
But, in fact, the circuit has been
Pin 13: Clock enable. Counting is versed.
made more complicated using IC1 7555
possible only when this pin is low. There are further corrections also
as the pulse generator.
I wonder why the author did not
Pin 14: Clock input. which should be made.
use the su perb faci ty of on-ch osci 1 Pin 15: Reset pin. When this is 1. In the circuit diagram, position
1i
p i

of resistor R4 is to be taken as shown

lator available in taken low all outputs are reset to zero.
1C2 4060B?
During counting this is to be high. in the figure ( below .). How-
KALPESH T. DAL WADI
Pin 16: +Vcc (3 to 15 volts) ever, thePCB layout is properly drawn.
Bharuch
Pin connection of 4060B 2. The value of VR1 should be read
The most interesting aspect of the
'3VT015V as 10k in the components layout where
project is the binary counter 4060B
which drives pulse 16,384 times. The '
it is marked lk.
012
author is requested to give more use-
ful information about the counter, in- cl oio
cluding the role of pins 01, 12 and 13 01 |Q8
of decade counter CD4017.
HEMANT SHARM A [I OS
IC
Guwahati qCj CD4060 B RESET
CLOCK IN
The author, Mr R. Raghunathan, re-
plies:
The idea to use on-chip oscillator of
1C4060B is good. It will definitely bring
down the component count. But, in
the bargain, the circuit would lose its
Note: Q4 Clock freq.
- divided by 2*
frequency stability when
the supply
varies. That was the single reason for I

—
using 7555 the industry workhorse. I

The oscillating frequency of 7555 is I

Q14 - Clock freq. divided by 2 M .

completely independent of the supply

voltage variations.
Mr Kalpesh’s idea can give excel-
lent results with a regulated supply
but when battery supply is used it is
better to include 7555.
4060B a versatile IC having an
is
on-chip oscillator and 10 binary out-
I would like to make a few corrections
puts. When an external clock signal is
in the circuit of *Cook Timer’ pub-
available can be fed to pin 11 and
it

binary divisions of 2* to 2 14 are avail-

lished in EFY Jul.*92 issue. In the
circuit LED1 and LED2 connections
able as outputs, as shown. Alterna-
should be as shown below.
tively, a capacitor and resistor can be
connected, as shown, to pins 9 and 10
and the on-chip oscillator will oscil-
late at a frequency of 2.2xRxC (R in
ohms and C in farads). The frequency
will then be divided and available as
outputs. But in this case, the fre-
quency will slightly vary with supply
variationsand hence a regulated supply
is recommended. Pin 12 is a reset pin

which when held high resets all out-

PUNAM KOTHADIYA
puts to low, and blocks the oscillator.
Pune

54 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Variable Speed Multi-Output
Running Mode ‘LED’ Display
Inderpreet Singh
r

1 ^ he circuit is a transistor transistor- outputs which drive the output transis- Y1 = A+B+C+D
logic (TTL) compatible running light tors. This logic circuit consists of six Y2 = A+B+C
display with a maximum of 15 outputs ICs — three quad 2-input OR gates and Y3 = (A+B)+CD
and is capable of driving up to 75 LEDs three quad 2-input AND. gates. Y4 = A+B
fordisplay. The circuitry employs TTL If A, B, C and D arc the inputs to Y5 = (A+BC) +BD
devices and ICs. Power dissipation of this logiccircuit and Y1,Y2,Y3 Y15 Y6 = A+BC
j

the logic circuit is in milliwatts. are the outputs, then the outputs can be i Y7 = (A+BC) (A+D)
The circuit is based on digital logic expressed in terms of boolean cqua- Y8 = A
having 4 inputs (hexadecimal) and 15 tions as follows: Y9 = A(B+C)+AD
Vcc

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram of variable speed multi-output running mode LED display.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS lES

 PARTS LIST
Sem icon ductors:
IC1 — NE555 timer
IC2 — 74LS93 binary counter
IC3, IC5,
IC8 — 74LS32 quad 2-input
OR gate
IC4.IC6,
IC7 — 74LS08 quad 2-input
AND gate
T1-T15 — BC147B npn ailicon
transistors
Resistors (all 1/4W, %5 % carbon, unless
stated otherwise):
Rl, R2 — 1-kilohm
R3 — 220-ohm
R4-R18 — 22-kilohm
R19-R33 - 1.5-kilohm
VR1 — 2.2-megohm linear pot
:
Capacitors:
1
Cl — 10pF, 16V electrolytic
C2 — 0.01 uF ceramic disc
T Miscellaneous:

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram fordrivercircuit.

— LEDs

cant (LSB).
bit

Clock pulse generator and decade

counter. The clock pulse generator and
decade counter are shown in the circuit

diagram. The clock pulse generator is a

timer chip (ICI) with a variable duty
cycle, which can be achieved by vary-
ing the potentiometer VR 1 . The mathe-
matical formula for frequency of oscil-
lator is shown in the formula.
1.44
f =
[RW2(VR1+R2)]C1
where. R1.VR1 and R2 are in ohms. Cl
in farads and f in Hz.
Here ICI is operating in astable
mode. IC2 has been used as a 4-bit
binary counter having four outputs A.
B, C and D with clock input pin 3. Reset
input pins 2 and 3 are grounded, while
pin 1 2 is connected to pin 1 . Outputs
from IC.^ are obtained from its pins 8, 9,
1 1 and 1 2 respectively.
Main logic circuit. This part of the
circuit has three AND and three OR
gates. All ICs are TI L compatible. The
source and sink current per gate is 0.4

PCB layout for the circuit shown

Fig. 3: in Fig. 1.
mA and 4 mA respectively.
Driver circuit . This consists of a
Y10 = A(B+C) Y14 = ABC series of 15 npn transistors (one for
Yll = A(B+C) (B+D) Y15 = ABCD each output). The circuit is designed in
Y12-AB Here* A’ is the most significant bit
1

such a way that 5 LEDs can be con-

Y13 = AR(C+D) (MSB) whereas ‘D’ is the least signifi* ( nected in parallel of a transistor, as

ESI ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 9V
RECTIFIED
AC
INPUT

Fig. 5: Power supply,

shown in Fig. 2.
Power supply unit (PSU). A 5V
regulator chip can be used, if current
consumption is less than 200 mA. If it

exceeds 200 mA then another IC LM317

can be used with proper heatsink.
All the ICs can be assembled on a
single sided PCB with 1C sockets. Lach
of the *Y* output should be connected
externally through wires, to the base of
a transistor in sequential order on PCB.
The potentiometer can be fixed on the
front panel in order to control the speed
of display Speed can be varied from 10
.

milliseconds to 16 seconds.
The cost of the entire circuit will be
about Rs 1 25 which is quite reasonable.
Fig. 4: Components layout for the PCB shown in the Fig. 3.
£<McS» Noto Rotor Fig 2. To got adoquato Mkjrmoatjon from thoSLEDt conno&od m paraHol. tho vakjoof aorma rwar*iora(R19to R33) may be rwducod to about 62 ot*n$ h ptorco of 1 $k
ohm tuggostoo by lho author.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 5 I
 CMOS Pocketable
Timekeeper
Amrit Blr Tiwana

To avoid gelling late to offices,

interviews, appointments etc here
PP3 or Evercady 216 type battery. It is
small enough to fit into the comer of a
after every
the unit is
few minutes to indicate that
working properly. Just be-
is a
project which builds into a fine CMOS- shirt pocket. The inclusion of the 15 fore the selected time the timekeeper
will sound an alarm, enabling the user
to reach his destination in time. This
unit can also come in handy for moni-
toring parking time (a practice preva-
lent abroad) for vehicles to avoid un-
necessary fines.When not in use, the
un can sim ply be tu med off by using a
it

slider switch.
Besides two CMOS chips the unit
uses just one semiconductor and a pi-
ezo speaker instead of the conven-
tional self-oscillating piezo buzzer. Its
TRANSPONDER
low current consumption gives the
Fig. 1: Block diagram of CMOS pocket sized timekeeper. battery a long life.

based timekeeper. The timekeeper gives minutes and 4-hour timings in addition
an alarm just minutes before the expiry to the standard 1 and 2-hour timings Working
of the selected time. makes it even more versatile. The circuit shown in Fig. 2 can be
The timer which is based on two To use the timekeeper just switch it easily understood from the block sche-
low-cost CMOS chips and a couple of on to the desired range and put it in your matic given in Fig. I. The circuit may
discrete components, works on a flat shirt pocket. A small LED will flash be divided into a few main sections, the

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram of CMOS pocket sized timekeeper.

 :

TABLE I PARTS LIST

Position of SI Range Timing cycle duration Frw time* Semiconductors
IC1 —
HCF4060BE
s 4 hr* 1 4058.1 seconds 6 minutes IC2 —
CD40106. hex inverter
4 2 hr* 7030 seconds 3 minutes D1 — 1N4148
3 1 hr 3515 seconds 13 minutes
2 IS miiilcs 879 seconds not significant Resistors (all 114 watt, ±5«* carbon, unless
1 Off Off 0« stated otherwise):
Rl.
•Free time refers to the time before the actual time lapses and the buzzer son ads. R2.R3 — 100-kilohm
R4 — 680-ohm
VR1 — 1 -megohm linear

first of which is an oscillator. The shown in Fig. 2. is

circuit, as
Capacitors;
The output of oscillator is fed to the based onallCF 4060BE oscillator cum Cl — 470nF styroflex or
frequency divider (time period multi- binary counter cum frequency divider. polya ter

which divides the basic frequency The chip has an in -built oscillator based C2 — lOOnF ceramic disc
plier),
C3 — 5nF ceramic disc
by 1024, 4096, 8192 or 16384. The on three inverters. Rl, VR1 and Cl set C4 — 220^F, 10V electrolytic
oscillator frequency is adjusted in such the oscillator frequency precisely at

a way that these divisions give time 1.1655Hz. This basic oscillator gener- Miscellaneous:

periods of 15 minutes. 1 hour, 2 hours ates a pulseof 2.2 R2 Cl seconds. This

— 27mm. piezo speaker with
low profile body
and 4 hours respectively. This is fol- time period is fed to the counters, and SI — Two-pole, five-way slide
lowed by an AF oscillator and a buffer. the division factor is selected by pole switch
The buffer boosts the output current to ‘b' of switch SI. — LED TIL209
drive a piezo ceramic speaker. In position 1 it remaias off and in

positions 2, 3, 4 and 5 it is switched on

to 15 minutes. 1 hour. 2 hours and 4
hours range respectively. The moment
the power is applied, the counters are
by the power-on -reset cir-
reset to zero
cuit based on R2 and C2.
The AF oscillator is buill around the
hex trigger gates of the CD4016 chip.
The first invertergaie is wired as an AF
oscillator which oscillates at about
2 kHz. The timing components R3 and
C3 determine the oscillative frequency.
The remaining gates are used to buffer
the outputs and to enable the piezo
buzzer to be driven directly.
Fig. 3: PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2.
The time base pulses are counted by
the internal counters as shown in Table
I. When the selected output count is

reached, the output goes high and the

switching diode begins to conduct. This
introduces capacitor C3 in the circuit
and the alarm is activated through the
piezo speaker.

Design considerations
The circuit has been optimised for
very low current consumption, and mini-
mum operational expenditure. Only
CMOS ICs have been used to keep the
current very low, even when the circuit
Fig. 4: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.
is undergoing its timing cycle.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 159

 Many readers would argue that a lends a lot of by avoiding
reliability for the switch. LED and piezo speaker.
simple conventional piezo type buzzer most external connections and thus Note that a rotary switch can be used
would elim inate the second IC from the eliminates chances of failure due to instead of a slide type.
circuit, if a single driver transistor was snapping of wires. Switch on the circuit to the desired

used along with. But, a simple piezo Begin the construction by soldering range. It will automatically start its

buzzer and a silicon driver transistor the resistors, followed by the capaci- timing cycles. To be sure that it is

also consumes several milliampcres of tors and the LEDs, diodes and IC sock- working properly watch the LED flash

current, even in quiescent state, and at ets. Don’t try soldering an IC directly and tuck away the timekeeper in your
the same time increases the profile/ unless you trust your skill in soldering. pocket .The com ponents are selected to
thickness of the device. Instead of All components should be soldered as trigger the alarm a few minutes before
keeping the LED permanently on, it shown in Fig. 4. Next, connect the the set limit as shown in Table I.
has been designed to flash at a low fre- piezo speaker to the PCB and glue it This pocket-sized timekeeper would
quency, once every few minutes. No into position using a rubber based adhe- cost about Rs 75. saving you both time
conventional decoupling capacitor has sive.Now connect the switch and then and money!
been used. Current remains in the mi- solder/screw on the PCB using mul-
it

croampeer region in quiescent state. tiple washers or spacers. Soldering it Readers’ Comments:
The maximum current when the alarm directly will only reduce its height above

is sounding is a few milliamperes. other components, and hamper in its 1. Since the author is stressing on
easy fixation in the cabinet. Now con- power consumption, a push-to-on
switch can be connected in series with
Construction nect the battery lead.
the indicating LED.
The complete timekeeper can be as- ITie circuit can be enclosed in any
As the circuit is not meant to
2.
sembled on a piece'of veroboard or a kind of cabinet, just anything from a
produce sound for a long period, the
breadboard or stripboard, but the best small pocket radio's to an old calcula- piezo buzzer can perhaps be connected
would be use the PCB shown in Fig. 3. tor's. We used a playing cards-box sized directly to the output of IC1. This
The PCB has been made according to enclosure. Before fitting the PCB, suit- would make the circuit compact and
the ‘all-on-one-board’ concept which able holes must be drilled in the cabinet cheaper by eliminating IC2.
NARENDRANATH BHOWMICK
Nowgong (Assam)

6 JM ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Electronic Number
Shooting Game
A. Jeyabai

and video games have be- quicker one acts, the faster one scores bu ffered before connection to he LEDs t

come very popular, both with children over the opponent. of the display circuit for good illumina-
and grown-ups. These games provide Nine switches arc used in 3x3 ma- tion. The triggering circuit contains nine
good recreation as the animated figures trix form. In the same way, nine LEDs switches for shooting (triggering) the
make the player feel as if he is actually arc fixed in identical places (Fig. 7). number game. The circuit may
in this
playing with another human being. These LEDs arc lit one by one at ran- have only one or a few switches in other
The circuit described here is the dom. The player has to press the switch games. A debouncer and a foul play
basic circuit for all electronic games of of identical place where the LED glows. checker circuit prevents the player from
this kind. Once you assemble it only a If the switch is pressed before the LED using unfair means. It also shapes edges
little imagination is required to make goes off the player scores one point. of the trigger pulses.
other games. One output is taken from dcbouncer
In this circuit, costly and not easily The circuit circuit to the counter/driver circuit for

available LCD panel is avoided and Fig. shows the block diagram of
1 the scoreboard.
only LEDs are used for display. For low the circuit. The pulse generator pro-

static power dissipation, fully CMOS duces positive clock pulses to run the Clock pulse generator circuit
ICs are used. random number generator and for the Let us first see the requisite of the
proper operation of debouncer and foul clock pulses. It takes as some time
The game and how to play it play checker circuit. (fraction of a second) to react to an
Like all electronic video games this Ten outputs of the random number action. The reaction time varies from
one also tests one's reflex action, i.e. generator go high one by one on every individual to individual. If a period of
the speed with which one reacts. The positive clock pulse. The outputs arc one second (that is LED glow period) is
Random allowed as reaction time, the player
NUMBER would surely shoot all the randomly
generated numbers. If it is 0.5 second
then the player has toshow some skill.
A challenge begins when the set time
period is 0.3 seconds. With this setting,
one has to press three switches (of course

the correct one) every second. Below

0.3 seconds more swiftness is required
to score more.
So, for our game, a maximum vari-
able period of one second between suc-
cessive clock pulses is required. Usu-
ally. timer ICs, inverters, NAND, NOR
or schmitt trigger NAND gates are em-
ployed to produce clock pulses. But
here JK type flip-flop is used because
Fig. 1 : Block diagram for number shooting game. of the foul play checker circuit. These

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 161

 PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 —
CD4 027, JK flip-flop
IC2 — CD4017, decade counter/
divider
IC3, IC4 — CD4050, hex buffer
IC5, IC6 — CD4033, decade counter/
7-aegment display driver
D1.D2 — 1N4001
Resistors: (All 1I4W, ±5% carbon, unless
stated otherwise):
R1 — 470-kilohm
R2-R5,
R7.R8 — 100-kilohm
R6 — 1-kilohm
VR1 — 100-kilohm linear
potentiometer
VR2 — 2- megohm linear
potentiometer
Capacitors:
Cl — 0,l(iF ceramic disc
C2 — lOpF/lfiV electrolytic

Miscellaneous:
S0-S10 — Push-to-on switches
— FND500 displays (two)
LED1-
LED10 — LED*

Mil
3
=
O nO
O
being two flip-flops in a single chip. So
ihe unused flip-flop is wired as an as-

tablc multivibrator.

o CMOS 1C$ for almost all their op-

erations such as setting, reselling, chang-
ing states require positive going clock
pulses. The output of CMOS IC2 is

high and the LED slays lit until the

arrival of the next clock pulse. The

player has toshooi the numberby press-
ing the correct switch before Ihe begin-
ning of the next clock pulse. Hence the
period between the two consecutive
pulses should be variable.
Fig. 2 shows the circuit diagram of
number shooting game. The clock pulse
generator circuit is wired around half
of CD4027 (IC1) which is a dual JK
type flip-flop. Suppose IC1 ’s output Q
(pin 15) is high and Q (pin 14) is low,
then capacitor Cl charges through VRI.
When the voltage across Cl crosses
half of the power supply voltage, it
resets the output 0 to low and Cl dis-
charges th rough D 1 . Now Q bei ng h igh
and Q Cl charges through VR2
low.
and Rl. When C2 reaches half of the
power supply voltage it again sets Q to
Fig. 2: Circuit dingmm for shooting gome.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
fri*. 3: Actual-size PCB layout for the control circuit.

1NJOOU2

AND KEYBOARD To display i

Pig. 4: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 63
l ig. 5: Actual si /t P< B layout for dotted lines shown in fig.l.

DISPLAY 1
FMO 50C

• TO PI M3

lg. 6: Components layout for the PCB shown in l ig. 5.

 display may be used, but here (CD
2 3 05 03
1 Q0 so ss S3 4033) a decade counter /seven-segment
4 5 6 04 08 06 S4 S8 S6 driver and common-cathode LED dis-

7 6 9 07 02 01
play is used. The 100k resistor con-
, S7 S2 Si
nected at lamp test terminal (pin 14) is
DISPLAY O OUTPUTS SWITCH
POSITION OF CONNECTED POSITIONS useful for checking the display. When
LED* TO LEO.
this terminal is high the display should
Fig. 7: Arrangement of sw itches and LEDs, light up all segments. Switch S10 is

high and Q to low. Here C2 discharges vated bounce before coming to the steady used for resetting the counter.
through D2. Thus the cycle repeats. state and produce spurious pulses
VR2 sets the low period and clock that result in erratic operation of the Sound effect generator
pulses are taken from output Q. circuit. When a successful shooting is an-
Onc may try foul play by pressing a nounced by a sound, it is more exciting.
Random number generator, switch before the identically positioned Sound generation can be obtained if the
trigger, hufTer, and display circuit I LED lits or pressing the switch repeat- out pu of debouncer JK flip-flop is bu ff-
t

CD4017 (IC2), a decade counter/ edly in an effort to score more points. ered before being connected to the pi-
divider, is
•
used for random number So for a fool-proof system, the cir- ezo buzzer. It may also be connected to
generation. Actually this IC does not cuit requirements arc: the gun sound generator or any other
j

produce any number. But its ten out- (a) The spurious pulses must be circuit like it.

puts go high one by one for every posi- '

ignored.
tive going clock pulse and each output I Only one point must be given
(b) Construction
remains high until the next dock pulse ,
even if one triggers several times dur- 'Die soldering sides of the PCBs and
comes. So only one output remains ing the LED’s lit period. the component layouts are shown in
high at a time. (c) The triggering before any LED Figs 3. 4. 5 and 6. All measures have
The first nine outputs Qo through lits must be ignored. been taken to make the design flexible
Q8 (and all ten outputs in other games) All these conditions are easily met and to suit all similar games. For this
arc buffered by CD4050 (IC3. IC4) and by the JK. flip-flop. Once the clock pin reason the reset and clock enable pins
connected randomly to the nine LEDs 3 of 1C 4027 is triggered positively its
j
of IC2 are grounded through 100k re-
placed and numbered Thus
in order. output at pin 1
goes high and activates two PCBs are being
sistors. Besides,
random position here means random the counter. At the same time the out- recommended, one for the control cir-
number generation. put at pin 2 (which is connected to pin cuit (which should remain common)
In our case the numbers generated i
6)goes low. As pin 5 input is also low and the other for display and switches.
are 1.9,8,3,4, 2,6,7 and 5. and the cycle the IC and ignores further
is inhibited As the PCBs are small they can be
repeats. One can connect the outputs to pulses (requirements a and b). |
fixed easily on available plastic cabi-
LEDs (after buffering) in any order. The output changes the state only j
nets. You be surprised to see that
will
One terminal of the triggering on positive going pulse. Suppose one I

many games can be played simultane-

switches are connected to the outputs keeps pressing the switch and waits for :

ously. So wait until you decide on the

of IC2 and the common terminal is the respective LED to lit. When any number of games you prefer. Then choose
taken to the debouncer circuit (pin 3 of output of IC2 is high the clock input of the cabinet.
IC1). IC 1 (pin 3) gets high as the correspond- Nine LEDs and switches are ar-
The 100k resistors connected to reset ing switch is kept pressed. But O output ranged in a rectangular shape. How-
terminal (pin 15) and chip enable (pin of IC1 will not change its state. Be- ever, all the ten outputs (including output

13) of IC2 connect these pins to ground cause the reset pin (pin 4) is also re- Q9 of I
C2) can be used to get any shape.
in this game. These pins can be used in ceiving positive clock pulses from the And don’t forget that the arrangement
other games. clock pulse generator, it overrides all of LEDs and switches must be identi-
*
The LED current limiting resistor output at pin 1 to low state. cal.
R6 of chosen to get optimum
lk is
1

Though the reset pin goes low when LEDs of any shape and colour can
Illuminance of LEDs. Its value may be the switch is kept pressed, the output
1

j be used but the flat type will give a

Increased or decreased. But do not try will not go high as only the positive better look. For triggering, switches of
to approach the maximum current limit going clock pulse will change the out-
(
any type, from membrane to simple
•f LEDs or IC 4050. put. i.e triggering after the LED is push-to-on or even switch pad of a
on. worn-out calculator, would serve the
Debouncer and foul play purpose.
Checker circuit Counter and scoreboard
All mechanical switches when acti- Any CMOS com pat ible counter and

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 165

 :

CMOS Digital Clock With

On-Off Timer
Rameshwar

Ti» circuit presented here can be shown in Fig.4. For example, to indi- |

PARTS LIST
used to control any instrument for a cate the time 23:49:36 hrs, the sixth
particular lime duration in your ab- LED of unit and third of tens on sec- Sem icon d ucfnrs
scncc. The circuit is very efficient and ondsscale; ninthLED of unit and fourth IC1-IC9 — CD4017 decade counter
simple to construct. It is based on CMOS oftens on minutes scale; and third LED IC10 — CD4011 quad 2-input
decade counter CD4017 and NAND of unit and second of tens on hours
NAND gate
gates CD401 1 and CD4012. These ICs
IC11 — CD4012 dual 4-input
scale will glow, NAND gate
are easily available and are quite cheap. To adjust the clock time, two clock T1 — SL100B npn translator
The heart of this digital clock is a set switches have been provided. By D1-D4 — 1N4001 silicon diode

time counting circuit. For the seconds pressing ‘slow’ (SI 1) and ‘fast’ (S10)
Resistors <all 1/4W, ^5% carbon unless
counter, CD4017 has been used as di- switches, minute advances at a rate of 1 stated otherwise):
vide-by-ten (IC6) and divide-by-six (IC5) per second and 1
0 per second respec- R1-R4,
counters for unit and tens digits lively. To reset the clock, a reset switch R7.R8 — 1 -kilohm

respectively. The minutes counter (IC4 (S9) has been provided. A R5 — 4.7-kilohm
start/stop :

R 6 R9-R16
.
— 100 -kilohm
and IC3) is identical to the seconds switch (SI 2) is provided to stop and I

counter. For counting hours. IC 4017 start the counting of time. The clock Miscellaneous:
has been used in divide-by-ten (1C2) can be used as a stop clock with the help RL1 - 12V. 100-ohm SPST relay
and dividc-by-three (1C1) counter mode of S12 and start/stop switches,
SI. S3. — Single pole, 10-way rotary
S5, S7 switch
and tens counters respectively.
for unit For setting and detecting the On- S2, Sfi — Single pole, 6 -way rotary
Thc clock counts in the 24-hour mode. Off lime, a very simple circuit has been witcha

A very simple circuit using 2-input used. It consists of eight rotary switches—
S4.S8 — Single pole, 3-way rotary
switch
NAND gate (1/2 IC 4011) has been four single-pole 10-way, two single-
S12 — On/off toggle switch
used to reset the hours counter at the pole 6-way and two single-pole 3-way S9-S11 — Push-to-09 switch
24th hour. type. IC 4012 is a dual 4-input NAND — LEDs (45 noa)
Another counter (IC7 and 1C8) has gate and IC 4011 is a quad 2-input
been provided to produce 1Hz Frequency NAND gate. off time. The outputs of N5 and N6 are
for the seconds counter. This divides ‘On* time can be selected by swit- inverted by N3 and N4 respectively to
by a factor of 50. It consists of
the input ches S5, S6, S7 and S8 while ‘off time obtain high output for driving a R/S
two 4017 ICs. Base frequency (50IIz) canbesetbyswjtchesSl,S2,S3andS4 flip-flop which can be used to control a
for this counter can be obtained from '
by keeping them at required positions, relay circuit.
mains frequency. This counter can be NAND gate N5 will detect the ‘on’ Here CD4017 (IC9) has been used
eliminated by giving 1 Hz pulse to sec- time by keeping its output low only at I
as the R/S flip-flop. Tire output has
onds counter from any other source t previously set ‘on’ time. Second NAND been taken from Q1 (pin 2). The set
such as a quartz clock. LEDs are used to ,
gate N6 will detect the ‘off time by signal is fed to clock input (pin 1 4) and
display the time on an analogue scale as keeping its output low at previously set reset input is fed to reset pin (pin

ESI ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

W4001

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the digital clock with on-off timer.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 .

Ml L

I ifc.2: PCD layout for the circuit shown in Fig,f

TO
RELAY

Fig. 3: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 2.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 • Now the flip-flop is ready for the next
cycle. A proper rating triac may be
used of relay.
in place
This circuit can be used with a 1 2V
unregulated power supply. The com-
plete digital timer canbe assembled on
a piece of veroboard or a breadboard or
stripboard, but the best would be to use
the PCB shown in Fig. 2. The PCB
lends a lot of by avoiding
reliability

most external connections and thus

eliminates chances of failure due to
.snapping of wires.
Begin the construction by soldering
the resistors, followed by the capacti-
ros, diodes and IC sockets. Never sol-
der an IC directly unless you trust your
skill in soldering. All components should
be soldered as shown in Fig. 3. Next,
connect all the rotary switches and LHDs
Fig. 4: Front panel Tor the clock timer.
on a general-purpose board as shown in
15). When the supply is received, QO i»*>mes high, energising the relay. After Fig. 4. Make connections between PCB
becomes high while Q1 to Q9 remain the lapse of the operating time, ‘off set and the general- purpose board as per
low. When time reaches the ‘on’ set time provides a positive voltage to the circuit diagram. The circuit would cost
time, a positive going pulse appears at reset pin . As a result the IC and 01 around Rs 200.
pin 14 and IC 4017 counts one. So Ql become low. de-energising the relay.

1.

Readers’ Comments: IC6 and drives LED30 at pin 3 which I am

interested in assembling the
I wish to draw the attention of the is connected to pin 14 of IC4. This circuit of CMOS
digital clock. But I

author of CMOS Digital Clock with pulse is counted by IC4 and gives 1 would like to know whether the displays
minute indication at pin 2 through can be used instead of LEDs and how
On-off timer* published in EFY Sep. *92
issue to the following: LED 21 but every minute will be these can be used.
Pin 14 of IC4 is connected to pin indicated 10 seconds later. VIDHESH PANDEY
2. Similarly, IC3 receives every 10 Unnao (U P.)
3 ofIC5. It should be connected to pin
1 of IC5. Since IC5 receives
pulses
minutes pulse from IC4 and drives The author, Mr Rameshwar, replies:

after every 10 seconds from IC6 (pin

IC2. Here also after counting till 60 The connection of pin 14 of IC4 to pin
12) and counts up to sixth pulse, it minutes IC3 gives a high at pin 3 and 3 of IC5 is correct. Actually, ICS counts

will give a pulse after every minute to

sends a pulse after another 10 minutes, through Q0 to Q6, i.e. through pin 3,
IC4 that counts up to 10 minutes. so actually IC2 will count an hour 10 2, 4, 7, 10, 1 and 5 but it displays only

Now pin of IC5 will go high after 60

1
minutes later. Q0 to Q5. Q6 (pin 5) has been used to
seconds and till that time pin 3 of IC4 3. Why are the resistors R9-R16 reset IC5 at count 60. So instead of
will remain high. After another 10
|

(100k) used? Q6, Q3 becomes high as clock should

seconds IC5 receives input pulse from UMESH MEHRA show *00* instead of ‘60’ seconds. It ie
Kota correct that IC5 will receive puleee

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 169

 after every 10 seconds from IC6 but it The construction project in EFY Sep.’92 1

simple circuit for a 50Hz drive signal

will take only 50 seconds to count issue wasn’t very impressive. Besides, as a 12V DC supply for the clock.
through Q0 to Q5 as initially Q0 will the information regarding the cost of 2*1N«001

be high to indicate ‘O’. Hence only pin the unit appears to be false The
3 of IC5 can provide 60 seconds pulse switches alone cost Rs 270 in Bombay,
to IC4 and the same is true for every ,
as against the total cost of Rs 200
hour count. mentioned for the complete project.
Resistors R9-R16 have been used KALPESH DALWADI
to keep reset pins at ground potential Bharuch
so as to enable the counters. The method of coupling 50Hz base
Regarding Mr Pandey’s question, (mains) frequency to the input of IC7 50Hz dock signal plus 12V DC.
Circuit tor
it is advisable to use same display (pin 14) has not been given. As the circuit uses CMOS ICs, any
system as it is specially designed for ROY VERGHESE logic signal of 3 to 12V can drive this
LED’s display. Kunnamhulam clock with a current of less than a
However, the seven-segment i
J The article is good but please give a milliampere.
displays can also be used by converting detailed circuit for converting the mains Ifyou wish to give 1Hz pulse to the
decimal outputs of IC1 to six-into- frequency to the clock frequency re* seconds counter then the fast-eet switch
seven segment format. This can be quired for IC7. cannot be provided, and also IC7 and
done by following two methods. IC8 would not be required. Fast-set
SAMRAT BARTAKKE
1. By decoding decimal outputs switch can be provided with another
Satara
into seven -segment format with the fast signal source which may be pro-
The author, Mr Rameshwar, replies:
help of diode decoding matrix, As the circuit was designed way back duced with the help of a 555 timer IC.
2. By encoding the decimal output
in June '91 there may have been some
,

into BCD format and then decoding escalation in costs.

this into seven-segment format with
j

did not include the coupling part

I
the help of respective ICs. of the circuit as it is quite common to
use the mains for deriving the clock
frequency. However, Pm giving here a

70 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 70/40 Watts
Hi-Fi Amplifier
C. Sanjay

ni^his isone amplifier you may strutted in a standard 48cm (19-inch) I you how good a real hi-fi amplifier can
never have to replace by a belter one. !

cabinet to suit any rack. You can add be!

This amplifier gives a high output and this as one of the components to your The circuit. 'I’hc input is given to
at the same time has good specifica- ‘professional’ stereo system. A look at the base of transistor T1 which along
tions. The amplifier should be con- its specifications (see box) will show with transistor T2 forms a differential
 Fig. 2: PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 1.

2N3019

2N40M
BC1478

Li (20 TyRNS Of 206WG. OVER too 2W

RESISTOR)

OUTPUT

2N3019

Fig. 3:Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 2

pair whose current is maintained by T3. along with transistor T5. forms a cas- transistors T6 and T7 which arc again
As a result, the output capacitor, gener- caded pair in which all the power is cascaded for better results.
ally used in amplifiers, is not used here, dissipated by transistor T5 while the Transistors T8 and T9 act like di-
and a dual supply is also employed. gain is that of T4*s. The constant cur- odes which compensate for the tem-
T1 drives transistor T4 directly which rent source for T4 and T5 is provided by perature coefficient of transistors T10

WT1 1 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 4 -

scratchlcssaluminium plate with fine

sand paper. When you do this, make
sure that your strokes are in the same
direction. Spray on it afterwards.
The layout inside the cabinet is not
given here so that you may arrange
PCBs as you like. But be careful while
fixing thepower transformer. Fix it 8
to 10 ems away from the PCB and
divide the cabinet into two portions

PARTS LIST
Sem icon ductors:
Fig. 4: Position of heatsinks on PCB. —
The gain T1-T3 BC546B
voltage across the speaker. is
T7 — BC548B
given by (R7+R8)/R8 and is approxi-
T8.T9 — BC147B
mately 32 here. T4 — BC558B
Construction. First solder the re- T5, Tl 1 — 2N4033
T6.T10 — 2N3019
sistors and then the capacitors. There-
T12 — BD140
after, solder all the transistors except T13 _ BD139
T12 and T13. Now wind 20 turns of 20 T14 — ZN3055
swg wire around resistor R20 and sol- T15 — MJ29S5
D1 — 3.3V, 400m W zener
der the ends of the wire to the leads of
D‘2 — 3.9V, 400m W
zener
the resistor. Insert R20 into the PCB D3-D6 — 1N5402, 10A diodes
and solder it.

Now bend the leads ofT1 2 and Tl 3, Resistors (all 1 !4W, ±5% carbon, unless
stated otherwise):
Fig. 5: Pin configuration of transistors. as shown in Fig. 7, and insert it into the —
R1.R7 100-kilohm
si R2, R3,R9 — 1.2-kilohm
opdt R4.R5, R6 — 2.7-kilohm, 1W
Rft — 4.7-ldlohm
RIO,
R13.R16,
R18.R19 100-ohm
Rll — ,3.3-kilohm
R12.R17 — 680-ohm
R14.R15.
R22-R2T) l-ohm,2W
R20 — 10-ohm. 2W
R21 — 10-ohm, 1W
R26 — 6.8-kilohm, 0.5W
VR1 — 100-ohm potentiometer

Capacitors:
SECONDARY Cl — l\iF polyester
TRANSFORMER C2. C3 — 25pF, 25V electrolytic
C5 — lOpF, 60V electrolytic
Fig. 6: Circuit for the power supply. C6 — 4.7^F, 10V electrolytic
and Tl 1 Transistors Tl 0, T 1 2 and Tl PCB and fix the transistors to the C7 — 56pF ceramic disc
.

heatsinks on the PCB. Solder the tran-

C4.C8.C13 — 0.1 pF polyester
form a triple darlington pair like Til,
C9-C12 — 2500pF. 50V electrolytic
Tl 3 and Tl 5. The output current is now sistors carefully and then cut off their
(for mono) or 4700^F*
changed greatly by a small change in leads. Next, bend T8 and T9 slightly 50V electrolytic
towards the heatsinks and stick them to (for stereo)
the Vbe of T10 or Til. As the output
consists of triple darlington pairs, the the heatsinks with some tape and heatsink
Miscellaneous:
current through T4 and T5 is kept at a compound. XI — 230V AC primary to
low value of about 6mA. The front panel, when the amplifier 22V-0-22V, 3.5A
secondary transformer
Coil LI is used to prevent distortion is completed, will not have any con-
SI DPST switch
in the amplifier when capacitive loads trols except the power on/off switch. —
LI Coil having 20 turns of
are connected to the output. A fuse is Use anodised aluminium panel, if avail- 20 SWG wire
added in series with the loudspeaker so you can make
able. If it isnotavailable. 3.5A fuse

that the fuse blows off if there is any DC a good panel yourself by rubbing a
— LED

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 173

with an aluminium plate, keeping the
transformer on one of
SPECIFICATIONS 1

its sides and the

Output power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD); 73W into 4-ohm and 44W into S-ohm
PCB on the other.
Offset voltage: Less than *40mV
The dimmensions of the heatsinks Input impedance: 100k
arc however shown in Fig.7 along with Harmonic distortion: 0.015%
the procedure of bending. Intermodulation distortion (70W): 0.02%
Testing: After you arc sure that you F requency range: 10Hz-30kHz, ±2dB
have made no mistakes, adjust VR1 to Signal -to-noise ratio (out = 100m W): Over 72dB
j

its minimum position and switch on

the power. Nowconnect a milli-volt-
meter across any of the 1-ohm resis-
tors (R14, R15 and R22) and adjust
potmeter VR1 for 16mV on the meter.
This represents a current of 500mA.
Connect the output of the source
and adjust its level control so that the
output is 2 watts. Connect a dummy
load instead of a speaker and leave it
like that for about six hours. Thereaf-
ter, check the transistors. They should

not be more than just warm. The power

transistors are allowed to get a little

hot.
If everything has gone well, it means
that you have completed your first

professional amplifier.
Fig. 7: Dimensions and bending procedure of heatsinks for transistors.

WLM\ ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 The Universal Timer
Amrit Bir Tiwana

^
| \e timing of events and proc- with pin point precision anywhere from Readers arc quite familiar with timers
esses is becoming an ever increasing one-tenth of a second to hundred hours! and must be well acquainted with the
necessity in virtually every automation Dispensing with the evcr-problematic ubiquitous 555 timer which probably
task, not only in the industrial sphere analogue dial, this timer is built around stands as the most widely used (rather
but even in the domestic sphere. No common CMOS chips, and features overused) timer chip. It is indeed a
4
wonder timers arc often referred to as autolatch ' facility plus such a low current versatile device if the delays required

the first step towards automation. assumption that most multimeters are less than about quarter of an hour.
This universal timer offers an ‘ul- would fail to detect it. All these fea- Hut for greater delays the 555 fails

trawide' timing range which can be set tures make it all the more versatile. miserably.

TIME BASE GENERATOR

OUT
HIGH FREQUENCY RANGE SELECTOR
OSCILLATOR
T*
JHr

DNHDE DfVlDE 0IV10€ i I DIVIDE DWDE

BY BY 10 -E-W BY* BY 10
I OUT
10Hz
BY 10
COUNTER IK* COUNTER
6
IrtKz COUNTER 1/00 Kd COUNTER COUNTER 1/W)0 Hz
DIVIDE*
CARPIY OUTPUT

10 STAGE STAGE
.10
DIGIT DECIMAL
DECIMAL Mm-tt-,- Mr.
COUNTER RANGE COUNTFR
^ MASTER CLOCK
SELECTOR SELECTOR
2
; * SELECTOR
2 1

UNTTS

OUTPUT A

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the universal timer.

Then, obviously, there are two op- this timer can be put to are evident from can be had readymade from EFY asso-
tions left. One, to use a microprocessor the specifications (sec box). The timer dales (Kits’n’ Spares. New Delhi),

based timer which is not only costlier, dispenses with the usual linear knob Even with one of the widest ranges
but is much cumbersome to use as well, setting control that can hardly ever be ever provided on a timer, this timer still
since most microprocessors are ‘spe- calibrated correctly. This timer instead keeps the cost factor the narrowest at

dalised’. The second option is to resort uses a combination of l wo thumbwheel/ about Rs 140.
todigital electronics and kgspondivid- rotary' switches along with a range se-
ing the basic timing again and again! lector with 600 possible settings, which Working
And that seems to be the most sound enables it to be adjusted directly with The working of the circuit can be

idea as it enables implementation of pin-point precision. understood from the block schematic in
fairly large delays, which sometimes The PCBs used for the timer have Fig. 1. The actual circuit is shown in

arc not quite possible even with micro- been designed on an IBM compatible Fig. 2.

processors. That's how this design works PC-XT. using powerful PCB CAD soft- The 4060 oscillator generates a high-

as well. ware to ensure maximum miniaturisa- frequency signal of the order of several
The universal range of applications tion. For readers’ convenience the PCB kilohertz, which is precisely adjusted

K3| ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Fiji- 3: Solder side PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2.

Fig. 4: Component side PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2.

to remove device imprecision errors, decimal mode respectively. The output control and S3 controls the unit digit

using preset VR 1 . The oscillator inside & tapped by the range selector at each settings.

the4060chiposcillatestogiveatiming stage. The ou, Put of both switches are

period equal to 2.2 x Timing Resistor x taken and fed tba NANDgate-the much
Timing Capacitor (in farads). This basic This provides time periods of 0.1 popular 4011 quad NAND chip. This

frequency is divided by all the internal see, 1 sec., 0.1 minute. 1 minute, 0.1 gate changes state when both of its

dividers inside the chip, i.c. by a factor hour. 1 hour respectively. These, in inputs assume high state, i.e. when the

of 16384 or 2 13 times. This in turn turn, provide a precise master clock preset time is reached. This, in tum,
provides a 10 Hz frequency with a very frequency, which is two
fed to the latches the next gate with the help of
high degree of precision. ‘serially* connected counters, again two ‘feedback' ‘diode 1N4148. The follow-
40 1 7 chips. When IC8 counts ten mas- ing transistor buffer drives a relay whose
The same frequency is simul- ter pulses. If ?7 counts one. Switches S2 outputs control the load. The relay
taneously divided by 10, 6, 10, 6,10 by contacts can be selected to switch the
and S3 provide control over the timer
the set of five 4017 counters wired in setting, the range for which is selected load ‘on* or 'off after the preset time,
maximum mode and dividc-by-six via switch SI. S2 provides ‘tens’ digit The audio alarm is also driven in a

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS!!®
 4 :

SINGLE pole
6- WAY SWITCH

1N4146

I
3000 S3
SINGLE GND COMMON POLE 12V RELAY
POLE
TO-WAY ROTARY
_ SINGLE POLE
10- WAY ROTARY
SWITCH
SWITCH
Fig. 5: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

laicd but may PARTS LIST

— include a 7812 Semiconductors:
regulator, if dc- IC1 —
CD4060
—
\ \
i

»
sinxl.

the
It is

suggested to use
18-volt ver-
sion of the
strongly

CMOS
IC2-IC8
IC9
T1
D1-D3
D4-D6
CD4017
—
—
—
—
CD40U
BC-r>47 npn transistor
1N4148
1N4001
'
* ICs, and not the
Resistors (all 1I4W, *5** carbon unless
/ I 15-volttypc,and
stated otherwise);
I then run the R1-R4,
* whole circuit on R10-R13 1-kilohm
I-'ig. 6: PCB layout For the circuit shown in Fig. 8. 15 volts rather R5, R6 — 10-kilohiu
R7 — 47-kilohm
than 1 2 volts, to
R8 — 24 -kilohm
BATTERY
improve accuracy R9 — 100-ohin
BACKUP 1N4001 of the oscillator. VR1 — 4.7-kilohm linear

1N4001 . The batteries

Capacitor*
•
* 12V
included for
Cl — 0.0001 |iF, ceramic
back-up during C2 — 1 OOuF, r
2. >V electrolytic
-A t power failure arc C3 — 470*iF, r
2 »V electrolytic
GNO
gno a must. It should
1N4001 470».
24V
Y'
1 Mist'eUaneous:
be wise to opt for 230V AC primary
XI to
rcchargablc bat- 12V-0-12V, 500mA
teries. In that secondary transformer
Fig. 7: Components layout for the I’CB shown
»wn in Fig. 6. case, the Varta SI — Single -pole fi-way rotary
switch
similar way, and the same may be dis- make 9-volt would be a
9-voll Oat battery
S2, S3 — Single-pole 10-way
abled by the corresponding switch S5. better and a lower-cost choice as com- rotary switch
The entire ciraiit/cvcle may be reset sc of few Ni-Cd cells.
pared to a set S4 — Push-to-on switch

by pressing the reset control or by inter-

S5. S7 — Oa'ofl switch
S6 — SPD'i* switch
rupting power supply to the circuit. Construction
Constructic RL1 — 300-ohm, 12V relay
The circuit may be constructed on a — Piezo buzzer
Power supply double -sided PCB as shown in Figs 3. — LEDs
and 5. The PCB, being very compact,
— 9V flat battery
The circuit, owing to its low current
intake, may be run on batteries, or on allows the entire timer to be a compact constructor to make the PCB himself.
mains — using the circuit shown in Fig.8. unit. Hut the track spacing has been TTie PCB
must be cleaned to re-
The power supply need not be regu- kept liberal to enable even a normal move any dirt which may. otherwise.

rai l ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 S7 XI lead to shoddy joints. First solder the
ON-OFF 23ft/ AC PRIMARY resistors, then capacitors, and last sem i-
SWITCH TO 12V-0-12V. $00nA T2V DC
conductors. It is strongly advisable to
use the sockets for all the ICs. Or else,
the PCB may get damaged in case even
one chip turns out to be defective.
After the soldering is complete, check
the positions of all polarised compo-
nents, especially the ICs. Then rcchcck
which should appear shiny. If
all joints

all seems fine, turn the PCI! upside

down and clean it with some petrol/

spirit and, if feasible, give it a coat of
Fig. 8: Circuit diagram for the power supply.
varnish after the construction is com-

r°i RANGE

’ NCUTRiy.
S5 r i
AC

a— UVE 1
:

/
j

Fig. 9: Wiring diagram for the universal timer.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
plete.
FEATURES
Next, select a suitable cabinet, and
fix all controls on the panel then the Timing ranges: 1/10 to 9.9 second
1 to 99 seconds
relay towards the rear end. Better use a
1/10 to 9.9 minutes
socket as found in most stabilisers.
1 to99 minutes
Make all ‘light’ connections with 1/10 to 9.9 hours •

the indicatore using ribbon cable. It 1 to 99 hours.

will be agood idea to insert cable ties or Design base: CMOS integrated
Timing control: Step ranged, direct, digital
tape wircscts. 1 6-way ribbon cable con- Max.= 100%
Accuracy:
nect ions are preferable. After all con- Typical *98% in all cycles
nections arc made, proceed with the Power requirement: 230V <#50 Hz, or
14mA @12 Volts with indicstors
high -current connections by using the
inactive and Relay deactiated.
well insulated wires used for mains Inte range options: 100 settings.
current. After these connections are Output power: Any voltage, depends on relay rating.
complete, test for mains leakage with Typical 10 ampere* @ 230V AC.
Displays:
1.
Cycle status LED display.
the help of a continuity tester.
you may close the
If all is well,
cabinet and turn on the mains/power i

adjustment needed. 2. Select the second last range using

supply. The power indicator will light SI (up to 9.9 hours).

up. Now open the enclosure again and Test run 3. Set S2 to 5 hours marking and S3
put a load, i.e. connect a device to the After the timer is complete, it’ll be to zero setting.

timer and set it to a short period, say, a a good idea to see how simple it is to 4. Set delayed on using S4 and turn
few seconds, and adjust VR1 till ex- operate. Suppose you have to record a the alarm on using S5.
actly that time delay is obtained. The movie after five hours and also need an 5. Turn the power on and press
accuracy on rest of the ranges will alarm. The following steps are needed: reset..

follow automatically. That’s all the Connect the VCR to the timer. And that’s it. Q
 7

Automatic Voltage Stabiliser

Shashi Babu Thawait

^Conventional voltage stabilisers cut and with the help of manual switch Working of the circuit

are used for feeding controlled voltage voltage is again brought down to 240V The power supply to this circuit is

to refrigerators, TVs, VCRs etc where AC. At the time of peak load, i.e. in given through secondary of transformer

AC input varies predominently during evening time, this manual operation of X2. The 20V AC across two lapping is
peak loads. These stabilisers normally stabiliser may have to be done fre- changed into DC with diodes and then
use one or two relays and voltage is quently. filtered.

available in two steps. In first step the This circuit solves the above prob- Transformer XI senses the input

output is 240V AC at 240V AC input lems efficiently. With this circuit it is voltage. The variations in AC input

while in second step the output is 240V possible to keep the output voltage con- voltage arc sensed by this transformer
output. This voltage rectified with
AC at 220V or 210V AC input. If input stant at 230V AC, even if the mains is

goes below 220/2 10V AC, the output voltage goes as low as 170V AC. the help of diodes D5 through D8, fil-

state varies but to a lesser extent. This circuit energises one relay at a tered and then fed to base of transistors

The other type of stabilisers avail- time from 170V AC upwards, and all T1 to T4 through trim pots VR1 to
able in the market are the manual auto- relays are energised when 230V AC VR4. Zener d iodes D 1 3 to D 1 6 are used
cut kind. In such stabilisers the output input is reached. Similarly, if supply for reference.

voltage is changed manually with a input voltage decreases gradually from Transistor I I conducts when its base
rotary switch to maintain 240V AC 230V, the relays are denergised auto- voltage exceeds 2.6V (i.e. zener volt-

output. In case input voltage exceeds matically one by one so that the output age, 2V + silicon diode conduction

240V AC the output is automatically voltage remains constant at 230V AC. voltage, 0.6V), and relay RL1 is encr-

R2 R4
12V R1
1000
0.5W 3000
100U.
012 470
xt RE LAV 0 5W 0.5W 3W
RELAY 2 1N400:
230V AC PRIMARY
TO-M2V; 300mA
oo - L-Ji
1N4007J
D
1

D10 T J 12V Oil

300Q IN 400
.

} 12V
5300Q ‘

TRANSFORMER TLl P RELAY RELAY 4

m -t
SEC. 3
12V
C3 VR3]
R6 300Q_
i” is >
—W\ IK
VR2|
'bJ?
J
JJ

±-±
X,
SL100
r VwV
\SJ*
SL100
? T4
) cT
470*1
40V
Sr wV-
SL1C
loslot 40V 1
R10 D14 015
IK 013 * L
2V 2V
'
0 5W 2V
J
± 01-04-
ds-w- C3- 4X1N4007
4J.1N4007
p-
1 1

170V O-

61
190V

210V
oA
AC
L
0 OUTPUT
ON/OFF SWITCH
5A.250V 230V O—
220V AC NEUTRAL 250V O—— *|
X2
INPUT TO
230V PRIMARY
0-1 70V. IflOV, 210V, 230V.
250V
SEC. TRANSFORMER

Fig. I: Circuit diagram for automatic voltage stabiliser.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTSl
Actual-size PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. I.

01 04.
4 IN 4007

RELAV 7

D0-C6-
1*4007 1*4007 N4007 1*4007
4 x 1H4J07

SL100 SHOO

o
 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4
The exact
PARTS LIST
conduction of T1
Semiconductors:
through T4 can be
T1-T5 — SL100 npn trnneialor
controlled by pots DI-D12 — 1N4007 diode"
VR1 VR4.
to D13-D16 — 2V, 1 amp. zener diode
Diode D1 to
Reis tors (all 1/4W, ±5% carbon unless
D4 arc used for stated otherwise):
rectification R1 — 4.7-ohm, 3W
while capacitor R2.R3 — 100-ohm, 0.5W
Cl used for
R4.R5 — 56-ohm, 0.5W
is
R6-R9 — 1-kilohm
-

filtration. Simi- R10 — 1-kilohm, 0.5W

larly, diodes D5 VR1-VR4 — 20-kilohm linear
to D8 have been Capacitors:
used for rectifi- Cl — 470pF, 40V electrolytic
NEUTRAL
cation and capaci- C2 — 100pF. 40V electrolytic
Fig. 4: Relays and transformer connection diagrams. tor C2 for fillra-
C3 C6to — IOpF. 50V electrolytic
Miscellaneous:
gised. tion. XI — 230V AC primary to
Similarly, transistor T2 will con- Diode D9 to D 1 2 have been used to 0-12V, 300mA secondary
transformer
duct only when the voltage exceeds protect the transistor from failing due
V
X2 — 230V AC primary to
4.6 (i.e. zener voltages of diodes D 13 to reverse voltage at the time of drop- 0-170V, 190V, 210V, 230V,
and D14 + 0.6V). ping of relays. 250V $econdarie«
Likewise, T3 will conduct when the The circuit can be assembled on a transformer
voltage exceeds 6.6 V, and T4 will con- veroboard or a breadboard or a strip-
RL1-RL4 — 12V, 300-ohm double
contact relay
duct at voltage exceeding 8.6V. Corre- board, but the best would be to use the — LED
sponding relays RL2, RL3, and RL4 PCB shown in Fig.2. The PCB lends a
will energise when T2,T3 and T4 con- lot or reliability by avoiding most ex- chances of failure due to snapping of
duct. ternal connections and thus eliminates wires.

Q. Details of the transformer are value 170V AC. We can work out
i.e From
above parameters, design
the
not mentioned in the circuit. How much the primary and secondary current rating of the transformer can be carried out
maximum load it can handle is also of the windings from the following to meet the specific power output re-
not mentioned. formulae: quirement.
— Many Readers output Power (watts)
(a) Pri. Current = (Note: The relay contact rating
A. Considering 85 per cent effi- 0.8X0.85X170 should be selected as per the primary
ciency for the transformer and a load
output Power (watts) current worked out form above for-
power factor (P.F) of 0.8, the power
(b) Sec. Currents mula).
handling capacity should be determined 0.8 X 230V
with the mains voltage at its lowest

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 83 I
 Digital Car Lock with Alarm
Amrit Bir Tiwana

^
1 \is car theft deterrent circuit locks keyword is to be entered, or has been
PARTS LIST
the starting motor until an authorised entered, the accidental pressing of any
code is recognised, and in case an at- other (wrong) key will make all efforts Sem (conductors:
tempt is made to ‘break' the lock code futile.
ICI — CD4050, hex non-
inverting buffer
an alarm sounded.
is The keypad is an ordinary 3x3 non- T1 — BC148 npn transistor
The design ensures full protection matrix keyboard, which has keys marked T2 — BC558 npn transistor
of the car against theft by allowing the one to nine out of which five are used to D1-D7 — 1N4001
car to be started only when a correct enter the code and two are dummy keys
Resistors (all 1 14V/, *5% carbon, unless
code number is entered through the which activate the alarm. The last one stated otherwise):
keypad mounted on the dashboard. If a ceases the alarm in case the user acci- R1-R6 — 10-kilohm
wrong code is entered, the car horn is dentally triggers the alarm, R7. R9.R11 — 1-kilohm

sounded as an alarm which can attract

R8 — 2.2 kilohm
The circuit, as shown in Fig. 1 is
RIO — 100-kilohm
the attention of the passers by and pruba- based on a single CMOS hex non-in-
bly the owner. In such a case, the circuit verting buffer, CD4050. Buffers ‘a’ Miscellaneous:
will simultaneously lock up the starting through V comprise the main locking
S1-S8 — Push-to-on switch

motor, to ensure that even the last

RL1, RL2 — 12V. 200-ohm relay
if circuit, while the last one works as the

•12V

Si -Sa—**uSh-to-On
MITCH
•C1MM»4060

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for digital car lock with alarm.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
l*ig. 2: Actualize PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3: Components layout for the PCB shown In Fig. 2.

alarm lately Initially, all buffer outputs even harder to ‘crack’! In case the keys the starting motor and the horn respec-
are low (except f), and when the keys not associated with the code are pressed, tively, while the complete circuit board
marked 1,3,9,4,7 are pressed in sequence, the alarm is sounded, as relay RL2 will can be mounted under the car’s dnsh-
the outputs are sequentially incremented activate the main horn. This condition board. LED 1, which indicates the
to the upper logic. They are held in this will prevent the car from being started opening of the lock, may be fixed on
state by the silicon diodes, which bias by disabling the starling motor relay the car’s front panel. The keyboard can
the input towards the output state. The RL1. This state can be reset by pressing be affixed on the dashboard itself.
starting code in this case is ‘13947’, the ’8’ key.
which can be easily altered by chang- The circuit may be assembled on a
ing the wiring sequence. The circuit piece of veroboard or on the PCB de-
will fail to trigger in case the sequence signed for the purpose, as shown in
is not followed, thus making the code Fig. 2. 'Hie relays can he mounted near

85
 0 A

AM/FM Radio Receiver using

BEL7220

T
AM/FM
he 7220 an integrated
IC designed for economical
7220 IC can be used in
operated AM/FM
battery or mains
receivers working
The functional block diagram is
volts.
shown in Fig.l. With the exception of
and high quality receivers. The BEL from a nominal voltage of 1.6 to 6 FM front end and audio output stage.

Fig. 1: Block diagram of 1C BEL 7220.

DETAILS OF COILS

Qo Turns Turns Turns Turns

Test 1.0 Co Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin C-’kt. Qtj
Description Frequency pH pF 1-3 1-2 2-3 1-3 4-6 Swg Remarks Ref.

FM HANDPASS 98 Ml Iz 7 22 Air Coic 5mm0 L9 I

FILTER
FM ANTENNA 98 MHz 5 22 Air Core 4mm L10
FM IF TRAP 10.7 MHz 11.5 27 Air Coic 5.5nim 01.11
FM OSCILLATOR 98 MHz 3 22 Air Core Smm 0 L13
FM IF INPUT 10.7MHz 2.7 82 90 12 2 45 10mm IFT L12
MW ANTENNA 1.0 MHz 120 65 7 36 On Ferrite Rod Li
SW ANTENNA 10 MHz 3.0 too 10 2 5 45 !0mm IFT Open L2
MW OSCILLATOR 1.0 MHz 140 too 75 10 45 10mm IFT L3
SW OSCILLATOR 10.0 MHz 3 85 10 5 45 10mm IFT I A
AM IF 455 kHz 640 200 115 81 63 8 45 10mm IFT L5
AM DETECTOR 455 kHz 640 200 115 81 63 8 45 10mm IFT L8
FM QUADRATURE 10.7 kHz 22 100 42 45 10mm IFF 1

FM DETECTOR 10.7 MHz 2.7 82 90 12 45 lOmni IFT L7

 PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 — BEL 7220
IC2 — BEL 1895
T1,T2 — BF 1393 transistor
T3 — BF 494B transistor
D1.D2 — SD 50F diode
D3 — IN4936 diode
D4 — BEL 106 diode

Resistors (all 1/4W, *% carbon unless

stated otherwise):
R1 — 150-ohm
R2 — 10-kilohm
R3, R6 — 8.2-kilohm
R4.R16,
R24, R30 — 330-ohm
R5 — 150-kilohm
R7 — 15-ohm
R8 — 390-ohm
R9, R29 — 100-kilohm
RIO — 56-ohm
Rll — 1-ohm
R12 — 680-ohm
R13, R21 — 3.3-kilohm
R14, R28 — 100-ohm
R15 — 4.7-kilohm
R17.R18 — 2.2-kilohm
R19 — 22-ohm
R20 — 1.2-kilohm
R22, R26 — 1-kilohm
R23 — 820-kilohm
R25 — 470-ohm
R27 — 33-kilohm
VR1 — 47-kilohm log pot with oni
off switch
VR2 — 10-kilohm linear pot

Capacitors:
Cl — 15pF ceramic
C2, C4 — 20PF+20PF
(221580710028-Philips
FM gang)
C3, C27 — 22pF ceramic
C5 — 390pF ceramic
C6, C18,
C31.C38,
C47 — lOOpF, 10V electrolytic
C7.C10 — 200pF ceramic
C8, C40 — 82pF ceramic
C9.C13 — 6.8nF ceramic
Cll — 2.2nF ceramic
C12.C19 — lOpF, 10V electrolytic
C14.C15,
Cl 7. C23,
C24, C30
C45, C46
C48 — 0.1 pF ceramic
C12.C19 — 10mF, 10V electrolytic
C20 — 150pF ceramic
C21, C25 — 470pF, 10V electrolytic
C26 — 120pF ceramic
C28, C34 — 33pF ceramic
C29, C37,
C42 — 4.7nF ceramic
C32, C39,
C41 — 6.8pF ceramic
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for AM/FM radio receiver using BCL7220. C33 — 4.7pF ceramic

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 187

 C35 — lOpF ceramic
C36 — 470pF ceramic
C43, C44,
C49, C50 — 22nF ceramic
C51, C53 — 10PF+10PF
(221580710028 Philips)
AM trimmer
C54, C52 — 7PF+7PF (221580710028
Philips) FM trimmer
C55, C56 — 330PF+330PF
(221580710028 Philips)
AM gang condensor
Miscellaneous:
S (S1..S6) — 3-way band switch
6-pole
24152724515 Philips
4-ohm loudspeaker
Loop antenna
FM telescopic antenna
10 x 135mm
(311510490300 Philips)
ferrite rod
SFE 10.7 MA (Murata)
ceramic filter

the following functions are integrated.

(a) Pre-amplifier and double bal-
anced mixer with AGC
(b) One pin local oscillator
(c) IF amplifier with internal AGC
(d) FM/IF amplifier and limiter
(e) Detector
(f) FM quadrature detector
Audio pre-amplifier
(g)
The audio power amplifier stage
makes use of IC BEL 1895. This is an
audio power amplifier IC designed
specially for radio application deliver-
ing 1W power into 4 ohms at 6V. The
output exhibits low distortion and good
noise characteristics. The schematic of
AM/FM receiver is given in Fig.2.
FM section. The FM radio section
consists of FM tuner, FM-IF amplifier,
limiter and FM detector. All these sec-
tions except the FM tuner are inte-
grated within the IC BEL 7220. The
AM/FM selection is achieved by the
selector switch. FM selection is
The
effected by applying DC voltage at pin
13 which switches the internal refer-
ence. The FM tuner covers the fre-
quency from 87 to 1 08 MHz. The three-
transistor FM front end schematic is

shown in Fig. 3. It consists of a RF

amplifier and a self-oscillating stage
followed by a buffer amplifier. The
front end transistors have been selected
to give low noise figure and the design
Fig. 3: Circuit diagram for FM front end and if stage. is stable under all conditions.

88 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 The tuned circuit at the IF input of wave frequency ranges as given below: transformer coupled to IF input at pin 5.
IC provides high selectivity to the re- MW520 kHz to 1620 kHz For higher selectivity either an ad-
ceiver. Ceramic filter can also be used SW 4.5 MHz to 16.5 MHz. ditional coil or ceramic filter can be
in place of tuned coil, and in this case, The RF amplifier stage of the IC used. The IF output available at pin 7 is
pin 16 is, biased from pin 14 by a low BEL 7220 receives the input from the detected. The capacitor at pin 6 acts as
value resistor. The 10.7 MHz IF signal secondary winding of the ferrite rod the peak envelope detector. This ca-
from the input coil is amplified and antenna coil, and SW antenna coil for pacitor not only helps to recover the
limited by the four stage differential IF the MW and SW operation respectively. audio signal but also reduces the IF
amplifier. The gain of the IF stage is The band selection is done by the band- radiation and other spurious detector
81 dB typical. switch. The RF input of IC BEL 7220 is products. The audio output is available
The FM IF output at pin 12 is ap- biased by pin 4 through antenna coil. at pin 9.

plied to the discriminator network. The Gain of the RF amplifier is about 30dB. The capacitor at pin 8 derives a
signal at pin 13 will be in quadrature The local oscillator of IC BEL 7220 mean DC signal to drive the AGC cir-
(90 degree shift) with the input is a cross coupled differential amplifier cuit. The IC has AGC range of about

signal at centrefrequency (10.7 MHz). which oscillates at the frequency deter- 90dB. The AGC action is obtained by
The linearity can be improved by using mined by the resonant circuit formed the control of the transconductance of
a double tuned network, implying lower by the oscillator coil with the gang the RF amplifier, mixer and the IF am-
distortion comparatively. However, this condensor. Transformer coupling is used plifier stages. With weak signals, the

leads to a reduction in the level of the to improve the Q factor and to obtain AGC controls the IF stage gain main-
recovered audio. A compromise be- better frequency stability of the oscilla- taining the S/N (signal-to-noise ratio)
tween the two is achieved in the circuit. tor circuit. maximum. With strong signal the gain
The audio output is available at pin 9. The mixer employed in IC BEL of IF stages reduces first and then the
The capacitor at pin 9 filters the IF 7220 is a double balanced multiplier RF stages. The detected output at pin 9
signal and also acts as de-emphasis net- type. The IF output available at pin 3 is is coupled to audio amplifier stage
work. directly connected to the IF filter coil. through a capacitor.
AM section. The AM section is de- The coil has been designed to have The most popular BEL 1895 IC is

signed to receive medium and short good selectivity. The tuned output is used as the audio power amplifier.
 '

Electronic Switch Starter

Nipun Kumar Chawda

TP his electronic switch starter S2.

provides some excellent facilities like As trans-
overload and overvoltage protections, former XI is re-
and'auto-trip. Considering its small size
and weight, as compared to that of con-
ventional starters, it is far more attrac-
K,/ quired to act
an overload
sor for the device
as

sen-

tive to use than the latter.

cal or
and
This starter has hardly any mechani-

is
moving part,

therefore very quick in sensing

unfavourable conditions for the ma-
except the relay, u some
tion has
modifica-

made in it. On the

0-6V side of the
transformer,
to be

chinery to which it is connected. It trips which acts as the

the supply on sensing overload or over- secondary side,
voltage conditions. Fig. 2: Actual-size PCIl layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 1.
one turn of
14SWG copper
Working wire is wound
12V 1N4007
For switching on the starter switch after removing
SI is pressed which energises the relay, BC147 the coil from the
thereby providing the supply to the 1N4007 6800
GND ^-VWr— 100K transformer. Its
\ u
circuitry as well as to the load con- Hr* iooja
GND
^1 . 25V ,0»*
connection is
nected to output terminals of the ciruitry. '

25V FROM made as per

2X1N4007 wir-
XI
When SI is released the relay remains 10K <
ing diagram.
12V SL100 1N4007
activated until and unless there is a The circuit is
1N4007 3 3K
change in the supply which raises the TO
RELAY
1 100K
simple and self-
voltage above the preset level adjusted T
1000m
4 explanatory. It

through presets VR1 and VR2. The 25 V 1N4007

0C147 100K
can be used for
- W
starter is switched off by pressing switch loads up to 750
Fig. 3: Components layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 2.

watts. For higher loads, values of resis-

i

01
1 N4Q07 tor R2, preset VR2 and the capacitors
need to be changed, besides modifica-
tions required in transformer XI and
wiring, and an increase in the contact
rating of the relay.

Construction
The circuit may be wired on a PCB
whose actual-size pattern and compo-
nents layout are given here. It can also
be wired on a general-purpose veroboard
04
1N4O07 with almost equal ease as the ciruit is
not so big.
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the electronic switch starter. For winding transformer X an old
1 .

9 JM ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 PARTS LIST
Sem iconductors:
T1 — SL100 npn transistor
T2-T4 — BC147 npn transistor
D1-D9 — 1N4007 silicon diode

Resistors (all 1/4W, ±5% carbon unless

stated otherwise):
R1 — l-kilohm
R2. R5, R8 — 10-kilohm
R3, R6, R7 — 100-kilohm
R4 — 3.3-kilohm
R9 — 680-ohm
VR1 — l-kilohm, wirewound
type pot.
VR2 — 10 kilohm, wirewound
type pot

Capacitors:
Cl — 10pF, 25V electrolytic
C2 — lOO^F, 25V electrolytic
Fig. 4: Wiring diagram. C3 — 1000pF, 25V electrolytic

or ‘burntout’ transformer of 300mA five turns of 18SWG wire are enough,

Miscellaneous:
rating may be procured and both its pri- while for a load of 5000 watts only one
XI — 1000 turns of 36SWG
mary and secondary windings removed. turn of 10SWG wire is required. secondary, primary:
Using 36SWG insulated copper wire (see text)

1000 turns may be wound uniformly on Setting

X2.X3 — 230V AC primary to
12V-0-12V, 300mA
the bobbin. Insulating this layer prop- For setting, both the presets arc kept secondary transformer
erly, another layer of primary coil may close to the ground (zero potential) RL1 — 100-ohm, 12V twin contact
be wound over it using a wire of appro- level and the normal 230V AC is sup- relay

priate thickness and giving appropri- plied through a variac. Preset VR1 SI — Push-to-on switch
it is
S2 — Push-to-off switch
ate number of turns as per load require- turned slowly and left at the position

ment. The primary coil is connected in where the relay just trips.
due to the heavy current that is induced
series with the load in the circuit. Next, disconnecting the variac, the
in transformer XI because of charging
However, it should be ensured that the AC mains are connected directly to the of a large capacitor in the inductive mo-
voltage developed across the secon- circuit’s input terminals and the load is
tors. If this happens frequently, replace
dary coil of 1000 turns does not exceed connected to its output terminals. Now capacitor Cl with that of a higher rat-
the voltage rating of capacitor Cl. preset VR2 is gradually turned slowly,
ing.
As an example, keeping the secon- starting from its initial ground-level
The switch may cost Rs 250 to 300
dary coil of 1000 turns, one can control position, till the relay just trips. VR2 is only to build.
loads of 200 watts to 5000 watts. Only also left permanently at this position.

the primary coil, which is in scries with Testing of the circuit may be done
Readers' Comments:
the load, has to change in accordance by connecting, a 100-watt light bulb in
use this circuit for
Is it possible to
with the load connected at the output. series with the load. Now as the current
overload protection only?
For loads between 200 and 750 watts passing through transformer XI would JYOTIRMOY DE
have increased, it
Hooghly
is sensed by the
circuit and the The author, Mr Nipun Chawda,
relay should trip, replies:

disconnecting the Regarding MrJyotirmoy’s ques-

load from the tion, this circuit can be used for over-

mains supply. load protection only by eliminating

It is noticed the overvoltage section or by keeping
that the switch the preset of overvoltage VR1 to the

trips off
ground level.
starter

I
sometimes just

after switching
on. This happens
Fig. 5: A complete view of the electronic switch starter.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 9 I
 Section B:
Circuit Ideas
 Stereo Balance Indicator
Jayakar Wilson
TJL his circuit

ampli Tiers to indicate the

can be used in

balance level
stereo equal and the voltage difference bc-
tween points A and is zero. So both
channel 1.1:1) lights up to indicate the
I 5
rise in volume level.
oFvolunte. As human car is not so much Tl and T2 remain cut-off.
transistors 1 t one wants to get a very accurate stereo
sensitive to difference in sound level. When volume in the left channel is balance indication, you can replace Tl
the circuit indicates the difference in increased, the voltage at point A also and T2 with AC 87 without altering1

sound level in any channel by means of increases. When the voltage at point A any components. As AC 1 87 is u
LED. increase by about 0.6 V more than the genniniurn transistor it requires only

Input to the circuit is taken from voltage at point I?, transistor Tl starts | 0.2 volts to conduct while silicon Iran
output terminals of each channel. The conducting and switches on the 1.1:1), sislor requires a minimum of .6 volts to
output signals are rectified by diodes driving transistor 13. Transistor T2 re- conduct.
1)1 and 1)2. and filtered by capacitors mains cut-off. But it will be very difficult to adjust
Cl and C2. A DC voltage is developed When the voltage at point U in- the balance as slight increase in any side
across the voltage dividers comprising creases by about 0.6 V more than that at will give an indication.
R1.K2 and R<), RIO. point A. transistor T2 conducts lighting Unlike mono, in stereo the music
When there is same volume in both RIGHT LLil). l eft channel LCD re-
will not be same in both the sides.
channels, voltages at points A and I i arc mains oft. In this way the respective

Readers* Comments:
The author has not mentioned the effect of ‘balance indication’ was not
current rating of the 1 2V transformer satisfactory. amplifier itself-Only the correct lim-
for the Stereo Balance Indicator cir- SAN DEEP S. iting resistors R5 and R6 have to be
cuit in Jan/92 issue! Bangalore changed to suit the voltage available.

N.G. The author, Mr Jayakar Wilson . Any small signal diode having a mini-
Calcutta replies: mum of 100mA forward current, and
Germanium diode OA91 is out of A small 100mA transformer is suffi- a reverse breakdown of 75 volta, can
production since long, and so 1 would cient for stereo balance indicator as be used. For instance, INDl, 1N457A,
like the author to suggest a suitable well as active bass and treble con- 1N485B, 1N486B, BA 155, BAX 16 etc.
substitute for it. I tried the circuit trols.For stereo balance indicator, Even an 1N4001 can be used, but it
with OA70 and 1N34 diodes but the power supply can be taken from the has poor high frequency response.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTSl 95
 Versatile Auto-cut Off Unit
V. Suresh
A
iX n auto cut-olf facility
sary for all the mains operated equip-
is neces-
'
Introduction of on-time and off-time
delays into the cut-off unit proves help- '
volts provided by R2-D5 combination.
The* other inputs are connected to pre-
ment and voltage stabilisers (automatic 1

ful under such circumstances. Such a I

sclsVRl and VR2. Preset VR] sets the
as well as manual) to switch them off I
cut-off circuit will switch-off the load I
upper cut-off level while VR2 sets the
when the voUage shoots above or falls i only when the mains voltage deviates i
lower cut-off level. If the mains volt-
below a certain safe level. The cut-off i from
•
the safe value and remains there |
age rises above the upper cut-off level
facility available in most commercial i fora few seconds. If the mains voltage |
or falls below the lower cut-off level,
stabilisers is so abrupt that they switch returns to its safe value within this time the output of the corresponding com-
|
|

off the moment the voltage goes be-

|
limit, the load will not be switched off.
j
parator and hence the voltage level at

yond a predetermined window (nor- Similar is the case when the load is point X will go low.
(

mally, 180V to 250V) and switches on , switched on. Initially, when the unit is switched
#

immediately the voltage falls within ,

The circuit diagram shown here in- on, and assuming that the mains volt-

Power
'

the calibrated range. interrup- cludes supply section (within dotted age is within the limits set by VRl and
lions are quite frequent, at times and lines). 1C1 (LM393, a dual comparator VR2, the outputs of both the compara-
the deviation of mains voltage from its 1

with open collector outputs) senses the tors will be high. So capacitor C4 will
normal safe value for a few seconds is '

voltage and IC2 (555 timer) introduces

1

start charging through R3 and 1)6. Since

also a common phenomenon. But it is ! the delay during switch-on and switch- '

during switch-on the capacitor stans

undesirable to switch off and on equip- I off. The outputs of both the compara- I charging from zero volt, the output of
mem frequently, particularly motors ! tors in 1.M393 are lied to the common I
IC2 goes to high level and the relay
and compressors which undergo greater pull-up resistor R3. 1 lencc if the output remains in the deactuatcd state. Hence
|

stress during start-up period than dur- |

of any comparator goes low then volt- the load is not switched on. When the
I

ing their run time. Hence, it is highly i

age at point X will also be low.
|
voltage across he capacitor crosses
t 2/3
desirable to keep the switching on and :
One input of each comparator is Vcc. the output of IC2 goes to low
|

off processes down to the minimum. connected to reference voltage

w of 3.3 i level, the relay gets actuated and switches

rli
6V
1000
DPDT
RELAY

96 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
on the load. This constitutes the power- Vcc charge transistor in IC2 is cut-off) after
6V
on delay and is about 1 0 seconds for the few cycles of such fluctuation the volt-
R3
values shown. I 1 0OK age across ('4 would reach 2/3 Vcc and
same lime pin 7 of 1C2 is
At the r 06 the load will be switched on —deviat-
grounded by the internal transistor of . 1N4001 ing from the standards set!
IC2. Now capacitor (’4 is discharged liven though the probability of such
by the parallel combination of R4 and C4 a continued fluctuation is very low, si ill
05
lOOv*
R5. but at the same time it is being
16V
220* the circuit can be made fool-proof by
charged by R3. Ilie overall combina- adding one transistor and two resistors
tion of R3, 1)6. R4 and R5 is selected as shown in l
;
ig. 3. livery time the load
(see Rg. 2) in such a way that the volt- is off, base of T2 is held high.
age across the capacitor is maintained Fij;. Steady state condition of C4.
above 1/2 Vec (say V). ITns is the the circuit. Hut before the voltage
steady-state condition. across (
'4 reaches 2/3 Vcc, if the mains
voltage goes out of the window, then TO PIN 3
If the mains voltage shoots above OF IC2
the level set by VR
below the 1 or falls charging of C4 is slopped and the load
level set by VR2 the output of the cor- is not switched on. And C4 slowly
responding comparator and hence the discharges through R4.
voltage level at point X will go low. Now consider a peculiar case. If

Now diode 1)6 being reverse biased mains voltage fluctuates in such a way Fig. 3: Fool-proof circuit (setr text).

isolates points X and Y. I lenco there is that it is within the window defined by Whenever the mains voltage goes
no charging path for (’4 and it dis- VR 1 and VR2
few seconds andfor a out of the window, em ittcr of T2( which
charges through the parallel combina- outside the window for a few seconds, is connected to [x>int X) is also grounded,

tion of R4 and R5. When voltage both lime durations being less than the thereby discharging C4 fully. Hence
across the capacitor goes below 1/3 delay imroudeed in the circuit, and mains voltage is to be within the limits
Vcc the output of IC2 will go high, such a fluctuation continues for a cer- set by VR1 and VR2 anti should ream in

switching off the load. At the same tain duration, say a few minutes. (Such there for atleast 1 seconds for the load

time the internal discharge transistor in a behaviour of course has a very low to be switched on. Once the load is on,

1C2 is cut-off. (Now theonly discharge probability of occurence.) According the base of T2 is held low and has no
path forC4 is the high valued R4.) The to the standards set for this cut-out effect on the behaviour of the circuit.

time taken by the voltage across ('4 to circuit, discussed so far. during such a With the addition of T2. R6and R7, of
fall from V (its steady-state value) to behaviour of mains voltage the load course R4 can be om it ted and Ihc value
13 Vcc is the delay introduced by the should not be switched off if it is in on of KS reduced lo 180k.
circuit to switch off the load after sens- and vice versa. To set the presets VR1 and VR2,
ing an error in mains voltage. After detecting a deviation in the apply mains voltage to the circuit through

If at any time before the load is mains voltage, to switch off the load, a variac. Set the mains voltage to the

switched off the mains voltage returns the circuit calculates the lime by dis- upper cut-off level. Adjust VR iso that
to its normal value, charging process of charging C4. and by charging it to voltage at its variable pin is 3.3 volts.

C4 through U3 and 1)6 is again started. switch on the load when the mains Now set the mains voltage to the lower

Andsince the resistance in the charging voltage returns to its normal value. cut-off level anti adjust VR2 so that

path is lower than that in the discharge Always the resistance in the charging voltage at its variable pin is also 3.3

path, the voltage across C4 is taken to path is lower than that in the discharge volts. Ihc circuit is ready.
its steady-state value of V without much path. Hence when the load is on and The circuit can be constructed eas-
delay and the load is not unnecessarily mains voltage fluctuates as seen above, ily on a general-purpose strip board. It
( '4
switched off. since is replenished at a faster rate, can be used cither independently as an
I

When mains voltage returns to its voltage across it will not go below 1/3 auto cut-off unit or as an add-on to an
normal value alter the load has been Vcc and the load will not be switched existing voltage stabiliser. Unsure that

switched off. capacitor ( '4 starts charg- off conforming to the standards set
- the contact rating of the relay suits the

ing through R3, and once the voltage .

earlier. But if the load is off, and mains particular load in operation. The delay
across it reaches 2/3 Vcc. the output of voltage fluctuates as seen above, be- time introduced by the circuit, both
1(3 goes low, actuating the relay, thereby
cause of the same reason that C4 is during switch-on and switch-off, can
switching on the load and returning the charged faster than it is discharged (now be varied by changing Ihc value of C4.
circuit to its steady state. Again, the the resistance in the discharge path Reducing the value of C4 reduces the
time taken by the voltage across C’4 to would be the high valued R4, since K5 time delay and vice versa.
reach 2/3 Vcc is the delay introduced in is isolated because the internal dis-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IEBI

 be connected to the N/C contacts of
the relay. It should be possible to
Readers' Comments: control the operating coil of a 3-phase
contactor through the relay.
Whenever an IC is said to have an
I found the ‘Versatile Auto Cut-off
Unit’ in EFY Jan. *92 issue very inter-
open collector output it means that
the corresponding output comes from
esting and useful. The author is re-
quested to suggest the unit without an internal transistor's collector that

the time-delay switch-on and switch* is uncommitted internally, i.e. no pull-

off circuit. What will be the connec- up circuits are there internally for the

tions of relay in that case? Can this

output transistor’s collector. This is
circuit be used in a 3-phase system to shown in Fig.2. In such cases, a number
of these outputs could be tied together
cut-off over/under voltage and over
voltage through a 3-phase contractor and, by adding an external pull-up
resistor, could be used for wired-OR
and controlling the operating coil
wired-AND) functions.
(actually
through the relay?
Also clarify the IC LM393, a dual The method described to set VR1
comparator with open collector out- and VR2 is the simplest and ideal.
put.
any other method
Is there to set
the VR1 and VR2?
G.D. RAJPAL1
Ghaziabad
The author, Mr V. Suresh, replies:
The circuit diagram without time-de-
lay is shown in Fig. 1. The load should

Staircase Liaht Switch

K.M. Reddy

T JL his circuit may be used where ii

necessary lo control a single light or
is the conventional electrical circuit.
An I .LI) may also be added next to
flops. IC?

multivibrator
1 a is wired as a monostable
which supplies a 0.5 sec-
device by switches that are situated at each switch to indicate whether the ond pulse whenever any of the pushbut-
different places. The control of a stair- light is on or off. This feature can he tons are pressed. These pulses clock
case light is one of the applications of useful when the light is far from the the D-lype flip-flop which divides by
this circuit. This circuit can also be switch and cannot be seen easily. If two. ITic first pulse will make the

used to control an outdoor light using I ,LI)s arc used for indication, however, oulput of the flip-flop high while the

switches that are situated both inside another wire has to be used along with next time the pushbutton is pressed, the

and outside the house. the two wires used for connecting the oulput will go low.
Any number of switches may be switches to the circuit. Hie output of the flip-flop is con-
connected to this circuit. As the switches The circuit is based on two low- nected to a transistor which drives a
arc wired in parallel, the wiring can be power Schottky ICs. IC1 is a dual non- relay. The relay controls the load which
done using a 2-wirc system. This cir- rct rigger able monostable multivibrator may be a light or any other electrical
cuit has simpler wiring as compared lo while 1C2 contains two l)-iypc flip- appliance. The rcaly contacts should

98 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
|
 !

Si SM POSH.TO OM
swi rocs

31 S?J SrJ
J

€ H

—
H;
-----

of convent ional design and consists of a

they may be used in a similar circuit to
x -aicd higher than the load current. ,

control a different load.

A transistor controls tlx; 1 J;l>» which transform er, bridge rectifier and ca-
'Hie circuit being simple can he
uc used for indication. If the 1 JHDsarc pacitor. A regulator is used to derive a •

made on a .general-purpose PCI3.

x>t required, they need not be included 5 V supply which is needed for the IC's.
j

in he circuit. Since 1C1 and 1C2 contain an unused [

The power supply for the circuit is monosiablc and flip-flop respectively,

Readers’ < omments:

The ‘Staircase Light. Switch’ circuit in stand this. transistors need to be added as the
[

EFY Jan. ’92 issue is complicated and AH LEDs are connected in parallel
1
ICs 74LS74 and 7-1 LS 221 contain two
costly too as it needs two ICs and and the input to LED driven transis-
' flip flops and two monostable mul-

separate power supplies. I have made taken from a single point ofIC‘2.
i tor is tivibrators respectively. More impor-
such a bistable multivibrator using a So the idea of separate LED indica-
i
tantly. in my circuit there is effective
CD4017 decade counter which is tions on pressing of input switches is debouncing of the switches.
working very well. The circuit is very absolutely foolish! 1 I would like to advise Mr Pradeep
j

simple. PRADEEP G. to read the article carefully and try to

ABSHISHEK PANDEY ;
Allappey understand the circuit. This “foolish”
Indore The author, Mr K.M. Reddy, replica: LED is most suitable in remote switch-
j Your above-mentioned circuit may !
I would like to thank Mr Ranieshwar ing where one cannot easily ascertain
be very useful but it involves exces- !
and Mr Pandey for their interest in whether the load is ‘on’ or ‘otT. Tran-
sivehardware and also requires a 5V my circuit I agree with them
fully sistor BC147 can easily handle 5 to 7
regulated power supply. that my circuit is more expensive. LEDs, and the output of the JC can
RAMESHWAR |
However, my circuit will prove to be drive the transistor.
I tarsi (UP) I more economical when two such
j In the above circuit idea LED1 to switches are needed. In that case only
LKDN have been shown. I can’t under- some passive components and two

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 199

 Wireless Recording
Gupta
c
\JT cnerally, recording from tape to
tape is done with the help of a lead,
For such recording from any source
of sound, the sensor is placed near the
triad disturbances
The circuit
is
R.K.

done.
works with two pencil
which is often associated with electri- speaker and the earphone pin is in- cellswhich last quite some lime due to
cal noises. To avoid this, inductive serted into the external mike jack of low consumption of power. The sensor
recording is done, which is superior tape recorder, which is set into the re- is home-made by winding 24SWG
as compared to direct electrical cording mode. In this way. recording enamelled aipper wire on the whole
recording. free from surrounding noises and elec- length of a flat ferrite rod (used with
FLAT
FERRITE
antenna coil in a pocket radio set). The
sensor is placed near the speaker and
the jack is inserted into the tape re-

corder’s socket in recording mode. ITic

volume of voices being recorded is

adjusted to give distortionless record-

ing.

This circuit can also be used for

tape recording 2 -way coversation going
on a telephone.

Readers’ Comments:
tional not only to the current in voice ing out the theoretical error in my cir-
The circuit of ‘Wireless Recording’ in coilbut also to the mutual inductance cuit. I found the electrical recording
EFY Jan. ’92 issue does not serve the
with the voice coil, which changes associated with noise. To eliminate
very purpose of its design! Its quality non-linearly with the movement of that I started using this device. By
of recording can never be equal to that voice coil. The frequency distortion adjusting the volume of the recording
of ‘with-cord’ recording. arises as a consequence of the fre- material I have been getting good
magnetic stray disturbances
First, quency-dependent nature of the results for my personal tape record-
are more probable than electrical dis- speaker. ing.
turbances. Besides, there will be a T.S. SHANKAR The mutual inductance associated
high degree of non-linear distortion Hyderabad with sensor and voice coil is very neg-
and frequency distortion, as the volt- The author, Mr R.K. Gupta, replies: ligible. So the second effect mentioned
age induced in the sensor is propor- I am thankful to Mr Shankar for point- by Mr Shankar is negligible.

A Versatile Decibel Meter

T.S. Shankar

2
A
_ \. decibel meter is an instrument cation of decibel meters are audio level The circuit shown here provides a reso-
indiaitors, record level indicators, spec- lution of 20 steps. Although the steps
to measure levels of input signal(s) in
trum analysers and the like. are linear, they are calibrated with cor-
decibel units. The main areas of appli-

1001 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 —

from pin 7 of IC1. The divider’s lower

end is also raised to 1.25V so that
signals above 1.25V are handled by
IC2. The voltage at pin 7 of I C2 is now
2.5 V and is given to pin 6 of IC2 to fix

the divider's higher end of IC2 to 2.5 V.

The circuit as a whole has 20 com-
parators, each with a reference voltage
of 0.125 V. The output can be selected
to bar or dot mode by applying high or
low logic respectively to pin 9.
The circuit can be used for any
range. The range can be obtained by at-
tenuating the input signal accordingly.

esponding decibel value so that it suits reference preset input. The outputs are Otherwise, a multi-way switch can be

lost of the requirements. active low, and the current at the out- used to select the range which switches
The circuit is shown in Fig. 2. It is puts can be determined by a load resis- over to different potentiometers, that
ted on IC LM3914 integrated circuit tor connected 7 and ground. IC
to pin were preset for different ranges.

mended for bar graph generator cir- 1 ,M391 4 has two modes of operation
'ITie unit Bel or Decibel is only a
— which can be
|

cirits. The IC has 11 op-amps, out of bar mode and dot mode two quantities such as voltage
ratio of

which one is used for buffering the selected by applying appropriate logic or power and is not an absolute value.

input and the rest as comparators. The at its pin 9. Whenever a quantity is expressed in

inverting inputs of all the comparators line circuit incorporates two I M3914 decibels, it should also provide a refer-
-e tied together and linked to output of ICs for obtaining 20 steps. One more IC ence level to which the quantity is re-

he buffer op-amp, inside the chip. The may be cascaded to obtain 30 steps. But ferred to.

these ladders are available externally at 4) is grounded so that the lowest levels where P2 is the power in question and
pins 4 and 6. The IC incorporates a of input signals arc detected linearly. PI is the power to which P2 is referred
stable reference voltage at pin 7. This The divider’s higher end (pin 6) is to Voltage in dB = 20 log (V2/V1)
reference output can be elevated by given a reference voltage of 1.25V
1N4148
raising the voltage at pin 8, which is the obtained from pin 7. So each compara-
tor switches at steps of 0.125 V of the
input signal. The load resistors R2 and
R3 each of 1.5k limit the current through
each LED to 12 mA.
The reference voltage of IC2 is made
2.5 V by raising pin 8 to 1.25 V obtained
Fig. 3: Divider network Fig. 4: Circuit for audio application.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS MU
where V2 is the voltage in question and 0 dB in this circuit. The decibel values ter as shown in Fig. 3. The choice of

VI is the voltage to which V2 is re- for other LEDs can be calculated by the VR1 depends upon the input imped-

ferred to. formula ance required.

most cases, a power of lmW dis-
In dB = 20 log (n x 0.125/0.77459) For using the circuit in tape decks,

sipated in 600 ohms resistor is taken as where n is the number of the particular a well calibrated equipment should be
reference. That corresponds to a volt- LED. available for precalibration of the cir-

age level of 0.7745 volt. This means To change the above values to suit cuit.

that 0.7745 volts is taken as 0 dB. As someone’s requirement, divide the in-

such, the sixth LED corresponds to coming voltage through a potentiome-

Sound Operated Musical Bell

Narpat Singh Ranc

S; ometimes
k-J ringing the bell manu- C operation. Every sound causes trig- gap of about half second and they stan
ally becomes difficult, especially when gcring at pin 2 of 555 timer. again. Transistor SHOO cm be replace* 1

you are holding something in your hands. When VR1 is at maximum, (he by transistor BI) 115:
This sound-operated musical bell takes •
hold-on time of 555 is around 30 sec- When the condenser mic. receives

care of the problem. onds. But this time period can be set to the sound of a clap, the timer is trig
In this circuit, the use of an external a lower value by VR1, as per require- gered and the output at pin 3 of IC 55:
relay has been eliminated. The circuit ment, using the relationship: goes high which gets applied through
comprises a trigger stage (around T= 1.1 x VR1 x Cl diode 1N4001 to pin 2 of musical 1C
BC548B), a timer stage (around NE555) where VR1 is the actual resistance of UM66. As UM66 gets the positive
and a melody s'agc (around UM66 and the preset in circuit. UM66IChasROM supply, it starts giving electrical flue
SL100). memory of 64 notes which arc pro- tuations of the music to the base of
Transistor BC548B is biased in class- duced one by one and then over with a SL100. and a charming music domes
 out iit i he 4 ohm speaker. 'Hie music The value of resistance R2 is 270- The speaker should he kept away
slops after the completion, as per time kilohm for 3V supply anil 470-kilohm from the condenser mic. to prevent
setting of timer 555. for 4.5V' lo 6V supply. false triggering.

Readers’ Comments:
In EFY Jan.’92 a circuit
issue there is warrant its publication.
this circuit to 1 sound produced by mouth would also
for ‘Sound Operated Musical Bell’ Almost any sound, such as a log drop- activate the bell It appears that the
which, the author says, is very useful ping, a coconut falling (or a dog bark- reader is laying too much stress on
when we are holdingsomething in our ing) can trigger this circuit, causing theory but if he tries the circuit he
hands and cannot reach for the door- undue annoyance to the user. would be able to appreciate it better.
bell. But later he says that this bell
AMEET K. HINGORANI The bell can even be installed in (or
can be activated by a clap. Now if the
Secunderabad near) a safe as a burglar alarm, and
hands are free for clapping, we can as The author, Mr Narpat Singh Rana,
j perhaps lot more applications can be
well reach for the doorbell. replies: found.
Secondly, there is no novelty in If one is holding something
I
in hands.

Fuzz Effect Box For Guitarists

T he ‘buzz' sound
dipping the input waveform, thereby
is derived by
Venkateshwaran G.

enriching ihc signal with odd harmon-

ics which provide the harsh sound. This
circuit produces a luzz which gradu-
ally decays into a ‘clean signal*.
I he circuit uses the standard op-
amp 741 in non-inverting configura-
tion. The gain of this amplifier is
controlled by the feedback network
comprising VRI, R2 and R3.
Input signal from the guitar passes
to the op-amp through DC Mocking ca-
pacitor Cl. Resistor K1 sets the input
impedance at 1 00k, which suits most
guitars. Resulting signals from the op-
amp arc reduced in amplitude by the
potential divide action of Rf> and R7,
giving an attenuation factor of approxi- ra.lv lo zero. by coupling to the bypass
is ‘on* it

maiely four. Thusihc maximum output A fool-switch may he used to by- switch suitably
w

signal v ia capacitor (
’3 available for in- pass the signa I w henever required. The This unit is powered by <SV 1*1*3

puttingtoan amplifier is about l50mV. whole circuit can he assembled on a battery.

I his level is maintained during the pericxl general-purpose 1111. A red I LI) can
of cl ippi ng { fuzz ) and hen decay s nat u
t
-
be used to indicate that the ‘Fuzz Effect' :

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1103

 Video Distribution Amplifier
C. Sanjay

T A. his video distribution amplifier en-

ables four video recorders or four TVs
provided is about 5 times which should
be more than sufficient to compensate
consisting of transistor T1 and T2 where
T2 serves as a current source for T1 As .

tobe connected to the output of one for cable losses and loading losses. the working current of T1 and T2 is set
VCR or VCP. This situation is likely to IC1 is the popular 733 which is a to 100 mA, both the transistors need

IC2
7805 1

^iom O.lu
16V
b T1
BD139
0.1m
/o^ 10 9°\ ) 470m
(02
80 16V 150Q OUTPUT
7 2 X 1N4002
\ o
\o3 6 > 2200m XI
ioo M 0.1m 1500 25V 230V AC PRI. TO
16V 220m 9V-0-9V-AC
TOP VIEW OF 16V
OUTPUT, 200mA SECONDARY
0.1m 470m 150Q
1C 733 METAL TRANSFORMER
VIDEO
INPUT
CAN PACKAGE -rlH- —AW— A
0.1 M 150Q
J 1
0.1m
on*
IC1 1 d7n. a ... r\t 1 mi itT

733
4700 0.1m 1500

470m 1500 OUTPUT

16 V.

1500 2200m
0.1m
25V
0.1m

3300

IBD139
1N4148 0.1m 2 X 1N4002

100m
16V 680
2
1N4148. IC3
NOTE:- 1. TRANSISTOR T1 AND T2 FITTED WITH HEATSINK 7905
2. 0.1 mF CAPACITOR PLACED NEAR TRANSISTOR AND 1C
arise when copies of video cassettes are simple single-chip amplifier for up to heatsinks. The resistor networks at the
J

required and several machines have to 20 MHz. In the present circuit, how- outputs serve as impedance matching
be used at the same time. This circuit ever, it is used only for up to 10 MHz. networks if long coaxial cables are used.
can be used as a distribution amplifier (Video bandwidth is only about 5 MHz 'Hie power supply must be regulated at
not only for VCRs and VCPs but also max.) VR1 at the input allows to set the 5 V. A simple means of achieving this
for distributing any other signal with a amplification to some extent. The out- would be to use two regulators as shown
bandwidth of about 10 MHz. The gain put of the amplifier is fed to the buffer in the circuit diagram.

Low-Cost Musical Horn

Pradeep G.

^ he
musical horn
circuit described here for a

is very simple. It needs

j
very few components.
constructed on a small size
It can be easily
PCB. Here !
the music generator is UM66IC. It has
the size and shape of a tiny silicon tran-

mil l ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 A simple regulated 3V supply is

used for ICl. As power supply can be

varied from 6 to 12 volts, this horn can
be used with cars, scooters or even as a
musical door-bell. Don’t forget to use a
bridge rectifier or four diodes when this
circuit is used with scooters because it

has an AC supply.The output can be

changed w'ith volume control VR1.
UM66 1C costs around Rs 8 while
LM386 costs around Rs 13.
(Prototype has been successfully
or. The amplifier stage is built around |
It needs very few external components. tested with a 6 to 12V variable battery
'
'Wi IC. It is a small 8-pin D1L IC. I It can give 1-wau power at 12V supply. eliminator.)

The author, Mr Pradeep G., replies: used, the supply voltage should not
j

puders’ Comments: The pin configuration of IC UM66 is ,

exceed 9 volts. Though it can be
shown here. UM66-T01L generates (

author of the circuit for ’Low Cost popular jingle bell sound. But
’

Musical Horn’ may please explain UM66-T19L has a different music |

°w he has numbered the pins of IC programmed into it which like more.

I
1

M66 which has just three legs like There is no direct substitute for ,M38fi.
1

hat ot a transistor. Moreover, are But theentire amplifier circuit can be '

her** any substitutes for the LM386? replaced with a general-purpose power
A A. KHAN amplifier using LM380. BEL1895. ' connected to a 12V battery using a
Shillong TBA810 etc. If BEL1895 amplifier is I
7809 regulator.

len Channel Sequential Lighting

For Cars
B. Jaya Prakash
T* circuit
lashing light effect
presented here gives a
from left to right
i
and then from right to left.
generates clock pulses for IC2. 'Hie
ICl (555) I outpuLs using rectifiers produce ihe cfTect
!

of hulhs flashing from left to right.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1105

 As the carry output pin 1 2 of IC2 is amplified to the proper level so that open collector output.
|

connected to the clock input of IC3, the I

1 2 V lamps glow with sufficient bright- ,
The whole unit can be easily as-
bulbs which are connected to IC5 also ness. 1

semblcd on a veroboard. The power

j

start flashing from right to left. ,

The amplifier is built around two I
supply for the gadget can be derived
As these outputs are not capable of
1

ULN2004 ICs. The IC consists of seven from the car battery itself.
I

handling large currents, they have to be !

darlington stages, each of which has an

Convertion of DMM Into

Frequency Counter
Bharat D. Mehta

T measure the frequency of cir-

cuits, one requires a frequency counter
digital multimeter’s
we
DC voltage range
can measure frequency up to IOC)
higher
ADVFC32
frcqencies
etc but it
like AD650.
requires special
which is quite expensive. The circuit kHz. care for their operation at higher fre-
given here will serve as an alternative There are many more chips avail- quencies.
counter of low cost. By using a normal able. using those, one can measure even The circuit shown in the figure con-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 grator becomes an average 1 X ! voltage
corresponding to the applied frequency,
i.e.0-100 kHz which corresponds to
0-10V DC.’ at output and will be meas-
ured on dicital
W multimeter.
can go upto 100 kHz with chang-
It

ing the values of resistors

and capaci-
tors.

1 Icrc the frequency of different wave-

shapes can be measured but the slewing
edge of the wave should be fast and
the input pulse must be large enough
to trigger the input comparator. All
resistors are of ±5%, 0.33W. unless
otherwise specified, and R5 preset
verb inpul frequency imo IX.' voltage a charge into an integrator built exter- trims the tolerances of the components
and measures it. The heart of the circuit nally with resistance R5 and capacitor used. Initially calibration must be
is I.M331 (voltage to frequency and C3. done.
frequency to voltage converter), and
The average current flowing out of The components R7 and C2 should
this chip includes comparator, mon- be used stable with low temperature
pin No. 1 is
oshot and current source. The differen- and R5 preset trims out the
l (ave) = (i x (1.1 x C2) x freq.| coefficient
ciated frequency at pin 6 triggers mon-
tolerances of all the components
oshot inside the 1C. Monoshot will supply 1'hus the voltage developed at inte-
Initially calibration must be done.

Auto Power Off for Motor Pumps

Sunish Issac

M
trollers

controller is
my circuits of
have appeared
used in
water level con-
in liFY. If such a

a low voltage area,

ture will not rotate, resulting in a burnt
coil. In such a case, an auto power off
may be better, as one gets the chance to
thermal overload protection. (Starter
used in

This circuit
prototype is

is
of ESCOI, make.)
far more superior

it will be of no use because the motor check the mains voltage. This circuit is than the usual water level controller
won’t be switched on automatically. intended to be used with a motor fitted circuits. There is no problem as far as

Even if it gets switched on, the arma- with D O L. (direct-on-line) starter with voltage is concerned and full protection

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS MSI

 with the darlington pair consisting of
transistors SI . I ()0 and 2N3055. he 00-
'I 1

kilohm preset is to he set such that the

I
relay gets activated when there is water
in between. In the ‘on’ condition the
circuit as well as the motor get supply
through the normally-closed contacts
I
of the relay, which is connected to the
starter. The relay gets activated when
water reaches the preset level, discon-
necting the supply to the starter, and
thus the motor is switched off.
(

The can he assembled on a

circuit
general-purpose PCB. The relay, PCB
to the motor is ensured by the use of 1

the wiring to the tank. If there a mains

is and the transformer can he fitted in a
starter. Supply to the circuit takes place failure while the motor
I

is on, and if the suitable enclosure which may be

only when the motor is on, making it supply is restored later, the starter will
|
mounted on tlx; switchboard of the starter.
totally safe. Another advantage of us- he in the off state. This fact is utilised in
|

The wires from the lank and the PCB

ing the auto power off circuit is that one designing this simple circuit, must he well insulated for safety.
can manually switch off the motor even When there is water between the
if there is any problem in the circuit or i
points A and B, the relay gets activated

Beeper cum Visual Indicator

Nag Raj Kaul

3V TO 12V ak

11 ere is a simple circuit of Beeper

Cum Visual Indicator. This circuit has
tremendous potential for use in elec-
tronics, electrical and automobile in-
dustries. ITic circuit is wired around
NE555 ICs. The two ICs are connected
in an astable mode configuration.

When SI (push-to-on switch) is

pressed, a supply of (6V to 12V acti-

vates the circuit. Then frequency pro-
duced by IC1 is controlled by the fixed
value capacitor Cl. The output is ob-
tained from pin 3 of IC1 and the input
is fed to IC2 at pin 4. At the same time,
input pulses are fed to transistor T1 (a
voltage amplifier transistor) through
resistor R4. The resistor R1 is con-
nected to the base of T2 (SKI 00)
which works as a switching transistor.
IC2 is given to the base of SL100B beeping sound time interval and the
An LHD is connected to the collector which is used as a power amplifier tran- time period of LHD is set by capacitor
of transistor T2 and grounded through a sistor. An 8-ohm speaker is connected at Cl.
330Q resistor. The output from pin 3 of the output as shown in the circuit. The When output obtained from pin 3 of

min i ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

IC1 is fed to Tl, the visual indicator ance, the circuit should be operated 3V to 12V DC bulb after eliminating
lights up with each beep having the with dry batteries or fully rectified DC resistor R7. The entire circuit costs

same time period. For better perform- supply. We can replace the LED with a around Rs 50.

Electronic Washing Machine

Control
T.S. Shankar

owadays, commercially available be extended to any length of time by cate clothes. During ‘strong’ washing,
washing machines are provided with merely changing a capacitor. The cir- the impeller rotates in one direction
features like auto-off timer, reversible cuit has switching circuitswhich run only with five seconds pause after ev-
impeller etc. Most of them have me- the impeller in one direction for 25 ery 25 seconds.
chanical timers, reversers etc. Some seconds, stop the motor for five sec- Anotherswitch is provided to select
are equipped with electronic timers. onds, run the impeller in reverse direc- the ‘continuous’ facility. In this mode,
But they are very expensive and out of tion for 25 seconds and stop the motor the impeller rotates in one direction
reach of the average consumer. for five seconds. This cycle repeats only continuously. This mode is suit-

Keeping this in view, have de- 1 until the time set in the timer has elapsed. able for blankets, rugs etc.
signed an electronic washing machine An optional switch is provided to Before coming to the working of
control circuit. The circuit provides all select normal/strong washes. During the circuit I would like to explain the
the facilities provided by reputed com- ‘normal’ washing, the impeller rotates principle of operation of motors. Wash-
panies and even more. The circuit has a in both directions alternatively with ing machines are driven by universal or
timer circuit which can be set to any five seconds gap between reversals. induction motors. Induction motors are
duration from 0 to 15 minutes and can This type of wash is suitable for deli- more suitable for washing machines

D17 D18
1N4001. 1N4001

+ C7

220V AC PRIMARY TO
9V-0-9V 500mA SEC
TRANSFORMER^ V
250V
ON/OFF
SWITCH

VR1 R4
1M IOOK
UN

R5 <
S4
4.7K >
«
PUSH-TO-ON
SWITCH
(RESET)

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1109

than universal motors, and hence arc the supply directly and the other to the and during that period transistors '13
j

used by most of the reputed companies. supply through a capacitor. The capaci- and T2 arc off and the relays arc also
The induction motor runs on the tor draws large leading current which is off, disabling the motor. During counts
principle of electromagnetic induction. 90° out of phase with the voltage. Due from second to fifth pulses T3 is on and
Primarily induction motors are 3-phase to this a rotating flux is produced and J
T2 is off. The motor runs in one dircc-
type. They consist of a stator with 3- thc motor starts up. By interchanging ! tion for four clock pulses. During sixth
phase winding. The stator produces the winding, we have achieved reversal pulse, once again T3 and T2 arc off and
rotating magnetic field and induces of motor, as interchanging the winding the motorstops. Duringscventh to tenth
strong currents in rotor windings which causes reversal of flux rotation. Note pulses. T3 and T2 are on and the motor
;

arc short circuited. The rotor opposes that ordinary induction motors have ;
runsinoppositedirectionduetoswitch-
the rotation of magnetic flux (Lenz’s unidentical windings for main and ing of winding by relay RL1 contacts,
law) and hence tries tocatch up with the auxiliary windings. Such motors can- The timer is based on IC2 CD4060
stator rotating flux. As a result, the not be reversed by this method. Only which is a divide by 16384 counter,
motor starts rotating, thus producing reversible motors can be reversed this The timer can be set by 1M potenti-
rotor torque. An induction motor has way. omcier. After the set-time Tl switches
constant speed, variable torque charac- The heart of the circuit is 103 which T2 and 13 off. thus disabling the motor,
teristics, which makes it suitable for is a CMOS
decade counter cum de- Ihc4060canbcresctby the push -to-on
washing machines. coder. The IC provides ten outputs which switch provided,
As washing machine is a household go high one at a time for every clock Capacitor C4 is a starting capacitor
appliance, usinga 3-phasc motor would pulse applied at pin 14. The clock pulses already fixed to the motor. Relays RL1
be cumbersome. A single-phase induc- arc obtained by IC1 NE555 wired in as and RL2 arc 6V, l<X)-ohm. 6A rated
tion motor is used in place of 3-phasc table multivibrator mode. The second, relays.
induction motor. Single-phase induc- third, fourth and fifth outputs are OR’cd The circuit can be assembled on
tion motors arc not self-starting due to by four 1N4 148 diodes. Similarly, the general-purpose PCB. Mains wiring
their single-phase nature. As such they and 9th to 10th outputs arc
7th, 8th should be made with high current
are made self-starting by making them OR’cd by four 1N4148 diodes. The stranded copper wire. The circuit be ing
2-phasc motors virtually. Single-phase first and sixth outputs arc left unused, fairly simple docs not pose any prob-
induction motors are provided with two Whcn IC 4017 starts counting, the 1cm.
windings, one of which is connected to first pulse is not received by any diode.

Readers’ Comments:
‘Electronic Washing Machine Con-
trol’ circuit in EFY March ’92 issue
was fantastic! I had been waiting for
such a circuit.
When we close switch S2 for a
continuous wash, relay RL2 gets
activated and remains in that state.
Ifswitch Sla is open, whenever pins
4, 7, 10 and 2 of IC3 go ‘high’, relay
RL1 is and changes the
activated
direction of rotation. But even when
Sla is closed, whenever the outputs
ofpins3and 1 (not shown connected)
of IC3 go ‘high’, relay RL1 is deacti-
vated, while it remains activated at
the other output state. So the motor Modified part of the timer for washing machine.
changes its direction of rotation to contacts of the relay which be connected to the anode of Dll.
is to be I

without any intermediate off state. controlled by IC2 or any other timer. Otherwise, the motor would rotate
Thus the motor would get damaged DINESH KUMAR D. improperly.
faster in sucha continuous wash mode.
Kasaragod JAGDISH MAHENDRA KOTHARI
I have modified the circuit,
using Thecircuitneedsa little correction. Bombay
triacs, to make a timer without any
Switch Si’s right hand side pole is The author, Mr T.S.Shanker, replies:
moving parts. Pin 12 of IC3 can be connected correctly but its left hand I’m thankful to the readers for point-
connected to another timer for con- pole should not have been shown ingout the error. Mr Dinesh Kumar’s
trolling the entire circuit. connected to the cathodes of diodes TRIAC circuit is appreciated.
Anodes of the triacs are connected DIO and Dll. This pole should in fact

liUl ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

l
 Triangular Waveform Generator
M.S. Nagaraj

M.
erators
ost triangular waveform gen-
of op-amp integrator-compara-
functioning as a comparator is high, the
analogue multiplexer routes the two
Vmax
where
= Vmin + (V1/RC2)
R = VR3+R5
.tl

tor when
type have the disadvantage that reference voltages to the inputs of the Therefore
the peak values of the generated waves op-amp IC2a functioning as a differen- tl = Vmax -Vmin RC2/V1
.

are changed, the frequencies also diange. tial amplifier whose output is But the output of differential ampli-
Here is a circuit of a triangular wave- VI = -(Vmax-Vmin). This voltage is fier isVI = (Vmax - Vmin)
form generator (Fig. 1) with maximum integrated by the integrator circuit con- Therefore tl = RC2.

T o

Fig. 1

Vdd +5V sisting of VR3, R5, C2 and op-amp IC During the time period t2, the inte-
Vmax 2b. When the ramp having a positive grator output changes from the initial

slope at the integrator output exceeds value Vmax to the final value Vmin.

Vmin
the level Vmax, the comparator output Therefore
I*-
tl -4*- 12 -»|
goes negative. Now the analogue multi- Vmin = Vmax - (V1/RC2) .t2
0
plexer routes the reference voltages Therefore
such that VI = (Vmax-Vmin). The inte- t2= (Vmax - Vmin) .RC2/2
Fig. 2 grator generates a ramp with negative Again VI = (Vmax - Vmin)
peak level (Vmax) and minimum peak slope. When the integrator output goes Therefore t2 = RC2
level (Vmin). lire frequency of oscilla- below Vmin, the comparator output
goes positive and the entire cycle re- Thus the period of oscillation T =
tions can be independently varied by
1 1 +t2 = 2RC2 and is independent of the
controls VR1, VR2 and VR3. The cir- peats. Op-amp IC 2c buffers the inte-
peak values set. For the component
cuit is built around quad op-amp IC grator output.
During the time period tl, the inte- values shown in the circuit, the fre-
TL084 and analogue multiplexer IC
grator output changes from the initial quency can be varied between 50 Hz
CD4053.
When the output of op-amp IC2d value Vmin to the final value VMax. and 5kHz.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 .

Auto Changeover from

Gensetto Mains Supply
Neelotpal Sarma

I oad shedding is a common fea- line supply voltage crosses the preset momentarily (through a switch). This lead is
to be connected with the ground through the
ture these days. Sudden power fluctua- level, zener D4 down and thus
breaks
surges and high voltages may
N/C point of the relay.
tions, transistor T2 conducts, T3 does not
Instead of one transformer, two trans-
spoil sophisticated household appliances conduct, causing the relay to de-ener-
formers are used in series to ensure better life
like TV, VCR, VCP and music system. gise. Voltage surge at the time of power
of the unit. Value of capacitor C2 can be
This circuit provides protection against resumption is protected by the delay
increased or decreased for the variation of
the saidproblems and helps automatic circuit around transistor T1 delay time.
stoppage of the generator when the All portable petrol and kerosene A negati ve feedback resistance, R6( 1 5K
XI AND X2: 230V AC
PRIMARY TO 12V, 500mA
SECONDARY
TRANSFORMERS

GENERATOR SET
SUPPLY L
MAIN SWITCH L

GENERATOR SET N
SUPPLY N
MAIN SWITCH N

CDI LEAD OF
ENERATOR SET
BODY OF
GENERATOR SET

supply of electricity resumes. The total generators have a connection from CDI. |
to 100K)can be incorporated between tran-
Cost of the circuit is Rs 60 to 80. T’o stop the engine of the generator-set, :
sistors T3 and T4 to overcome the damage

This circuit is self-explanatory. When this connection is to be grounded !

that could be caused by voltage fluctuations

Transformer Test Circuit to

Overcome Line Voltage
Variation
M.S. Nagaraj

C) ne ofon power
carried out
the initial production tests
transformers used
urement of no-load voltages across
secondary windings. During this
their I age across the primary winding be
|
test, ]
maintained at the rated line voltage,
in electronic equipments is the meas- 1

the basic requirement is that the volt- Hut in practice, there will be variations

1121 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 1

AO
A
rver.
s I »RH
O 4-
1CCK
- V.
»
.
OSC?

SENSE
TRANSFORMER
XI

i» i<* 01 R6
C7
icopl
silver’
|
—W OSC3
D*

Cl
IN4I4* 1M
730V AC PRIMARY MICA RET
TO i -VW n HI 01
0 V SEC
10-

»C 1 A1 UMTS
kli^’ - 34 Z'ntt
OP 07 •

UM ct \ F

SUPKV
C12 J
01*“
5
^1
»<*
It
oeLl —ulcwf a,
r
-5V 10V 1

l—— ———4
1
l

r j*
TENS
IC3
X2
L 7107
mANSfCWEB
UNDER
TEST IC 2
r
il 0 P07
10* 3*J IN

SEC 1
*

J. m ~ is
TV
~ «
1N4146
R10

>04 . L_ 10K R11

100K
_L C6
C 51 -

»c 2 oov
CS
'
T
!

— ft

0.1*
% •0w
'OV

l
LO
NOTE VOLTAGE AT PONT AtSVA (1 (XXN OC) AT COMMON -}ioc»»
LINF VOLTAGE OF 7MV AC c®
VOLTAGE AT PONT ft IS V* (2 000V OC) AT O.OATji

j
SLC N 20V AC ACROSS THE PHO*E l^UTS
I
RESISTANCE MA^n
• ARE 0 1 % .

BU*F
MfcTA^r*MRES$TO*S

CIO 1 '
6
0.22* ft

POlVPHOPVTCNC
TYPE

Fir. 1: Simple lest circuit.

tage that the calibrated variable resistor lishes the full scale value of the ADC, is

is to be adjusted until a zero deflection made proportional to the line voltage.

is obtained in the galvanometer. Transformer XI senses the line volt-

Here is a simple test circuit age. Op-amps IC1 and IC2 are config-
(Fig. 1) which offsets the effects of ured as precision peak-detector circuits.
variations in the line voltage and reads Preset VR1 is adjusted to get a refer-
the voltages across the windings corre- ence voltage of 1.000V DC at peak-
sponding to the rated line voltage ap- detector 1 corresponding
output
SECONDARY VOLTAGE
AT BALANCE;
92
plied to the primary winding. For ex- to a line voltage of 230V. Preset VR2
PRIMARY VOLTAGE R 14 R2 adjusted to get a voltage of 2.000V
ample. a transformer having a secon- is

dary voltage of 2 volts for a primary 1 at pcak-dctcctor 2 output for a

Fig. 2s Conventional method. voltage of 230 volts, will produce a [
voltage of 20 volts rms across the input
in the line voltage and its effect will be j
secondary voltage of 12.5 volts when • probes.
reflected in the secondary side. Hence the line voltage has varied to 240 volts. A number of transformers having
the test carried out will have this inher- But this lest circuit applies corrections different secondary voltages were tested

ent error. and reads 12 volts. This is made pos- using this tester. The supply voltage
The conventional method (Fig.2) to sible by deriving a reference voltage in was varied from 180 V to 250V AC and
solve this problem is to use a ratio the circuit proportional to the line volt- ,
the display readings were found to be
meter which consists of a bridge circuit age. accurate to 0.5 per cent.
in which the voltagesof the windings of Intersil 1C 7107. high-performance Although the voltage divider con-
the transformer under test arc balanced 3i/2-digit analog-to-digital converter is sisting of VR2.R7 and R8 is designed
against the voltages developed across used to measure and display the recti- for ameasurement range of 20V AC, it
the fixed and variable resistors of the fied output of the secondary windings. can be suitably modified to measure
bridge. This method has the disadvan- The reference voltage, which estab- higher voltages.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS KB 3
 Automatic Gate Light
Harinder Singh

^^^hile returning home on a cold ! Nl and N2 of 1C1 (CD4011) are !

the LDR. Gate light is switched on as
winter night it can be really frustrating wired as inverter gates. When light soon as switch SI is pressed, provided
if one is unable to unlock the gate due to falls on the LDR, its resistance be* no light falls on the LDR. And it re-
insufficient light. A simple, economic comes low, so the output level of Nl at , mains on for a preset interval of time,
yet reliable solution to the problem is pin 3 becomes high whereas output |
which is set with VR3. Gate N3 is also
provided by this circuit. When it is level of gate N2 at pin 4 becomes low. wired as an inverter gate. Its output is
high for (he time in which SI is pressed.
TransistorTl operates relay RL1 which
in turn operates the bell. Operation of
bell is independent of the light falling
on the LDR, i.e. it can he operated both
in day and at night whereas the gat
light operates only at night.

In stand-by state, i.e. when both the

relays arc inactive, the current con-

sumption is as low as 6 m A. The maxi-
mum current rating of the relays should
not exceed 21)0 mA. The gate light can
be latched from inside the house by
simply switching on the existing gale-
light switch if it is connected in parallel

with the relay contacts (relay RL2).

Capacitor C3 should be soldered on the
quite dark, a slight pressureon the bell VR1 is set so as to switch on the gate !

PCR as close as possible to the supply

switch switches the gate lights on for a light. Switch SI is pressed when the pins of IC1. The LDR should face
preset interval of time. The circuit is light falling on the LDR is very low (at downwards so as to prevent all other
also a valuable addition to domestic night). VR2 is set for about 0.25V at pin night lights falling on it.

security arrangements as it deters 4 of 1C2 when light falls on the LDR

unwelcome callers. and about 0.45V when no light falls on I

Pocket Radio Using LA4510

Pradeep G.

Here is a circuit fora pocket radio nents. This amplifier circuit needs only
:

assemble IFand RFsections. LA4510-

usingoncICI.A4510andthreetran.sis- one resistor! At zero signal level, this amp may be assembled on a
circuit
tors. Actually, this circuit differs from circuit draws 8-10 m A current only. At small separate veroboard which may
ordinary circuits atihc audio stage only. With 3-volt supply this circuit can give be fixed on the PCB using adhesive.
Here a small 9-pin IC LA4510 is used. 200 mWoutput power. Otherwise, you may make a new single
It replaces three transistors, driver trans- For making this radio you may buy PCB for this circuit,
formcrand many other passive compo- !
an ordinary pocket radio PCB and Alignment of this radio can be done

iicl ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

I
 X?
GREEN
2* MW IFT
ANTENNA COIL INTERSTAGE
OVER FERRITE ROD

NOTE: IF 2J COILS ARE USED. A 330 Pf CAPACITOR SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO

OSCILLATOR COL FROM GANG AND THE TRIMMER SHOULD BE CONNECTED
BETWEEN OSCILLATOR COLS TOP AND GROUND.
exactly as described in the article I
76). cost around Rs 13. Two 1.5-volt pen

‘Handheld MW Receiver’ published in Thc entire circuit costs Rs 60 in- torch cells can be used to power the

Electronic Projects, Vol. 4 (pages 72- eluding the cabinet. LA4510 would ; circuit.

Telephone Melody Ringer

K. Sundararajan
/
Ihis melody ringer gives a pleas- ,
hook’ condition, there is about -48 volts ,
signal.
ant tone each time the telephone rings.
I
DC across the telephone line. This DC When ringing signal is present on
The tunes are soothing as compared to '
voltage is divided by the divider net- the telephone line, the LED of IC2
those of old telephone instruments and work comprising 15-volt zencr diode glows and causes the internal transistor
the piezo buzzer in the current elec- D5 and resistor R2. 'Die voltage across to conduct, thereby extending ‘low’ to
|

tronic telephone instruments. R2 is again reduced by R3 and is used to pin 2 of IC3. which is wired as a mon-
This circuit is based on the musical light the LED inside IC1. When the !
ostable multivibrator. Now IC3 oper-
IC UM348 1 73482/3483/3484. When the LED glows, the transistor inside ICl ates and extends a ‘high’ into its output
telephone senses an incoming call sig- conducts and aids transistor T1 to con- pin 3. which is the power supply of the
nal. all the tunes stored in the ROM of duct. Ilcncc the supply voltage is ex- I music circuit based on IC4. The output
the IC are played in sequence. The bell tended to the reset pin 4 of IC3. As pin of IC3 is high for a period determined
stops ringing when the handset is picked 2 of 1C3 is in ‘high’ condition, the by the values of R7 and C3. During this
up. ;
output of IC3 is low. |
period, IC4 generates pleasant tunes.
The complete circuit isshown in the j
Condenser Cl across the telephone As IC3 is wired as a monostable, it

figure. The telephone line is connected line blocks the DC voltage of about -48 responds to the first ring and ignores
across the bridge rectifier comprising volts and prevents it from reaching the ! subsequent rings during its timing cycle,
diodes D1-D4. This bridge circuit pro- telephone ring sensing circuit built thus allowing IC4 to produce tunes for
vides correct polarity tothe LED inside around 1C2. Resistance R 1 reduces the the entire time period. When the tele-
the opto-coupler of IC1. even if the AC ringing voltage to a sufficient value phone is answered or is ’off-hook’, the
telephone line is connected in wrong so as to light the LED inside opto- j
telephone line potential drops to 5-6
polarity by accident. When the tele- coupler IC2. Diode D6 protects this I voltsdue to the impedance of the tele-
phone is in idle condition, i.e. *on- LED during the arrival of the ringing phone instrument. This prevents D5 to

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1115

conduct and hence the LED inside IC1 of IC4 triggers it into operation. The low value increases the speed of the
turns off. This, in turn, switches off output from pin 1 1 isamplified by tran- beat.
transistor Tl. When T1 is turned off, sislor T2 in order to drive the speaker. As this circuit is not able to distin-
the reset voltage on pin 4 of IC2 is Resistor RIO, preset VR1 and ca- guish between incoming ring pulses
removed and it turns off. Hence power paciiorC5 change the internal modula- and outgoing dial pulses, sometimes
to themusic circuit is withdrawn and lion of the music IC to sound like dif- during dialling a mclodeous tone may
the melody is stopped. ! ferent musical instruments such as pi- be heard. Though this is a disadvan-
j

Yht positive voltage available at ano and organ. tage, many people willprefcrthisdraw-
pin 3 of IC3 is used to supply IC4. Resistors R tl R
. 1 2. preset VR2 and back because it gives an audible indica-
Output pin 3 of 555 IC is capable of capacitor C6 change the speed or the |
tion that the exchange is responding to
sinking or sourcing current up to 200 tempo of the tunc. The frequency of the the digits being dialled,
m A. Hence the musical IC4 can safely internal oscillator is based on these ;
The operating voltage of I C4 should
work with this power. components. Preset VR2 determines not exceed 4.5 volts.
Ixt us cover the working details of i

the speed at which the tune is played.

IC4. When the power is extended, pin 4 ,
I^arge value of C6 slows the beat, and

Dynamic Display
Rajeev Kapoor

*
is circuit is based on serial input T’his circuit may be used for adver- we have given four
In this circuit
|

and parallel output shift register 74164. tisingordisplayofnamcplatcsetc.il is inputs toIC74164and Vccsupplyof
With the help of we can
this circuit made versatile by using the 555 and 74 5V is given at pin 14. The output here is
build a display board, where LEDs blink series of ICs, which arc readily avail- taken from pins 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 1 1, 12 and
j

to give a running light effect. able in the market. 13. ITie input to the pins 1, 8 and 9 arc

lIBI ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 i

ONE CYCLE
Vcc»V)

14
-imiuiTinJim ! I • I ! - ! t
ft
2

I
1 ,C1
555
1 CLK
1 IC3
74164

|2
1-4 — mml
CCIT 9
r

IT r~L_n
NOTE: PIN U AND PIN 7 OF fC4 12.
ARE VAX AND QNO RESPECTIVELY
Fig. 2: Waveforms.
the whole display. After receiving the
reset pulse, the first cycle will start

w
10(1 *-r*s

|
again and will display
manner. The above operation will be so
in the same
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram of dynamic display.
fast it will give a running light effect.
given with adjusted frequency. The input display. As the LEDs connected to pin This is limited up to 7 characters only.
given by 1C 555 designed for 50 per
is 13 glow the whole display will reset We can increase the display by 7
cent duly cycle, with T = 2x7.92 ms. and ihc cycle will start again. characters by cascading one more IC
Pin 2 in IC 74164 is made ‘high* con- Here we have the display of LEDs 74 164. If wc are cascading four ICs, we
tinuously to enable the input. Pin8 of arranged in a way to make ‘ELEC- can get 7+4x8=39 characters. Here we
IC3 takes clock pulses from timer IC2 TRON’ with the output pins 3, 4, 5, 6, can cascade as many ICs as we require.
having 50 per cent duty cycle with time 10, 11, 12 and 13 respectively. In the For cascading purpose, the output of
period of 0.555 sec. The outpui from first cycle the letter E will glow, in the pin 1 3 of first IC 74 64 should be given
1

pin 13 of IC3 is inverted by IC4 and second cycle L will glow, in the third to the input of second IC74164atpin 1.
given to pin 9 of IC3. This terminal is cycle the first and the third letter will And the reset input pin should be con- 1

used for resetting purposes. In IC 74164 glow. In the fourth cycle C and L will nected to the same as corresponding
the da la of pin 3 shifts to pins 4. 5, 6, 10. glow, in the fifth cycle E,E and T will pins of first IC74164. In place of LEDs
11, 12 and 13 successively. We have IX and R will glow, we can
glow, in 6th cycle also use display of AC bulbs.
used LEDs at outpui terminals of IC3 in 7th cycle E,E,T and O will glow and For this purpose wc have to use relays
which act as load. The LEDs arc ar- in 8th cycle LX, R and N will glow and at output term inals and this relay should
ranged in such a way that they form a then circuit will be reset switching off be of high switching speed.

Etfrfor'$ Npf*‘ Trme perrap oJ tC 1 appirad at A input CffC3 d peobb the CLX p&nod Mpffod at CLK input ptn 8, t#. A npui
i penod * UIQmC, Mppmxrmatafy and not mm siaied try tt » author.

Steam Whistle
N.J. Chandran
T he circuit produces a sound simi-
lar to that of a steam locomotive whistle,
|
brator, the frequency of which is set
preset VR3. This is the ’toot’ part of the
by noise generated across the reverse bi-
ased transistor T3. While noiscand toot
Transistors IT and T2 form a mullivi-
1

whistle. Transistor T4 amplifies white ,

are mixed by ICI The . ratio of these is

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
sci by preset VR2. The output from IC1 |
The positive 12Vcouldbc fed to the I by means of reed or microswitch de-
is fed to a simple amplifier based around circuit by a push switch near the con- vices.
J

TBA810 device. trailer or by the model train itself I

Programmable Timer
Prasanna D. Upasani

M any timer circuits have been

published so far but this one happens to
be the most versatile, inexpensive and
inserieswith resistance
frequency of the clock pulses.
Power-on-reset is
R4 to adjust the

provided to reset A
TABLE
B
1

Y
extremely compact timer with alarm. the counter by giving a pulse from the 0 0 0
This timer can be programmed for more supply line via C2 (0.001 pF). after which 0 1
0 {

1 0 0
than 250 different time intervals. it starts counting the pulses generated
t 1 i
J

VH1
rvw
t
R1 switches, each with a fixed time inter-
,
1M val. For example, with approximately
R3 Cl
2.2M R4 V "T 1.06 Hz frequency adjusted with
»v
25V [ |
RESET ZZC2 the help of preset VRI, the output
' loooi*.
9 a 1 06 (pin 4) will go high after receiving
2* = 64 pulses, that is after about 60 sec-
TO15V0C
onds. In same way, 014 (pin
the
14
3) will go high after 2 = 16384 pulses,
that is after about four-and-a-half-
LED
QSj^T^S^^OlOjOl^O^O^^ hours.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 SO But if 06 and Q 1 4 are switched on
8-DIP
simultaneously, their time intervals get
SWITCHES
added because of the AND gate ar-
J
rangement made by using the diodes
D1 08-8 * 1N4148
and the resistor. That is why 256 differ-
The heart of the circuit is a 14-stage ent time intervals can be programmed.
by the oscillator.
binary counter, CD4060. As shown in The circuit can be powered by a 9V
Diodes D1 through D8 along with
the figure, clock pulses are generated battery, and can be enclosed in a com-
the resistor R2 (10-kilohm) are used to
pact plastic box.
by connecting Cl, R4 and R3 to termi- form an 8-input AND gate. The truth
nals 9, 10 and 11 respectively of CD4060. table of the same is shown in Table I.

Preset VR1 (lOO-kilohm) is connected The timer has eight programmable

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 LED Stop Watch
Pramod Kumar
Jcs 555 and 4017 are well-known normally but as soon as pin 4 gets low SI is released, ICI stops generating
toclcctronics hobbyists. Presented here level logic, it stops to generate clock clock pulses and all counter ICs stop
is a very interesting circuit of an LED pulse and the output stays at low level. counting.The positions of all glowing
stop watch using timer 555 and decade In this circuit, pin 4 of IC 555 is LEDs will show how much time (push-
counter 4017 ICs. This stop watch is wired to ground through a 10-kilohm ing time of SI) has elapsed.
able to monitor time from one second and push-to-on switch SI is
resistor, ICI counts for 1 to 10 seconds, IC2
to 60 minutes. It can be used in sports, provided across the positive supply and i counts for 1 0 to 60 seconds, IC3 counts
laboratories etc. pin 4. As soon as switch SI is pressed, !
for 1 to 10 minutes and IC4 counts for

9V
LEDt? LEO 27
0MIN 16
3 0 MIN

2 10 MIN

v 4 20 MIN

R3 z 7 30 MIN
22K
4
10 40M:N
IC5

Q
VRl
ICO*
ft
ICI
555
4017
1 50 MIN

AOMIN
6
LED 33

6
i4 13 e

1C 555 is the heart of the circuit. It ICI stans generating clock pulses and 10 to 60 minutes. Preset VRl should be
is used in astablc multivibrator the whole circuit gets activated. adjusted so that ICI produces one full

mode. The special feature of this mode At each clock pulse. IC2, IC3, IC4 clock cycle in one second.
is that'if pin 4 of IC 555 is kept at high and IC5 start counting which is indi-
level logic, it produces dock pulse cated by glowing LEDs. When switch

Lie Detector
K. Sundararajan

X.
person
instrument to find whether a
is speaking the truth or not
General questions along with other
relevant questions arc asked
normal questions. Such sophisticated
is to the instruments can however give wrong
called a lie detector or polygraph. It subject. When the person tries to tell results. Hence the results obtained
records the heart beats, blood pressure, body physiology changes, These
lies, his through lie detectors arc not taken as
body temperature and tension level of changes are recorded and compared evidence in court cases.
the person undergoing the detector test. with the results that arc obtained for

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1119

 from person to person, it may be neces-
9V
sary to adjust VRl for each participant.
Once the bridge is balanced, the lie

detector reading will vary in accor-

1.5V
BATTERY dance with the changes body resis- in
tances. The circuit amplifies any minor
changes in the subject’s resistance and
ELECTRODES
causes LEDs to light. Any LED that

lights up thereafter indicates that the

skin resistance is changing under stress.
For calibration, connect a resistor
with the same value of R1 in the place

of electrodes. Bring potentiometer VRl’s

wiper to the centre of its rotation. Now
the differential voltage at the input ports
of the op-amp IC 1 is near zero. Thus the
output of the IC1 assumes its midrange
value of 4.5 V.
Now slowly adjust preset VR2 so as
Our electronic lie detector is for en- The output of IC1 is extended to pin to light fewer LEDs.
tertainment purposes only. Emotional 5 of IC2. This is the input voltage of Remove the fixed lest resistor and
stress is not only reflected by heart IC2, according to which it acts. Ihe IC connect the electrodes. Touch the elec-
beats or trembling hands, but also by an has an internal stable 1.25V reference trode with your palm Adjust the setting
.

increase in skin moisture. voltage source. The reference voltage of balance control VRl such that the
When the skinbecomes moist, its is available at pin 7 and may be varied bargraph lights up to approximately
resistance decreases. Thus the skin re- by preset VR2. This IC is wired to give midway. Note down the number of the
sistance is a good indicator of the stress a bargraph mode which lights all li:Ds glowing LEDs. Hold the electrodes very
level of the subject. The lie detector successively and keeps them ‘on* to tightly with the forefinger and the thumb.
presented here has been designed to display a bar of light. The length of the Now the electrodes will get heated up
detect skin resistance of the subject and bar will vary in accordance with the and consequently their resistance will
to give visual indication through barar- value of input signal available at pin 5 reduce, and this will cause more LEDs
rangement of different colour LEDs. of IC2. to turn on. Once you get the above
The circuit for the lie detector is 1 5V cell is provided to supply power mentioned indications from the initial
shown here. It is very simple to con- to the bridge. test, your circuit is ready. Preset VR2
struct and use. Place the palm of your hand on the need not be adjusted further.
The circuit consists of a bridge, an electrodes. The skin resistance across Now ask the participant to touch the
amplifier built around IC1 and a dis- the palm becomes part of the bridge. electrodes with his palm and set the
play stage around IC2. The electrodes, Since the skin resistance and fixed re- balance control sot hat some LEDs light
fixed resistor R1 and balance control sistance R1 arc not normally equal, up. Stress causes a decrease in body
VR1 make up a bridge circuit. The there will always be some error in the resistance which results in more LEDs
bridge network is connected to opera- positive or the negative direction in its lighting up in the display.
tional amplifier IC1. In this circuit, ,
, output voltage. This condition is cor- Two bare flexible wires can be used
popular CA3 1 40 op-am p is used as it is rected by the use of balance potenti- as electrodes. If regulated power sup-
readily available and inexpensive. Much ometer VR1, which allows the output ply is available, the LEDs will give a
better op-amps are available in the market of the bridge circuit to be corrected for stable output.
and these can be used for precision variation. Also, the general emotional The lie detector circuit can be used
results. As this lie detector circuit is cond ition of a person can only be ascer- as a relaxation monitor for monitoring
only for entertainment purposes, en- tained by measuring the average resis- relaxation and reduction of tension. Set
gaging such costly op-amps is not nec- tance of the skin over a period of time. the balance conlrol to light more num-
essary. Hence, it is necessary to adjust VR1 a ber of LEDs. As you relax or reduce
The output of 1C1 drives IC2. This few times for balance until a relaxed tension, your body’s resistance increases.
display driver is the popular IC LM3914, state is reached. Once this is done at the This will cause more LEDs to extin-
which measures the voltage from IC1 .
start of the session, there is no need to guish.
and converts it into digital signals that adjust VR1 thereafter.
light appropriate LEDs. Also, as the skin resistance varies

1201 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Reader*" Comments:
, .
, .
r, . .
. . . .
The author, Mr K. S undo rarajan, re- isused only in audio circuits. uA741
in tne Lie Detector circuit published
pH es -
does not give as satisfactory a per-

ICi and LM3915 IC for IC2.

for
i
,Cs LM3915 md ^ 741 •*** formance as a CA3140E for such a
, ent to LM39H and CA3140E respoc- sensitive measurement. Hence the
MADUbSUDAN AGASTY |

.lively. 1C LM3915 is the logarithmic reader is advised to follow the pub-

Tharsoguda (Dt Sambalpur) (version of
the popular LM3914, and it lished circuit only.

Temperature Controlled
Soldering Iron Station
Kalpesh T. Dalwadi

^ 'em perm ure controlled soldering their cost is around Rs 800. Here is a With basic knowledge of com para-
iron stations are now readily available project to construct such a unit at tors, this circuit is very easy to under-
in the market. Such instruments use almost half the cost, while it is almost stand.
thermocouples or thermistors as tern- as reliable as the commercial one. Temperaluresensor HC107 isan in-
perature sensors. Generally, thermo- An electronics hobbyist would surely expensive silicon transistor. 'Hie fact
couples are preferred. These units arc like to build this unit to enhance the that the emitter to base turn-on voltage
available for Rs 300 to Rs 600. Tern- working life of his soldering iron bit ofasilicontransistorislinearwithtcm-
perature sensors such as PT 100. PT and to save power against a nominal in- perature, is utilised to sense tempera-
500, PT1000 etc arc very precise but I vestment of around Rs 150. ture. If the operating current of sensing

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IB 21
 .

transistor is made proportional to abso- of iron comes within the range of the set VR3 will decrease due to reverse con-

lute temperature, the small non-linear- limit, the output at pin 7 goes low. thus nection of preset) the voltage at pin 5

ity which is prevailing can he elimi- tripping the relay. And then the solder- will # be zero volts.

nated. ing iron is again connected to the sup- For calibration of VR3, take a ther-
Diodes D1 and D2 provide voltage ply. Capacitor Cl eliminates the relay mometer which can measure tempera-
source of 1.2V, which is applied through flutter at the time of changing of the ture up to .SCXTC. Set VR3 at minimum
resistor R3 to set operating current of logic levels at pin 7 oflCl position switch on the unit. When the

transistor Tl. Here VK1 biases the input The sensor am he mounted half relay is energised and Llil) glows,
of amplifier for zero output at zero centimetre away from the soldering measure the temperature of the solder-
degree centigrade, while VR2 can be iron bit with a single-core copper wire. ing iron with the thermometer. It will
calibrated for 100 mV/*C at pm 1 of Use mounting sockets for IC. be around 26<>'C.
IC1. For calibration of the system adjust Now rotating VR3 in clockwise di-

1C 1(b) acts as a simple comparator. VR1 and VR2 at positions slightly greater rection in fixed steps, goon measuring
R7 provides some hysierisis. Preset VR3 than their mid-positions. In this case, ihe temperature of the soldering iron

can be varied to control the tempera- voltage at pin be around 4.8V.

1 will till the LED glows. Mark that position
ture of soldering iron from about 250°C C onnections of VR3 are to be made for the measured temperature.
to 450*C. such that rotating VR3 from its mini- When VR3 is inmaximum position
T2 drives the relay. If the tempera- mum position in clockwise direction in clockwise direction, the maximum

ture of soldering iron increases above will decrease the voltage at pin 5 of bit temperature measured will be around

the set value, output at pin 7 of IC1 goes IC1. When VR3 is in minimum posi- 430’C.
high and T2 gels base drive. Relay tion the voltage at pin 5 of IC1 is around Completing the above, your solder-
operates and the solder iron is cut off 4.2 volts. When VR3 is at maximum ing iron station is ready for use. The

from the supply. When the temperature (when rotating in clockwise direction whole unit would cost around Rs 150.

Mini Emergency Light

B.S. Malik

^J'here are various types of emer- at a desired intensity of light, the LDR
gency light circuits. Every circuit has offers high resistance due to which a
its own importance and utility. But size, negative voltage forward biases Tl.
cost and efficiency of the circuit arc Hence Tl conducts and voltage drop
some of the main features of interest. A across resistor R2 is applied to base of
very simple circuit is given here. T2, causing it to conduct. In this way I

normal daylight or electric light,

In the bulb now glows.
the LDR offers very low resistance. So Preset VR 1 can be adjusted to make \

a positive voltage is applied to the base the bulb glow' at a desired intensity of j

of transistor Tl, making it reverse bi- light.

ased, lhcrefore, Tl docs not conduct in In presence of light, thecircuit is off

presence of light. As transistor T2 also but draws about 125 pA from 6V sup-
is reverse biased it docs not conduct ply. The total consumption of circuit circuit consumes about 300 mA cur-
either. So the bulb docs not glow. depends on the bulb’s rating. If a bulb rent.
In darkness, to make the bulb glow of 6V. 120mA rating is used then the

1221 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Automatic Time Indicator
for Telephone
Mangesh M. Kasbekar

circuit presented here provides lached 10 the stopper on the telephone thus giving supply to IC2 which is
(

an audible warning 2.5 minutes after dial. triggered as a timer without a trigger,
dialling the telephone. The circuit docs f
The off touch plate is in the form of '

The timer triggers falsely when the

not make use of telephone lines for its a conducting silver paper strip which is
1

supply is given and pin 3 of 1C2 goes

|

operation. i stuck on the body of the telephone such i

high. After preset time interval, the
The circuit consists of three 555 that a similar strip stuck on the handset voltage drops to ground level and the
ICs. It can be divided into three parts — touches it when the handset is kept in
j

oscillator becomes operative,

touch switch using IC1, timer using position. The circuit will not work on battery
IC2, oscillator using IC3. While dialling a number, the finger 1

since the grounding of touch plates is

The on touch plate is in the form of ,

touches the stopper and the switch be- }
involved. Use a 9- volt regulated sup-
a wire, the insulation of which is at-
'
comes ‘on’. Pin 3 of IC1 goes high. j
ply. The line and neutral terminals should

be connected properly. Otherwise, the

t

touch switch action will be momentary.

1

The wire connecting the on touch plate

l
to the PCB can be long but that for the
off plate should not be longer than 4-5
|

i
cms.
The siren can be stopped
by keep-
I mg the handset in position or by touch-
i
ing the off plate first and then the on
plate for issuing a warning after the
lapse of 2.5 minutes.
llie circuit draws 3-5 mA in off
i
state. It remains off for incoming calls.
i
It is automatic in the sense that it switches
on and off within the normal
itself pro-
|
1

ccdure of making a phone call.

1

ELECTRONICS PROJECTSfiES
 Wind Sound Generator
Pradeep G.

U 'sing this
circuit,
simple
one can gen-
xt
230V AC PRIMARY
TO 9V/6V-OV AC
cvcr, a battery may
be used instead. The
SECONDARY
erate the sound of output sound will be
wind. The circuit is slightly changed. The
basically an asiable prototype has been
multivibrator built successfully tested
around two npn tran- with the given power
sistors. Here two supply. Also an 8-
BC548 transistors ohm, 5cm, low watt-
arc used but they can age speaker is rccom-
be replaced with any mended. The circuit
,

general-purpose sili- can be easily as-

I

con transistors. sembled on a small

By adjusting the 1M potentiometer, caping gas from a container through a veroboard. Values of feedback capaci-
thesound can be changed from that of small hole etc. A 9-volt or 6-volt un- tors may be changed slightly, if neces-
wind to storm, sound of sea, hiss of es- regulated power supply is enough. I low- sary.

Automatic Cut-Off Power Supply

Biswadeb Kumar Nath

w when the line

are aware that
voltage becomes more than 250 volts
and less than 160 volts, it can damage
our TV sets, refrigerators etc. Hence,
wc use voltage stabilisers which arc
costly. The circuit described here is
low-cost. The assembling cost comes
to around Rs 50 only. If the voltage
exceeds the mentioned range it auto-
matically cuts-off the supply so that the
life of the TV set and other devices can
be extended.
The common point of the relay is
connected to the phase line and from
the normal point it is connected to the
device. The nuctral will have a direct
line from the mains supply.
To adjust VRl and VR2. you have
to take the help of a manual voltage sta-
biliser, First adjust the manual vollagc

1241 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 j 1

stabiliser so that its output gives 160 excited position, ,

able in the market. Now obtain 12 volts
volts. Then adjust VR1 so that therclay This circuit requires nearly 75mA from the transformer using bridge rec-
goes to the excited position. Now ad- current at 12 volts. You may not get a tifier from the two end pointsof the sec-
just manual voltage stabiliser to
the transformer of this range in the market, ondary winding, leaving the centre tap
give an outputof 250 volts. Then adjust 300 mA centrc-
Therefore, take a 6-volt, open.
VR2 so that the relay just goes to the ! tapped transformer which is easily avail-

Battery Charger with Overcharge

and Deep-discharge Protection
Dr D. Kumbhakar
L cad-acid storage cells are often
used as stand-by source of electrical
,
a 12-volt battery at full charge and also
the discharging at a safe limit. So let us
This reference voltage
emitter of transistor
is pul at the
T1 whose base
energy during the periods of supply line first take a look at the charger itself. senses the battery voltage through a
failure. The electrical energy stored in The heart of the charger is a trans- potential divider formed by 4.7k and
the cell is extracted during mains fail- former in a metallic box. The primary 3.3k resistors, and a preset of 2.2k.
ure; whenmains supply sets on, the
the of the transformer is connected to the When the base voltage is not above 0.6
energy can be replenished from the AC mains (Fig. 1). The secondary of volt than the emitter voltage, transistor
mains source through a device known the transformer usually has a centre T1 does not conduct; the collector volt-
as charger. Both the discharging and terminal and the two terminals at its ageofTl remains at Vs. Transistor T2
charging of the cell arc chemical proc- sides are 1 2 volts AC with respect to it. also does not conduct since the volt-
esses, one in the forward direction and The centre-tapped terminal is di- ages at its emitter and base are the same
the other in the reverse direction. But
what may happen when the charger
remains ‘on’ even after the electrical
energy of the cell has been fully recov-
ered?
Another important question to a
battery user is how longa battery can be
discharged after it is fully charged?
This is mentioned by the ampere-hour
capacity of the battery specified by the
manufacturer. As an example, a battery 4

of 90 ampere-hour will deliver current reclly connected to the negative termi- and equal to Vs. As the base of T1 rises
j

atan average of 9amperes for lOhours. nal ofthe battery. The other two termi- above 5.7 volts, T1 starts conducting
What happen
will if the discharging is nals arc connected to the anode ends of and the collector voltage falls below
continued beyond that time limit? two diodes. The other ends, i.e. the Vs. The base voltage of T2, a pnp
The battery will be damaged be- cathode ends of the diodes, are joined transistor, becomes lower than that of
yond repair if it is driven beyond Lhe together and are led to the positive its emitter —eventually T2 also con-
limit. The plates will be coated with terminal of the battery through an ducts and the relay is energised,
insoluble molecules of lead sulphate ammeter and a safety fuse. There is another potential divider
which cannot be removed. This state is ! To cut off the charging, as the bat- formed by two 4 7k resistors and
known as deep-discharge of the bat- i
tcry reaches full charge, i.e. 13.2 volts, the 2.2k preset. Transistor T3 senses
tery. This state is also manifested in the a circuit board with a relay can be used, the same zener voltage of 5. 1 volts at its
battery voltage. For 12-voli batteries. The circuit board has a zener which emitter and the battery voltage at the
which is our concern here, this is 10.8 gives a reference voltage of 5.1 volts base. If the battery voltage is about 1

volts.So the battery voltage should not (Fig-2). The current through the zener volts, the transistor conducts fully, the

be allowed to fall below 1 1 volts. is maintained at about 5mA through a collector voltage remains around 5.2
Presented here is a reliable and effi- resistance of 1.8k from the supply volts. The collector of T3 is linked to
cient method to cut-off the charging of voltage which is around 12-15 volts, the base of T1 through diode D3. If the

ELECTRONICS PROJECTSfiEil
 A lights up green part of the LED, at the
same time reverse-biasing the red part.
During discharge, if the relay is acti-
vated, the red pan will glow since the
voltage at A is absent.
For setting, first set the preset VR2
at the lowest towards ground. Then let

the battery voltage rise to 13.2 volts by

charging. Set the preset VR 1 to cut the
charging at a voltage slightly above
13.2 volts.
A satisfactory check for the setting
will be as follows. First discharge the
battery through an ammeter for a cer-
tain lime. For example, let the current
be 5 amperes and time 8 minutes. Then
let the battery be charged. If the charg-

ing current 4 amperes, then the mini-

is

mum charging time required is given

by 4t = 5x8.
Here is The charging
a problem.
current is not a steady one. So you have
to find the average current. By repeat-
ing the above procedure several times
you have to fix the preset, keeping in
mind that the power supplied during
FI g. 3.
charging should be somewhat greater
buttery voltage falls below 1] volts, Tl.
than the power delivered by the battery
conduction of T3 decreases and the Both the overcharge and deep-dis- 4.
during discharge.
collector voltage rises. D3 then con- charge cut-offs are provided by a single
While the battery voltage is at 1 3.2
ducts to raise the base voltage of Tl. relay, lienee, it has to be a doublc-
volts, shift the battery clip from the
Transisiors Tl and T2 conduct sequen- contact relay. Normally, the DC output
positive terminal to the positive of the
tially and the relay is energised. of the charger at point A charges the
prececding unit (6 units in 12-volt bat-
To avoid flickering in the relay con- battery through one normal contact
during overcharge or deep-dis-
teries). Then the voltage reaching the
tacts (Fig. 3). The battery is also connected to
charge cut-off, a feedback resistance of
circuit board Is 13.2x5/6= 1 1 volts. Use
the pole of the other contact and the
47k is placed between the collector of battery output is taken from its normal
this voltage to set preset VR2 for dis-
charge cut-off.
T2 and the base of Tl . A condenser of contact. A double LED serves as both
lOOpF across the relay also reduces the the overcharge and deep-discharge cut-
flickering. If further damping is needed, off indicator. When the relay is cner-
a condenser should be set at the base of gised due to overcharge, the voltage at

tions thoroughly! sary.

S.DUTTA GUPTA The circuit can also be used for 6-

Babupara South (Dt Darjeeling) volt batteries if the 5.1 -volt zencr is

The author. Dr D. Kumbhakar. replaced by four 1N4001 diodes in se-

replies. ries (forward biased)
Ihave checked the circuit on a general- I deeply regret for the mistakes I

purpose PCB once more. My observa- and 2.

tions are: I may add that the circuit is

further
Readers* comments:
Before setting VRI, preset VR2 working smoothly for years in my 12-
t.
The Charger with
circuit for ‘Battery
should be set highest towards supply volt DC-to-250V AC inverters with
Overcharge and Deep-Discharger Pro- and not lowest towards ground. some modifications in the relay and
tection’ in EFY Apr. '92 issue docs not supply connections. Thanks to the reader
2. Resistor R5 should be changed to
work. 1 assembled this particular circuit 1-ohm for less sensitive relays. whose efforts have led me to detect the
on a veroboard and checked the connec- 3. Condenser C4 is usually unneces-
errors.

[Hal ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Electronic Ballast for Tubelights
K. Sridhar

he fluorescent tubclight requires The typical electronic ballast is a and X2 are given below:
|
additional gear such as the copper bal- current fed oscillator in the half bridge XI (T-10) — Coil wound on
lastand starter for normal operation. configuration. Transistors Tl, T2 and fenrite T-10 or T- 12 core.
These two are required to provide the capacitors C5, C6 form the half bridge 6 turns, 3 turns
initial high voltage for ionisation and in the circuit shown. Diodes D8, D9, and 6 turns wound by
thereafter to limit the current through D5, D6 clamp the output voltage to thin plastic coaled cop-
the tube to safe values. values within the supply rails. Diodes per wire. The different
It has been observed that the illumi- D1 to D4 and capacitors Cl to C3 windings should show
nation efficiency of the tubclight when provide the required DC voltage for the insulation in excess of
excited by high frequency power source circuit. Transformer X2 regulates the 100 megohms at a
is higher than that when excited at the current through the tube and also deter- test voltage of 500V.
50Hz line frequency. Moreover, the mines the frequency of operation of the X2 (E-25) — 160 turns of 29SWG
power factor and the efficiency of the ballast. For the values shown, the oper- enamelled copper wire
bulky copper ballasts are poor. Hence, ating frequency is typically 25 to 30kJ Iz. with a sheet of thin in-
electronic ballasts were developed to R6. C4 and diac DB-3 form the start-up sulating paper between
overcome these deficiencies. circuit. layers. The E-25
The electronic ballast is light in As capacitor C4 charges up to ap- ferrite core is fixed with

weight, compact and has a high power proximately 35 V, diac DR-3 provides a a small air gap of about
factor. It starts up even at low voltage, current pulse to the base of transistor 0.2mm produced by
and above all has a very high effi- T2, setting the circuit into oscillation. paper kept between the
ciency. The specifications of transformer XI faces of the ferrite core.

xl R3
(SEE TEXT) 5,10

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 The transistors may be sorted by 3. Tube operates, transistors over- |

their current gain. The transistors with heat: i

similar current gain can be used. Use a — Poor insulation in X 1 or incorrect

digital multimeter with transistor check no. of turns
facility for this. 4. Tube operates, coil X2 overheats:
Warning: All components of the —Too high an air-gap '

ballast arc live. They carry high volt- Hissing sound or crackling sound:
5.

age. Direct contact with the circuit may — Improper insulation X2 in coil

prove lethal. 6. Rickering tube:

Disconnect the mains whenever pos- —Faulty capacitors Cl, C2, C3
sibleand discharge capacitors Cl, C2, Does
7. not start-up at low voltage:
C3 before testing the components. Use —Very low air-gap in X2
a 100-ohm resistor connected in be- For further experimentation capaci-
tween two probes to discharge. Do not tors Cl C2 and C3 can be replaced by
.

discharge by shorting the capacitors. a single 8pF polyester capacitor. This

Listed below are some of the major increases size and cost. This model will
faults diagnosed in electronic ballasts withstand high temperatures (outdoor
along with the probable causes. application) and will have a long life.

1 . Tube does not start up or flickers: Twin L-section filters consisting of

— Improper diac D12 inductors and capacitors can be used on

— Wrong sequence of connect ion the AC input side of the choke. This

for coil XI , would suppress radio frequency inter-

2. Tube flickers but docs not start- ference (RFI). llie coils may be of 15
1

up. turns on T-20 ferrite core. The capaci-

— Wrong connection of coil XI tors may be 0.01 pF, 1000 volts.
—Faulty diodes D6, D5

Compressor/Expander Unit
(Compander)
N*J. Chandran

r
he compression and expansion are the reproduction of compressed mate- ingly good results. Thecircuit furnishes
|
two important techniques used by au- |
rial, restores the dynamic range and both the functions —compression and
dio engineers during recording and creates a ‘live’ music. expansion (often expressed by the term
reproduction of programme material. Creating these effects is costly and —
compander) easily.
The compression of dynamic range complex, and beyond the scope of The compander uses an opto- isola-
of programme material (records, speech amateur audiophiles. But the simple tor. The LED from the opto-isolator is

or music broadcasting) permits main- circuit shown here provides a low-cost connected to the speaker terminals via
taining constantly high modulation level solution. Constructed with a few pas- a current limiting resistor in conjunc-
while the expansion, when used with sive components, it can give surpris- tion with potentiometer VR1 to sample

1281 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Compression depends upon the value
01
1N414S of R4 ( 10k used here). As this value is

decreased, the compression effect is

increased. Thus it is possible to obtain

practically the desired range of com-
pression and expansion. The LDR’s
dark resistance value is also a partici-
pant and affects the performance of the
unit. Its dark resistance should be be-
tween 5 and 10 megohms.
Ihe compander can be used effi-

ciently only if the preamplifier and

power amplifier units are separate.
W0UN0 POT PANEL The programme source should be
MOUNTED
connected to the preamplifier and out-
programme material from the out- put from the preamplifier should act as
the of an amplifier. The LED and LDR I

put of power amplifier. the input to the compander. Expanded

should be enclosed in a light-proof box }

Diode D1 and resistor R1 provide or a small plastic tubing. or compressed signal from the compan-
I

protection to the I£D from excessive When SI is switched to *EXP\ the

der is fed to power amplifier. The out-
current, while potentiometer VR1 is LDR gets connected across the high
1
put from the speaker terminals is con-
used to vary sensitivity of the circuit, end of R2 and R3. When audio-modu- I
nected to the input of opto- isolator (LED/

The value of R1 needs adjustment; with lated light from the LED strikes the I
LDR).
high power audio amplifiers its value LDR. which is now connected in paral- Audio compressor is much used in

should be increased. This should be disk or tape recording, and can be inter-
lei with R2. the combined resistance
decided experimentally, !

becomes lower and thus increases posed between the output of a mixer
the
The audio modulated light falls on t output level, and the input of a tape recorder in order
the LDR which is light sensitive. So When the SI is switched to ‘COMP\ to ensure that the maximum recording
,

level is not greatly exceeded.

LDR’s resistance varies with the modu- the LDR and resistor R4 come in paral-
latcd light. The LDR should have a '
lei with R3. And when the LDR is illu-
The unit can be used as the volume
‘dark resistance’ of about 5 megohms, minated by the I ,ED, the composite control between the preamp and the
I
rc-
and when brightly illuminated it should sistance lowers and
power amplifier in an audio system. It
\
it compressevS the
offer a resistance of about 6 to 20 signal.The amount of compression dc- can also be used in a musical instru-
kilohms. It is therefore possible to vary pends upon the values of R2 and R3. A ment's amplifier, to extend the signal-
by feeding the current to to-noise ratio on expansion, or to pre-
its resistance high value of R2 means a greater ex- 1

the LED from the audiooutput terminal vent speaker blowout on compression.
I pansion range is possible. i

Adjustable Bipolar Voltage

Regulator
Kamal Wason

E
ply
op-amp circuits the power sup-
must provide positive and negative
]

j
The LM317K regulator has
feedback regulating and current pass-
internal i thermal shutdown. Thus these two ICs
form an independently adjustable bipo-
voltages. Here is a simple circuit which ing elements. It incorporates various larpower supply,
j

gives regulated ± 1.2V to ±20 V supply. protection circuits such as current limit The steel K packages will easily
ICs LM317K and LM337K are used (which limits package power dissipa- furnish one ampere each if theheatsinks
J

here as positive and negative regulators lion to 15 wails for lheTO-220 package are properly mounted. Variable resis-
j

respectivcly. I
and 20 watts for the TO-3 package) and tors VR1 and VR2 are adjusted for

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS fiEl

 1

each regulator to give a regulated out- ,

jection. I lowevcr. if a short-circuit occurs / VR
put approximately between ±1.2V to across the regulator output, C5 will Vo * 1.25V I 1+
*20 volts. Capacitors C5 and C6 arc adjust the current in the terminal. The \ R1
used to improve AC ripple voltage re- output am he calculated by the formula

Hex to Binary Encoder

Biju Kumar J.

T-
lo binary
circuit described here is

encoder using four, 8-input

a hex 1

board switches SI 10 S 15 are connected

in such a manner that pressing of any
puts of corresponding decoded
her.
num-

NAND gate 7430 ICs. The input key- i

switch produces the binary ABCD out- When all inputs of a N AND gate arc
WPUT
KEY BOARD

BINARY OUTPUTS

iKlfl l ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 .

high, produces a low output. But when

it being open, the binary output is 0000. hence the output code becomes a correct
any of its inputs goes low, its output Pressing of a switch gives a low input’ binary equivalent of the input hex num-
becomes high. Normally, all switches to the corresponding NAND gate, and ber.

Electronic Siren
Kiran A.R.

TT ere is an inexpensive siren cir-

cuit built around the most popular and

low-cost 1C 741. It costs within Rs 50,
excluding the power supply.
The circuit is basically a square
wave generator which is used here to
produce the tone of a siren.
The first 74 1 IC is used as a low-fre-
quency multivibrator, the output of which
modulates the high-frequency tone
produced by the second 741 multivi-
brator. The final output is amplified

and converted into a loud siren by tran-

sistor Tl and the speaker.
Several interesting tones can be ob-
tained by changing the values of ca- R6. If the value of Cl is increased, the |
fire engine,

pacitors Cl and C2 and resistors R2 and siren will produce sound like that of a •

Self Switching-off Power Supply

N J. Chandran

^J\is power supply switches itself switches off. The base current of Tl The output voltage of the power
off when no current is drawn by the then charges capacitor C2 so that after supply depends on the resistance be-
load . a few seconds the relay is de-cnergised tween points A and B in the circuit. A
When a load current flows, the po- 'Hie relay contacts switch to N/C and wire link there results in an output
tential difference across diode D6 is thus switch off AC mains supply at the voltage of about 3.5V. For each 100
sufficient to cause diode D7 and tran- primary side of the transformer. The ohms increase, the output voltage will
sistor T2 to conduct. Transistor Tl is supply is switched on again by recon- rise by about 1 V. (The current from the
then switched on and the relay is cner- necting the load and pressing switch SI regulators to ground is nearly constant
gised. When the load current ceases, T2 momentarily. at 10mA.) This facilitates variable out-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS KED

 SvYlTCH

fvcitr Use 7&06 /n TC3 jtormrvufTi pachjp* rtf&i IA

put voltage with some resistors and a rent. The output current should not The delay in switch-off may be ex-
rotary switch. exceed 1 -amp; if that magnitude of cur- tended by increasing the value of ca-
The AC rating of the secondary of rent is drawn regularly, it is rccom- pacitor C2. The heatsink of IC1 should
transformer XI must be about 1.5 times i
mended to increase capacitor Cl to be in accordance with the output cur-
as high as the desired DC output cur- 1500 p.F. rent.

Sound Operated Timer

Pradip Kumar Bose
cvcral timer circuits have been T4 and T5 amplifies the liny signal. Cl, whose value can be in between
published in liFY, but this one is unique The amplified signal is rectified by lOpF to 220pF. It is found that the delay
as no timer It: has been used here. It is diode D1 and is fed to the base of T3. time is about one second with 10pF
transistorised timer having a 2-stage Capacitor Cl starts charging through capacitor and it is about 20 seconds with

audio amplifier and a relay driving unit. I T3. The charge of Cl switches on Iran- 220pF capacitor.

Ihe incoming sound waves are trans- sistors T2 and T1 simultaneously. T1 I he can easily be mounted
circuit

formed into a low audio signal by the energises the relay and the load gets on a small veroboard. You can control
condenser (tnic). The direct coupled power through it. radio, TV, tapcrccorder or any other

audio amplifierbuilt around transistors llie time period is maintained by electronic equipment with this timer.
 Telephone Amplifier Cum
Broadcaster
Pradeep G.

W" this low-cost circuit lor a

tdcphonc-amplifier-cum-broadcasier
,

1
the telephone setby trial and
obtain the optimum results.
error to I 6-volt audio output transformer (red
cover), normally used with a radio re-
one can hear telephone conversation The audio signals picked up by coil ceiver (not driver transformer). XI
loudly. It also transmits speech signals I
LI in the circuit arc first amplified by modulates AF signals with MW RF
in MW range so that one can listen to a transistor Tl which is wired as a simple carrier waves. The modulated signals
telephonic conversation on a radio set. I common-emitter amplifier. Its output arc transmitted through the aerial.

14TURNS 36 SWG OU^F UT

b-c TRANSFORMER
76 TURNS 36 SWO (RED COVEH)
ENAMEL EO CC^R WRF
The heart of this circuit is n pick-up is given to the power amplifier wired Frequency of the transmitted sig-
j

coil which is made of 3000 turns of around IC 1895. nals can be varied within the MW range
42SWG enamelled copper wire wound 1
When switch SI is in position 'a\ through the gang condenser. (A fixed
over 3.8cm dia PVC pipe used as the ,
the speaker generates sound. Adjust capacitorcan also be used.)The change
former. After winding, remove the for- VRl and VR2 for a clear and loud in position of L2 over the ferrite rod
mer carefully and wind self-adhesive i

sound. Don’t place the speaker dose to will also change the output frequency,
(insulation tape) over the coil. telephone mouthpiece as this would Coil L2 should be wound exactly as
(

This coil is placed over the tele- produce unwanted feedback noises. i described in the diagram. However, a
phone set. A good shielded wire should When switch SI is in position ‘b\ 2X type MW antenna coil (not 2J) can
be used to connect this coil to the cir- the speaker gets disconnected from the also be used,
,

cuit. Length of this wire should be as circuit, and the speech signals arc car- If a high-gain AC mains operated
short as possible. Readers can deter- tied to an RF oscillator circuit wired receiver is used, signals can be re-
j

minc the best position of the coil over i around transistor BD 139. Here XI is a :
ceived even from a distance of 150

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS KESJ

metres. The range will actually depend hi should be used. Otherwise, a little ent from that of ordinary transistors,
upon the length (height) of the antenna. is
hum will be generated. Pin configure- shown in the diagram,
A regulated 9- volt supply using IC t ion of transistor BD 1 39, being differ- I

Quiz Display with Seven-Segment

Indication
K.M. Reddy

Qu. contests arc becoming incrcas- connected to the push-to-on switches cause whenever any one of the switches
ingly popularand theso-called ‘buzzer* and outputs to the inputs of IC2 which is pressed, the output of IC4 goes high,
rounds are now an integral part of such is a priority encoder. IC2 is used in this I’he complement of this input is fed to

contests. In such rounds each team is circuit to convert the data latched on the enable input of ICl. disabling the
provided with a pushbutton switch and i
ICl to BCD. 'lhe outputs of IC2 are latches until the reset switch is pressed,
questions are addressed to all the par- inverted by N -N4 which are inverters.
1
The circuit must be powered by a 5-
ticipating teams. The team that presses The complemented outputs are fed to volt ±5% power supply. Current limit-

the buzzer first is allowed to answer the the inputs of IC3 -which is a BCD to 7- ing resistors (R10-R 16) values may be
question. A circuit that can be used for segment display decoder. This device’s increased to decrease brightness of the
this purposeshown in the figure. It
is outputs drive a common-anode, 7-seg- display and vice-versa, lhe whole cir-
can accommodate up to eight teams. It ment display. Current limiting resistors cuit may be built on a veroboard. Until
makes use of a 7-segment display to R10toR17 limit the current available the switches are pressed, the dispay
indicate the team that pressed the switch IC4 is used to prevent the
to the display, will show zero. When a zero is dis-
first. latches from registering more than one played, it means that the circuit has
The circuit is based on TTL ICS,, team’s input, i.e. only the first team’s been reset and (hat it is ready to accept
ICl is an 8-bit latch whose inputs are input is registred. This happens be- data from the switches.
 Electronic Staircase Switch
Harinder Singh

J f you
want to control an electri-
cal appliance from two places then

you use a 2-way switch. But to control

it from more than two locations (like
operating a hotel’s staircase light from
individual floors from various loca-
tions), this circuit comes to your help.
Due to the small size of the circuit it can
be installed within a junction box.
IC1 is configured as a timer with a
timing of 0.7 seconds. When switch SI
is pressed momentarily, output at pin 3
of IC1 goes high for 0.7 seconds. This
clock pulse output is fed to the input of
IC2 which is actually a decade counter
(4022) but is used here for division by
two.
When the circuit is switched on, QO resets 1C2, turning QO to a logically
j
after switch has been pressed once. So
ofIC2goeshigh.ButwhenswitchSl is high state and all other outputs (Q 1 to the bounce of a mechanical switch which

pressed, QO goes low and Q 1 goes high, Q9) to a logically low state. This cycle '
lasts for about 20ms has no effect on the
thus energising the relay due to con- is repeated sequentially as pushbutton ,
working of the circuit.
duction of transistor Tl. SI is pressed repeatedly. Current consumption of the circuit.
1

Q2 of 1C2 is connected to pin 1 5 of Diode D1 has been used here to take when the relay is unactivated, is about
the same IC which resets IC2 when this care of the back emf generated by the i 10mA. This, however, will finally
pin is at a logically high state. When SI relay during switching. IC1 also takes
j
depend upon the rating of the relay
is pressed while the relay is energised care of contact dcbounce as the output used,

Q1 goes low and Q2 goes high, which of IC1 remains hich for 0.7 seconds I

Fully Automatic Induction

Motor Starter
R. Sharath Kumar

^^^fall AC motors available, a poly- '• quires little maintenance. full-load current and would develop
phase induction motor is the one which |
Among the induction motors avail- only l to 2 times their full-load torque,

ismost widely used for several kinds of I able, a squirrel cage machine is the This initial excessive current is highly
industrial drives. This is because it is best.However, such motors can never objectionable because it produces large
very simple, extremely rugged, low- be started by direct switching, as the line voltage drop, which affects the

cost, reliable, highly efficient and re- motor would take 7 to 10 times their operation of other electrical equipment

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IE 35
 RL1

connected to the same lines. So to pre- seconds approximately, hence switch- delay indicator. Diodes D2 and D3
vent this, starter is used. ing on the motor safely and also pre- protect the circuit against reverse po-
This circuit is one such starter. It is venting line voltagcdrop. Hcrecapaci- larities.
a very low-oost but highly reliable gadget, torCl starts charging as soon as the Another advantage of the circuit is
besides being fool-proof. power is switched on. that even in the case of power interrup-
The circuit basically consists of a When Cl is charged to 2/3 Vcc the tion, the motor would re-start in its

555 timer chip (1C1). This timer switches output goes low and energises the relay usual manner. The circuit is very simple
on the 3-pole/3-changc relay (connected which changes contacts and hence (he and can be assembled in less than an
in star mode for starting and delta mode motor connections. TheLEDisondunng hour. Care has to be taken about the
for running) after a delay of about 60 the charging period of Cl and acts as a high voltage power lines.

Temperature Controlled
Oscillator
Pradeep G.

O p* tone
with the temperature
^is circuit varies
which the input
at

germanium diode is held. Reverse re-

ohms to 10-kilohm,
varies between
when temperature
20SC and 80°C. (At higher
temperature germanium devices show
This variation of resistance changes
the tone of the output
cillatorwhich is
sound of the os-
built around the AF
sislance of DR25 diode varies from 500 very low resistance.) amplifier IC LM380. Instead of germa-
nium diode, base-emitter junction of
an ordinary medium-power transistor
such as AC128. AC188, 2N360or 2N610
can be used. This circuit will not work
with silicon diodes.
The circuit can be made light-con-
trolled by just replacing the diode with
an LDR or a reverse biased photodi-
ode. (Tested with LDR only.)
A 9V to 12V ordinary unregulated
power supply can be used for this cir-
cuit.

Eal ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Power Back-up For Digital Clocks
C. Sanjay

he usual method of using a 9V bat-

tery for badc-up in digital clocks, though
common, is not very desirable for many
reasons. The cost of the battery and the
very short life are some of them.
The circuit described here enables
us to get the required 9 V from just two
pcnlight cells. Though initially one has
to invest in this circuit, in the long run.
the lower cost of the cells and their
longer life more than compensate for
the cost of the circuit.
The circuit is a simple DC to DC
converter formed by the astable mul-
tivibrator (transistor T1 and T2) and the
slcp-up transformer X When the supply
1 .

due to the mains is present, Tl and T2

remain off because of reverse bias due
to the positive supply. During condi-
tions of power failure Tl and T2 to-
gether function as an astable multivi-
brator for 1 5 kHz. The stepped up volt-
age is by high-speed diodes
rectified
D6....D9. Diodes Dl and D2 serve to
isolate the base circuits of Tl and T2
while D3 and D4 protect Tl and T2
against reverse voltages and at the same
time help to get a belter wave shape.
The whole circuit can be made into
a compact unit and placed inside the
clock cabinet. The 9V battery holder can be removed and a 2-cell holder I used in its place.

Analogue Frequency Meter With

Over-range Indicator
Saravanan M. Mallesan

T* vcrsat ^c IC timer 55 5 has yet

another application as an analogue fre-
!

[
range indicator can be economically
added to the meter.
j

i
panel meter reading, i.e. a frequency of
42 Hz produces a meter reading of 42
quency meter. By making use of a 556 !
When this meter is switched to the |
microamperes. However, the meter
integrated circuit, which has two 555 |
50Hz range, any input frequency from j
reading is incorrect when the input
timers in a single package, an over- ' near DC to 50 Hz produces a correct i frequency exceeds 50 Hz, and there -

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1137

 *
INDICATOR

fore an LED over-range indicator flashes. Hz signal could be measured on the ated to produce the negative spikes that
j

If the range switch is then moved to a 500Hz range, where the meter would are needed to trigger the timer. For a
setting higher than the frequency, the show 30 microamperes. sine wave, or sawtooth input signal, a
LED stops flashing and the meter again Here the input signal is a rectangu- schmitt trigger might be used togener-
indicates correctly. For example, a 300 lar pulse train; the pulses are different!- ate the negative impulses.

Versatile Stroboscope
Murty Master

^^^troboscopc is an instrument in with a periodic motion as if they are at rest. But at a revolving state due tocen-
mcchanics. With the help of it one can rest. For example, wc can not sec the trifugal force the crack widens, and the
see objects which are moving rapidly tiny crack of a fan blade when it is in fault can be observed. The stroboscope

[ESI ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

light flashes at a frequency that syn- |
0.0 lpF disk capacitor. This circuit can Oscillating currents arc generated
chromscs with the revolutions of a wheel generate 1 .2 1 1/ to 12 kliz with proper in6 volts winding as per our adjust -
which seems to be at a still position. adjustments. ments and stepped up to light the tubc-
Prcsently. neon lamps are used in IC2 555 timer is used in mon-
'line light. The tubelight is focussed on ro-
stroboscopes. Their light is dim to dc- ostablc mode whose output pulse width taling tabic fan blades tin d the frequency
tcct the fault. This stroboscope isa low- can be varied from 100 microseconds and pulse width isadjusted so that both
cost device with adjustable frequency to 100 milliseconds with the help of are synchronised. This happens
and variable light on-off period (pulse 100k linear potentiometer and switch when the fan blades seem to be stand-
width). A nine inch tubelight is used for S2. still.

good illumination. The circuit uses easily The required pulse is taken from pin All resistors are of 1/2W. All ca-
available 555 timers. 3 of IC2 and connected to the base of pacitors arc disk type. A small heatsink
The IC1 555 timer is used as an transistor 2N3055 through limiting re- for transistor is necessary,
astablc multivibrator whose frequency sislor of 270 ohms. 0V-^V, 500mA Suggested modification: If anybody
can be varied over 1:10 range through transformer is used in reverse mode wants to use bigger tubelight, a suitable
100k linear potentiometer. Range se- (stcpup).One6Vtcrminalisconnccted driver stage and inverter transformer
lection is done by switch Si The . fre- to 1 2V DC supply and the other termi- arc essential,
quency output is taken from pin 3 and nal to the transistor collector. The
connected to pin 2 of IC2 through emitter is grounded. ;

In-Circuit Ohmmeter (Ohmmeter

for Electronic Circuits)
Kulwant Singh

YV occur when you gadgets, chances

often
hile servicing
feel the necessity
and extracting the components? Here is
|
of about 0.25 volts develops across the
a simple and effective remedy. All you I collector-base junction, and this is the
of chcckinga defective resistor, shorted need is two transistors and a few rests- basic ‘drug*,
diode, traasistor or a capacitor in a tors. The basic problem in checking the
circuit. Didn’t you desire that all could When an cm f of about 1.5 volts is value ofa resistor in a circuit is that our
have been done without switching on applied across the emitter-base junc- multimeter supplies about three volts
the gadget and without dcsoldering tion of a germanium transistor, an emf • across the test prods. This 3V is suffi-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS!] 39
 2

cicni to forward bias the diode or tran- DPUT switch converts the circuit to Ihe germanium transistor has a small
sistor junctions in the circuit, providing —
multimode high resistance/low resis- emitter-collector current flowing even
a stray current path between the check tance modes. with open base (infinite resistance). To
points. Thus the reading of the mul- For zero setting put your multime- avoid the problem considerably, a small-
timeter is that of effective resistance ter in the 0.25V range and connect it to
signal transistor is advised for this stage
and not of the actual resistor value. the meter. Now short the test prods 1 ,
(transistor T2), since a very low cur-
But if we apply around 0.25 V to the and adjust VR1 in low resistance mode rent of the order of 0.25 pA max. is the
test prods, the silicon junction is not to get an exact full scale deflection on requirement.
conductive, since it needs a minimum the meter; and your improved ohmme- So if you wish to build this double-
of 0.6 V to conduct. Most of our mod- tcr is ready. Surprisingly, you will find
mode ohmeter, an exclusive meter
em circuit boards lend to have silicon that you need not worry about the scale movement is recommended, whereon
devices as active elements. Therefore, at all! 1 use general SANWA P3 mul- you can make your own scales for the
it will ignore most ofthc common
junc- lilcstcr (175pA. 500-ohm movement) two modes. Or if you use your own
tions such iis those in bipolar transis- and its ohmmetcr scale is marked 10k/ multimeter, don’t mess-up the already
tors, signal diodes, rectifier diodes, 100-ohm in the middle, and in this burdened scale; rather prepare a con-
zeners, varactor diodes. FliT gates etc, mode it reads 1 k at this place, that is, a version table for the high resistance
of course, with the exception of germa- mid way scale, I /1 0th of the high resis-
mode.
nium devices which are becoming a tance range and 1 0 times the low range.
rare entity. 'Hie ohm meter now runs from lOohms
Note: The transistor used, especially
In the circuit, transistor T2 has its to 100k maximum measurements, which
emitter biased by 0.6V with the help of is by far the most prevalent range of T2. should have low leakage current.
potential divider. 1N4001 or any gen- resistances in general circuits.
AC 128 has overdue emitter collector
leakage current so fresh AC 1 28 should
eral-purpose silicon diode may be used In the high resistance mode, how-
be used.
for this purpose. The collector of T1 ever, the charactenst icsof transistor'll
being about 0.25V. the test prods
at play the key role. It is not possible U>
now develop 0.35V potential differ- provide any guidelines about the cali-
ence across them, which is insufficient bration of the scale, since it depends
for the silicon junctions to conduct. Pot upon the type of the transistor used as
VR1 flk) and VR2 (2.2k) are meant for amplifier, Moreover, the scale is not
zero setting in the low resistance anil linear since the transistor is working in
high resistance mode respectively. The the lowest pari of its characteristics.

14011 r.k FCT ROT/.CS PROJECTS

 ,

Priority Lamp System

Biju Kumar J.

T»
priority
circuit described here is a
lamp system which gives prior- I
closed and all relays are in ‘off’ state.
When two switches arc pressed in one
|

I
Select SPDT relay for dual
operation for priority in 'on’ and ‘off
mode

ity in switching. Switches SI to S4 are step, it checks priority and one relay I
for the connected lamps as shown in the

push-to-off type or pushbutton type, as I

turns *on\ I
circuit diagram.
desired. Normally, pushing of any switch I The circuit comprises five IGs. !C1 The input and output lines of the

5V

LAMP2
HO

HO S5ib>

1 TBKVHnl
T2
SL 100

to 1
LAMP3
HO

N/C S»<C>

CAMP4
HO
4 7408
f*C

n 7 3

lj
4 11

u r 10 S1-S4-
4 x PUSH-TO-OFF
SWITCHES
S5
4 POtF 2 WAVS
S5 W>
(a.
SWITCH
..d)

NOTE. IN THE SWITCH S5

POSITION 1
IS tOfi PWOftITY ON.
J'S FOR PRIORI TY -Of F

will turn ‘on’ the corresponding relay, I IC2 and IC4 (7408) arc quad 2-input !
digital section of this circuit can be
i.e. pushing of SI enables the npn tran- AND gates. IC3 (7432) is a quad 2- 1
connected to other digital circuits to
sistor T1 and hence relay RL1 operates. input OR gale. IC5 (7404) is a hex |
detect the input line from which the
The logic section is designed to get a inverterwhich can be replaced by IC first high occurs. It is also used to make
controlled high output. The pressing of 7400 with some modifications. The feed- non-interrupted multichannel system.
one switch disables the operation of all back loop between output and input When any one channel is in working
switches and results in priority in switch- lines of IC4 and IC5 gives controlled state the other channels are automati-
ing. In normal cases, all switches are high output for one relay. cally disabled.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1141

 Miniature 1C Organ
Pradeep G.

H ere
using 3*volt
Frequency
is a circuit for 3n IC organ
AF amplifier 1C TDA2822.
of the AF sound generated
depends on the capacitor between pin 1
and pin 7 of IC. When switches SI to
S10 are pressed, different audio tones
are heard from the speaker. SI to S10
are small push-lo-on switches. Pin 2 of
IC is connected to positive terminal of
3- volt battery. Two pen cells connected
in series can be used to power this

circuit. Satisfactorily loud sound will

he obtained at 3-volt supply. 8-pin
TDA2&22 costs around Rs 25 (16-pin
TDA2822 IC is also available in the
market Don’t use that one!). C11.CI2 arc parallel combinations of values,
Note: Capacitors C6.C8.C9.CI0. two or three capacitors to obtain the odd

Quartz Watch Tester

Manoj and Dinesh Badgujar

A ny mechanical watch can he

easily checked, whether it is working
or not, by listening to the sound of the
movement of wheels and springs inside
the watch- But in case of quartz elec-
tronic watches (especially without the
seconds arm) it is very difficult to say as
thesedo not produce any mechanical
movcmcmsound.lnsuch case, a quartz
tester provides the solution.
The circuit uses audio amplifier IC
TBA810 and its biasing components.
But the main thing here is to make a
coil, which can pick up the pulses (sig-

nal) produced by quartz.

In working condition, the quartz
crystal gives out pulses to drive the
watch, i.e. to drive the ‘hands’ of the
watch. Since these pulses arc out of au-
dio range, wc cannot hear them. ironnailcan pick up these pulses. These 8 of IC through coupling capacitor C7.
But here, the coil made by winding pulses are fed to the preamplifier built Further, it is amplified by TBA810,
a copper wire having 38-42 SWG on an around transistor T1 . It is then fed to pin which gives a good clicking sound.

1 SHI ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 .

For testing, just keep your quartz the battery condition of the watch. It I
turns do not overlap. The insulation of
*aich on the coil and you will hear the draws very little current (10-15 mA). I the copper win* should be of good quality,
‘click-click’ sound. For optimum per- Note that, one cannot replace the f We used the copper wire used in trans-

formance, adjust the position of the coil by any type of mic. Care should be 1

former windings.
watch on the coil. The circuit also checks taken while winding th^coil so that the I

Automatic Control for Sitout Lights

Swayajith $.

T»
light in
circuit is for controlling the

the sitout of our house. The

i

I
These two collectors are the input of
XOR gate. When one of the transistor is
j

|
switched ‘OFF*
LDRsshouldbeplacedinoconven-
light is when it is dark
switched *ON’ i cut off and the other is at ‘ON’ state, ient place free from damage. LDR1
j

and is switched ‘OFF when everybody there is a 1. 0 input to the XOR gate or j
should be kept outside the room in a
in the house goes to sleep. vice- versa. In both the eases the output dark place. At night, LDR2 should be
The circuit consists of two L.DR is at high state and the transistor T3 is kept inside the room. It should be placed

controlled switches and a gate inter- cut off. hence there no current flow
is outside during day time,

faced relay circuit. LDR1 senses the

1

through the transistor T4. At this state. The main advantage of this circuit
presence of sunlight outside the house.
'

the relay is not energised. We can con- is that one can do some saving in his

4.
1.

while LDR2 senses the light inside the nect the relay ( two- pole, two-way) such
1

electricity bill as the light will remain

1

house. Transistors Tl and T2 conduct '

as to ‘ON’ the sit out light. off during day time.

only when both the I.DRs are in light.
(
When both the LDRs are in light or , The resistance R1 can be replaced
At this time, the voltage at the collector j
in the dark, the output of the XOR gate |
with potentiometer with a series resis-
ts 0 or low stale. When both the LDRs i
will be low. As a result transistors T3 |
lance of 4.7k to control the light condi-
arc in the dark, Tl and T2 are incut-off j
and T4 conducts and the relay is ener- j
tions.

stateand the collectors are at high state, i gised. Now the sitout lamp will be |

XOR party or a film show. When he returns

Readers’ Comments: write-up is 7486, which is an
late in the night, he requires light in
gate!
With XOR gate 74 86 the relay the sitout. As per the circuit, he will
2. ( 1

remainsWmostoftheday, resulting have to enter the house in dark to put

‘Automatic Control for Sitout Lights’
circuit idea in July*92 issue has some in unwanted loss of power.
on the sitout light.

3. The circuit does not take into

As per the write-up, LDR1 should
shortcomings:
shown consideration the case when the owner be kept in a dark place and LDR2
In the circuit, the gate
moved accordingly to sense light. It is
is XNOR while IC mentioned in the goes out early in the evening for a

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS HE 3
 ,

tedious and senseless. night, he should close the switch XOR while the gate in the published
n view of the above shortcom ings
I before going out. When day light fades, circuit was an XNOR (74266).
we propose certain modifications: LDR1 is in dark and hence tran- The second point is a fact. I’m
Instead of the XNOR gate, two sistor T1 is off, but due to the switch- sorry it didn't attract my attention.
XOR gates (7486) can be coupled to ing-on of th^low-value resistance, The remedy lies in replacing the pnp
remedy the loss of power in the relay. transistor TIT is ‘on’ and the gate (T2) transistor with an npn transistor
The relay will be energised when the senses (1,0) state, driving the relay with a biasing resistor.
output of the gate is low and the bulb circuit. The th i rd poi n t is ndeed valuable.
i

should be connected in such a way Here the point to be noted is that It can be incorporated in my original
that it glows only when the relay is en- the LDRs can be permanently posi- circuit using an npn transistor in-
ergised. The point to be noted is that tioned —LDR2 inside the house to sense stead of pnp.
a TTL gate can source only 400 pA light condition inside the house and The LDRs need not be moved as
while it can sink 16 mA. LDR1 outside the house at a place mentioned in the write-up. The LDRs
To rectify the defects 3 and 4 men- where it can sense daylight. should be kept in fixed positions ex-
tioned above, a low-value resistance ARUN KUMAR R JAYS C. , posed to day/room light.
in series with a switch should be con- Changanacherry
nected across LDR2 (which is placed
inside the room). When the owner The author, Mr Swayajith S., replies:
goes out to return only late in the The gate shown in my circuit was

Simple Power Supply

Resumption Alarm
D. S. Vidyasagar

o nee again the most popular timer

chip IC555 has proved that
tions are limited only to the ingenuity
its applica-

of the user.
The circuit shown here is very simple.
!C1 is wired in a special kind of mode.
When power supply resumes, pin 2 of
IC1 grounded through Cl and pin 3
is

goes high. This makes reset pin 4 to go

high for about 10 seconds. When the
capacitor Cl charges to two-third of the
supply voltage, output of ICl goes low, Thus, the speaker produces an alarm again an alarm is produced.
grounding the reset pin 4 and thus dis- for about 10 seconds. The circuit can be constructed on a
abling the entire circuit. After 10 seconds. ICl restores its general-purpose veroboard. A regulated
The alarm circuit is wired around a stable state (i.e. output goes low). +9V DC power supply is required for

second timer. IC2. Here it is used as an Capacitor Cl discharges quickly through the circuit.

astable muliivibrator, the frequency of pin 7, and the circuit becomes ready for The LTD serves as an indicator.

which is about 1 kHz. This 1C is en- the next detection, since pin 2 of ICl is

abled when the output of ICl goes high. low. Thus, when the power interrupts

1441 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 1/86400 Hz Generator
Harinder Singh

T bis circuit
every 24 hours from a source of 1Hz
provides one pulse
,

input clock pulse, which is commonly

available through a digital dock. It can
be used to provide am/pm indication in
those digital docks which do not have
this facility, or it may be utilised to ad-
vance the date of an electroniccalendar j

every day. It can also be used to trigger

an alarm at a determined time without
fail.
j

The present circuit divides the

number of incoming clock pulses by a
preset value using a binary counter. |

There are some clocks which do not

involve the use of 501 iz or 601 Iz pulse. !

In such a case the circuit has to be made

to work on battery and not on mains (every 24 hours) at the output of IC2. I input AND gate,
supply. The input pulses to IC1 is given AND gates arc used to reset binary Due to low power consumption and
by 'seconds' display of digital clock. |
counters after a preset number of clock wide operating voltage (5V-12V) of
thus providing a 1 Hz pulse to the input pulses which have been counted by CMOS ICs used, the circuit can be
of IC1. The output of IC1 is connected ! them, IC CD4040 is a 2-stage binary
1 operated off the supply of most clocks,
to the input of IC2 for a net division of l counter and IC CD4020 is a 14-$tagc I
This compact circuit can be fitted in a
86400, i.e.providingasinglcpulseaday binary counter. IC 4082 is a dual, four- I
table-top or a digital wall clock.

Programmable Frequency
Multiplier Using PLL 565
Lancy Silveira

mong its many diverse applica- ’

voltage range of 6V to 12V. It has a |
It is selected at the centre of the an-
tions, the phase locked loop (PLL) i highly stable centre frequency, selected ticipated input signal frequency range,
j

exhibits tremendous flexibility in fre- by an external resistor (Rl) and capaci- The capture range of this feedback
j

quency multiplication. The 565 IC can tor (Cl), which is given by > control system is decided by the low-
be used over the frequency range of 1

1.2 pass filter made up of capacitor C* and

f_ uz ,

0.001 Hz to 500 kHz, and an operating I 4R1C1 internal resistor R. C* must be selected

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS HE 5
 C*= 0.001 nF
Using these values wc can
check the input frequencies up
to 15 kHz and multiplying factor up to
33.
Frequency multiplication is achieved
by breaking the feedback loop of the
PLL at the VCO output and inserting a
frequency divider mechanism made up
of a CD4017 decade counter with one
of the ten outputs selecied by means of
a thumbwheel switch. The divided VCO
output is then fed to the phase compara-
tor. This is locked to the input fre-

quency. Thus the VCO now runs at a

multiple of the input frequency. The
multiplying factor is decided by the
frequency divider and hence determined
by the thumbwheel switches.
Allowing a maximum multiplying
factor of 99 (which can be tailored to

such that the cut-off frequency of the Please note, the value of R1 gener- suit one's requirements), the maximum
low-pass filter is above the maximum between 2k and 20k.
ally lies
input frequency must be limited to

anticipated frequency difference be- While testing in EFY lab the fol- 5kHz so that the maximum VCO fre-

tween the input signal frequency and lowing values of variable were used: quency 495 kHz, which is below the
is

V CO (voltage controlled osci llaior) free R =1 1 Ok, operational limit of 500 kHz for PLL

running frequency. Cl= 0.002pF i

565.

Author’s comments
These should together be connected to The circuit is also found to perform

There is a minor correction required in the pole of thumbwheel switch SI which satisfactorily with CMOS PLL4046.
my ‘Programmable Frequency
circuit is also connected to pin 5 of ICl This . Initial attem pts to obi ain a stable circuit
Multiplier Using PLL565’ in EFY resets 1C2 and IC3 every time the se- may be carried out using a single di-
Sept. ’92 issue. lected count has been reached. Else, vider.
Pin number 15 of both IC2 and IC3 after the first cycle, a constant division LANCY SILVEIRA
should not be connected to ground. factor of 1 00 will prevail. Bombay

Auto-off for Cassette Players

Sukhpal

TVL common stereo cassette play- but do not have the auto power-off sette players having an operational
2V DC
ers have an auto-stop deck mechanism , function. This circuit is meant for cas- voltage of 1 with the facility of

146 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

|
LED type VU meter. When the sound exponential signal which is passed cuit shown in dotted lines is not

signal stops, the power is automatically through IC 555 (working as schmitt required. So first try without this cir-

switchcdoffartera delay of approxi- trigger) to convert it into a digital cuit.

matcly 30 seconds. signal for proper functioning of the For setting 1 -megohm pot. turn it
3.

With sound present, the LEDs of relay. to zero resistance and connect the LED

VU meler emit light. The I.DR on re- For setting and construction of the to emit light. Then connect the main

ceiving light from LEDs gives a high circuit: circuit to 1 2 V. Now start increasing the
pulse to transistorT1 which charges 1. Take connections of only first resistance of pot until ihc relay clicks

capacitor Cl. The slow discharging of LEDof the VU meter. For arrangement ‘on’. In this circuit the approximate

the capacitor provides a delay. Hence of mounting of LDR and LED together, value of VRl is 100k.

different values of Cl give delays of place them face to face and w rap with 4. A good rcaly should be used with
different durations. Charging and dis- 3-4 folds of black paper. a covered mechanism placed far away
charging of the capacitor results in an 2. In some cassette players, the cir- from the main circuit.

Electronic Changer
Dhirendra Prasad

Jn many situations, whenever a sequence ‘travels’ through each Iran- T3 off and Tl. 17 on.

running light effect is requited, a wooden sistor. Let us assume that Tl is off and The transistor that is off has an in-

whccl switch is needed. The wheel is T2, T3 are on. As T3 is on its collector creased collector voltage which is used
driven by a motor which normally voltage is low, so the base voltage of Tl totriggertheSCRs.Thctriggcringvolt-
connecLs three switches, one by one is low as long as capacitor C3 is dis- age is minimum toavoid
adjusted to ihc
producing a running light effect.Such a charged. Now capacitor C3 charges false triggering. The SCRs get off by

switching system is very bulky and slowly through Rl, as a result of which natural commutation. One end of each

troublesome. base voltage of Tl rises. As soon as it lamp is directly connected to the 230V
Here is a simple circuit with a very crosses the cut-in voltage. Tl turns on AC supply while the other ends of the
few components but which is equally and its collector voltage drops. This bulbs are connected to SCRs.
effective. lower voltage applies a negative bias The SCR switching option is for
Inthiscircuit all transistors remain through capacitor Cl lo the base of T2 low-power lamps (less than 100 watts)
on except one which is off. This off to turn it off. Now the next sequence is or else we can use relay switches.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS lEEzl

 Sometimes when we switch-on the quence is held up. In this ease, any one ground. A pushbutton switch can be
circuit all three transistors remain on, ! transistor is required to be turned off connected between base and ground
as a result of which running off se- momentarily by shorting its base to the of first transistor for this purpose.

Transistorised Warning Alarm

Pradeep G.
he transistorised warning alarm
described here can be used with burglar
alarms, fire alarms or with any other
security device to give an audible indi-
cation.
The circuitemploys five ordinary
transistors. Transistors T1 and T2 form
a low- frequency astable multivibrator.
Its frequency can be varied from 1 IIz

to 1 0 Hz by adjusting VR 1 . [

Transistors T4 and T5 form a com-

plimentary pair AF oscillator. Collec-
tor supply to transistor T4 is given
through T3. T3 switches off the oscilla-
tor according to the multivibrator fre- by VR2 and the ‘speed’ of beeping by ordinary 6V to 12V battery or regu-
quency. VR 1 . The circuit can be easily assembled lated power supply can be used,
The tone of the sound can be varied I on a general-purpose veroboard. An

Electronic Number Scoring Game

Prodip Banerjee

JJere an interesting electronic

is you hours of fun. You can play this circuit uses two 555 ICs to generate
number scoring game which can give game alone or with some friends. The 1 clock pulse and a decade counter to

lEEl ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

l
 LED 4
1E0 7 LE0 10
ment of LEDs to show the signs +, -, x
and 4- is very important. It should he
done according to the figure.
LEO 5 LEO 8 Several players can participate, each
having one chance to operate SI and S2
alternately.
NOTE:- LEOI LE012-5MM SQUAHE LEDS
01 3-0 1 4-CIHCULAR LEDS Scoring: Suppose you have +5, -2
si S2
PUSH-TO-ON PUSH-TOON

generate mathematical signs. A BCD LEDs ‘run’ so fast that all LEDs appear and x7 in three consecutive chances.
counter followed by a seven-segment to glow at the same time. But when SI Your score is (+5-2)x7 = 2 1 . In th is way
LED display driver is used to generate is off only one set of LEDs glows show- your score is continuously updated with
numbers. ing a particular sign. Similarly, in every chance. But suppose you get 4-
IC2 is a decade counter having ten FND500 display numbers 0 to 9 appear 4. In this case the pattern of scoring is

outputs but here only four outputs arc so rapidly that the display always shows entirely left to the players' choice. They
utilised. It is driven by clock pulse from 8 but when S2 shows a particu-
is off it can approximate the scores like 214-4
IC1. When switch SI is on the set of lar number from 0 to 9. The arrange- in their own way.

Readers’ Comments:
I was surprised see the circuit of
to
TSlectronic Number Scoring Game’
published in EFY Aug.’J# issue. Though
the idea behind the game was excel-
lent, the component count was quite
high.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS WEI

 The decade counter-cum-7-segment S2 and all other connections of CD4017 replies:
display driver CD4033 alone can .replace will remain the same as published Modifications suggested by Mr Sharma
ICa 4518 and 4511. Also there is no already. are absolutely correct. I am thankful
need of two 555 ICs as is clear in the HEMANT SHARMA to him for the same.
above circuit.
Guwahati
Specifications of Rl, Cl, C2, SI, The author, Mr Pradip Banerjee,

Rain Sound Generator

Pradeep G
T» circuit described here is

and uses ordinary components. It

simple
com-
One is a variable
prises two oscillators.
low -frequency oscillator using UJT
2N2646. A single UJT can be oscillated
without using a tank coil. Electrical
characteristics of UJT arc quite differ-
ent from ordinary bipolar transistors'. If
ordinary bipolar transistors are used at
Icastiwotransistorsarc necessary for os-
cillations. otherwise tank circuit has to
be used (except in phase-shift oscilla-

tors. but in thus case very weak oscilla- conduction of UJT. successfully tested with a powersupply
tion is obtained). In this way a new type of sound, i.c, unit using Q-9V. 500mA step-down trans-
The second oscillator uses IC555 in the sound of rain, is generated from the former. four 1N4001 diodes and a
asutble mode. But if UJT does not speaker. lOOOpK 16V filter capacitor.
conduct, pin 4 of IC1 become inactive. A simple 9 V DC unregulated power An 8-ohm. 5cm 0.5-watt speaker
So the operation of 555 depends on the supply can be used. This circuit was was used w-ith the prototype.

producing any kind of sound. Miss Tison to test the circuit with a
ALISHA TISON new IC555, check UJT 2N2646 for its
Readers’ Comments: Chadrapore pin connections. DC resistance between
1 assembled the circuit of 'Rain Sound The author, Mr Pradeep G, replies: bl and b2 is about 5-kilohm when
Generator’ published in EFY Sep.^ The circuithas been tested with all emitter is open. Also check emitter-
issue. I have checked all the connections the specified values for the components base junction for forward and reverse
carefully, but the circuit is not and it is working well. So I advise biasing.

1501 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 Double-Tune Car Reverse Horn
Pradeep G.

cvcral circuits for musical car

(
top position, pi n 9 of IC is connected to switches off. Any low-wattage, 8-ohm
j

boras have been published in EFY but ,

positive supply (common poles of the speaker can be used. By using a 9-volt
can generate two types of
this circuit i switch are connected to each other). or 12-volt battery eliminator, the cir-
—
sounds one a pleasant ‘ding-dong’ bell ,
and a bird’s sound is generated. When
(

{
cuit can be used as a door-bell,
sound and the other a sweet chirping ,
SI is in bottom position, pin 10 is Readers are advised to ask for the
sound of a bird. i grounded, and a ‘ding-dong’ sound is ! ‘dual melody generator IC’ from com-

M w

Here the sound generator is IC generated. '

ponent shops to make this circuit be-
(

HT82D whose operating voltage range After moving selector switch SI, i
cause some dealers may not recognise
is 2 to 5 volts. DPDT switch SI in the the push-to-on switch S2 has to be op- 1 it from its number IIT82D.
circuit selects the sound. When it is in erated. When S2 is released the circuit

Traffic-Lights Controller
R. Shankar

TPhe circuit given here is a substi- (CD4017) is a Johnson counter. N 1

-N3 gates N4 to N6 causes the respective
tute of old mechanical traffic- lights con- are wired as an astable multivibrator triac to fire.
I

trollerswhich arc not very reliable. The whose time period can be adjusted Thus, the ratios of the time periods
circuit’s timing and sequential opera- between 1 second and 10 seconds with for the lamps in the sequence 0:G:0:R
tions are done by two CMOS ICs while VR1. The decade outputs of IC1 arc ,
are 1:4: 1:4.
the actual power switching is done by w ired such that when 00 or Q5 is high. j
Resistors RIO to R12 and capaci-
triacs. the output N5 goes low. Similarly,
of •

tors C4 to C6 arc absolutely neces-

A 10 V negative power supply is ob- the outputs of N4 and N6 become low (
sary, these avoid spurious triggerings
tained directly from the mains by means when Ql to 04 and 06 to 09 become of the triacs which may hamper traffic

of D1 Rl,
, D2 and Cl. Gates N1 to N6 low respectively. Since we have a nega- flow.
constitute IC2 (CD4049) while IC1 live supply, a low output of any of the Though only one lamp for each colour

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS HED

 D1
PKASt BY 127

is given in the circuit, many more could mum number oflOOW lamps that could Since the whole circuit works on
be paralleled, as long as the total cur- be paralleled is eight. However, proper AC mains, special care should be taken
rent does not exceed 4 Amps for each hcatsinking of the lriacs should be car- during construction and handling.
colour. For a 400V, 4A tnac, the maxi- ried out at this heavy load.

Sophisticated Ni-Cd Charger

Kalpesh T. Dalwadi

^Jowadays, Ni-Cd cells are com- pendingon theirusc(and misuse), these good Ni-Cd charger has become a ne-
monly used in household goods. De- need to be charged quite often. Hence a cessity.

1521 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 .

The commonly used Ni-Cd batter-

Condi- RED YELLOW IndkilloD
ies, which are rated at 500mA/hour, LED
tion LF.D
need to be charged at 50mA constant
current.The circuit presented here ill 1. ON OFF Normal battery charging

2. ON ON There may be revere connection of the bi fiery.

charge at a lime seven Ni-Cd pencil Check whether the bitter)* is connected correctly.
cells connected in series or a 9V Ni-Cd If il isconnected properly then battery is short and
battery. It will indicate faults such as is sol usable.

ON Remain* ‘ON* for Low voltage battery. Charging may be

reverse polarity, a shorted battery, a 3.
sometime and then coariued.
high resistance battery, or a low volt-
goes ‘OFF*.
age battery through just two LEDs. 4. Remains *ON’ OFF High resistance battery, indicates that battery is

After the normal charging time of 14 for sometime not usable.

and ihen goes
hours, it will disconnect the battery but
‘OFF*
shall start trickle charging it. thus en-
suring that the battery does not lose its
'

and C shown in the circuit, the oscilla- marked terminals and proceed as fol-

charge. Also, after the battery has been tor oscillates at about 1/6 I Iz. and the lows:

charged fully, it will give aural indica- output pin 3 goes high after 14 hours.
at 1. Connect a multimeter in series

tion. I'he darlington drive built around with the battery. Keeping it on 500mA
In spite of perform ing all these func- traasLstors T1 and T2 switches on relay range, switch thepower supply on. The
tions the circuit is very simple. It RL1 which disconnects the batteries multimeter should show a flow of around

comprises a constant current source of from the current source. At the same 57mA. This value may slightly differ

50mA, a 14-hour timer and a compara- time the buzzer starts ringing, indicat- depending on the tolerance of R14.
tor. ing that the battery is fully charged. 2. Connect the battery by reversing

LM317 (IC2) provides a very stable TheCl-Rl combination automatically the polarity. litis must satisfy condi-

current source. Output current at termi- resets IC1 at power-on. tion 2 of the Table.
nal Vout of IC2 is given by I - 1C3 forms a simple comparator. Volt- 3. Now discharge this battery by

1 .2V/R 14. For the given value of resis- age at its pin 2 is set to 0.4V with VR1 shorting it and then again connect it in

tor R14, output current is 50mA, irre- Its pin 3 isconnected across battery, but the circuit. This mast satisfy condition

spective of the battery voltage. Diodes in normal condition, it remains tied to 3 of the Table.
D1 and D2 prevent the battery dis- Vcc through resistor R3. RIO pro- 4. Taking a shorted battery and con-

charge during mains failure. Resistor vides some hystcrisis. necting it in the circuit will satisfy

R7 along with D2 provides trickle charg- The tabic shows the conditions when condition 2 of the Fable. In case of a

ing, in case the battery remains unat- different faults are detected. high-resistance battery, condition 4 of

tended after a lapse of 1 4 hours. If you wish to charge a 6V lead-acid the Tabic must be satisfied.

Timer CD4060 (IC1) is a 14-stage battery (for Bike) reduce R14 to 2.2 If your constructed circuit passes all

counter with an on-chip oscillator. The ohms. 2 watts and mount IC2 on a the above tests, it is ready for use.

oscillator frequency is given as heatsink. No other changes are required. The charger should cost you around
F-1/2.2RC, where R=R11+R12 and To test the circuit, connect Ni-Cd Rs 200 only.
C=C2+C3+C4. With the values of R battery across the positive and negative

Three Bit Flash Analogue to

Digital Converter
Rajesh Bawankule

TL
fastest
simplest in concept and the
type of analogue to digital con-
I after the propagation delay lime of
comparators and the encoding logic
This circuit needs just three com-
parators and no combinational logic
The beauty of the circuit lies
gates. A typical conversion time is 33
circuitry.
verter is flash type converter. The en-
in the digital to analogue conversion
tire digital output word is present just ns.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1153

 lively.

Now voltage at inverting terminal

of A1 rises to 3 Vin/7, i.e. 2.1 4 volts and

hence output of A1 becomes low. giv-

ing us output indirect binary 010. When

input goes above 3 Vin/7. output of A1
also becomes high giving binary output
Oil.
Similar process Is followed in higher
input voltages, giving us exact 3-bit bi-
nary. Values of all resistors are calcu-
lated by considering the increments in
reference voltages with respect to out-
puts of other comparators.
Analogue switches CD4066 are used
to provide exact 12 volts.
In the table outputs at expected and
observed values are given, which clearly
shows accuracy of this crude circuit
idea.
The voltage divider used to get fixed
reference voltages is shown in figure.
In this circuit, odd values of resistors
are obtained by connecting twoor more
resistors in parallel or series.

This circuit can be further extended

as follows:
1. Bit length can be taken to higher
bits. An 8-bit circuit will require just

eight comparators whereas normal flash

achieve analogue to digital conversion gets 2 Vin/7, i.e. 1.42 volts which is ADC requires 255 comparators,
action. achieved by dividing 4 Vtw/7 into two 2. Instead of providing derived fixed
In this circuit, the reference volt- parts by using voltage divider compris- reference voltages we can obtain them
ages on inverting inputs of the com- ing R5 with R6 and R7 in parallel. using only one fixed reference, i.e, 12
parators are not fixed hut dynamic. To the third comparator 4 Viv/7, i.e. volts, and different resistance values.
They change depending upon the state 2.857 volts is directly given. I
This will simplify the circuit as well as
of outputs of other comparators. When input voltage is zero, outputs reduce loading errors.
Non-inverting inputs of compara- of all comparators are zero, giving bi- 3. Peculiarly, this circuit employs
tors Al, A2 and A3 are given input nary 000. When input voltage crosses 2 N -1 levels just to get 111 at full scale

voltage. 2 N levels also can be employed.

1

voltage of 5 volts maximum. Inverting Vin/7 level, output of A l becomes high,

tcrminalofAl isgiven VrN,/7,i.e.0.7l4 giving us binary 001. When input goes In that case increments in voltage will
voltswhere Vim is the full scale voltage slightlyabove 2 Vw/7, output of com- be Vin/8 instead of Vln/7.
which is 5 volts in this circuit. This is paralor A2 becomes high which makes 4.Nortonop-ampscanbeutilisedin
achieved by providing 2 Vin/7 to volt- switch SI on, thus connecting the other place of normal op-amps to simplify
age divider formed by R1 with R2, R3 end of R4 to +12 volts. This end was the circuit,
and R4 in parallel. previously connected to ground effee- 1

Programmable Digital Timer

P. Satya N. Reddi

T. circuit presented here

used for setting time intervals in the
can be range of 1 to 99 minutes. The
docs not use large resistors or capaci-
circuit tors to obtain the liming interval. In-
stead, it uses the 50Hz mains fre-

[EHI ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

qucncy as a reference. The mains fre- I
val. 1
put of gale N5 goes high. The borrow
qucncy is fairly accurate for this appli- To preset the timer, SI. a DPDT pin (13) of IC5 is used to reset the latch
cation. switch, is thrown into Preset position N5-N6 completion of timing in-
after
The mains frequency is shaped up after a momentary push of the Reset terval. The borrow output of 1C5 goes

by schmitt-trigger gate Nl to obtain a switch S2. The display now shows (X). low when IC5 and 1C6 are on their
square wave. This 50 Hz square wave is Press S3 or S4 until the display shows terminal count. This output goes low on
divided by IC1, JC2, IC3 and IC4. Asa the number of minutes you want to the high to low transition of the clock
result a single pulse per minute is ob- time. Throw SI back to Operate posi- and the output of gate N5 goes low de-
tained at pin 12 of IC4. tion. Pressing S5 once sets the nand energising the relay.
The heart of the circuit consists of latch formed around N5 and N6. The During the timing operation, the
two presettable synchronous up-down output of gate N5 goes high and satu- display stays on for about 30 seconds at

BCD counters (IC5 and IC6) in cas- rates transistor T1 and the relay is ener- the beginning of each minute being
cade. Two seven-segment LED dis- gised. timed. The display shows the number
plays are included to indicate the num- ICS and 1C6 start counting in the of minutes left in the timing operation,
her of minutes left in the timing inter- downcountingmodeassoonasthcout-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS US
 Multi-Pattern Running Light
K. P. Viswanathan

unninc lichis effect is not a new !

right. All the lights arc of ordinary |
withVRl.
idea for a hobbyist. But this eight-chan*
j
230V bulbs controlled by triacs.
j
IC2 is a divide by 16 counter and its
nel running light becomes unique as The heart ofthecircuit is a serial-in- outpul pins arc 12, 9, 8 and 11. By
four running patterns can be selected. ;
parallel-out shift register IC 74164 (1C3). conneciing these outputs through ro-
In the first pattern, out of eight lights, When clock pulses are applied at pin 8, tary switch to inputs of IC3, fourdiffer-
altematc lights go ‘on* and ‘off. In the for every clock pulse, output at pin 3 is ent patterns can be selected as men-

*1

SECONOW TRAWQHMkA

second pattern, two adjacent lights go shifted to pin 4 and output at pin 4 is tioned above.

‘on’ and the following two go ‘off. shifted to pin 5 and so on, as per the Switching circuits constitutes tran-
This pattern is shifted from left to right, logic state given at input pins 1and 2. i
sistors and triacs. As output of 1C3
In the third pattern, four adjacent lights An oscillator is a wire around IC1 1 cannot drive triacs directly, 8 transis-
go ‘on’ and these are shifted to right. In (555) and the square pulses are applied tors (BC148) arc used for driving 8
the fourth pattern all the eight lights go toIC2(7493)and 1C3 (74164). The fre- macs. Triacs of 4 Amps, 400 PI V (peak
‘on’ and ‘off one by one from left to quency of oscillations can be varied inverse voltage) can handle 30 nos. of

[Hal ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 15 watt bulbs with nroper heatsink. 9V 5()0mA step down transformer which regulator 7805 (IC4) for proper opera-
Power supply .s taken from 9V-0 after rectification and filtering goes to lion of TTL ICs.

Readers’ Comments: The author Mr K.P. Vishwanathan,

interested in assembling the inform me:
,

I am
circuit of “Multi Pattern Running Light’
CanI useIC 74154 with 16 outputs replies:
IC 75154 cannot be used in place of IC
published in EFY Oct-’92 issue. instead of IC 74164? .

the changes in the 74 164 as the former is a 4-line-to- 16-

While thanking the author for this What will be
7 line decoder and the latter is a serial-
wonderful project, I request him to circuit if it is possible
K. RAJ A RAM in-parallel-out shift register.
Mysore

Eight-Sound Generator
Rajesh Shincfe
ates
T».
eight
circuit described here gener-
types of sounds, viz, two
types of machine gun sounds, two types
of bombarding, dual tone melody, game
sound, animal sound and rifle sound.
It operates on 3V battery. Total
cost of the circuit is around Rs 35
without speaker, switches and power
supply.
The tunes can be played by rotating
thumbwheel switch SI (single-pole, 8-
way .selector) followed by a push-to-on
switch as shown.
HT2880 is a CMOS IS} ROM chip
designed for toy applications. It can
also be used for door-bells, alarms etc. ration, amplify the signal generated anywhere.
The transistors T1 and T2, which arc at pin 4. Note that pin nos 3, 5. 16. 17
connected in a darlington pair con figu- and 18 of the IC are not connected

A Novel Display
D.S. Vidyasagar

T«re are many display circuits Lighting decoration broadly con- sists of many outputs driving the load-
already published in El-T. But this cir- sists of two main categories — the run- lamps; all of them go high one after
cuit is very special in its own way ning effect and the spellar effect. Run- another, and eventually all outputs be-
because it contains all the facilities ning effect is well-know n to every elec- come high simultaneously showing a
required for any type of decoration. tron ics hobby ist. The spellareffcct con- complete display. Thereafter ail the

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1157

outputs go low and the cycle is re- result the four outputs sequentially go puts of 102 low initially.
peated. Both these effects can be ob- high. Thus a running effect is obtained. The outputs 0 1 to 04 of IC2 can be
tained by using this circuit with just a Now keeping switch SI in position used to drive a general-purpose relay
flap of a switch! of 1C2 connected to pin 13. driver circuit. Since the circuit operates
2. pin 7
•
is

As shown in the circuit. IC1 is wired as Pins 3 and 4 are held high and pin 9 is on +12 V DC. any general-purpose power
a free-running aslable multivibrator whose grounded. As pins 3 and 4 are high, all supply can he used to power the unit.
frequency can be controlled through the outputs of IC2 go high one by one
Note: advised that while c-
It is
VR1. This changes the speed of run- on each consecutive clock pulse. When
hanging switch S 1 power supply of the
ning or spelling effect. The output of 04 goes high, pin 7 of IC2 also goes .
,

circuit should be kept off However to

1C1 is directly connected to the clock high. ITiis makes all the outputs low
avoid this problem, as IC2 is a CMOS
input pin 6 of IC2 which is a CMOS because all the parallel inputs are now
IC, it can be replaced with TTL shift
shift register. grounded. Thus the operation repeals register 1C 7495 by making minor modi-
If switch Si is kept in position 1, it
(ad infinitum), and the spellar effect fications in the circuit,
connects pins 3 and 4 of IC2 to pin 1 3 of is obtained.
the same IC. Also, pin 0 is held high. So more than four outputs are re-
If
binary number 1000 is loaded in the quired. then more CD4035 ICs can be
register. This causes initially 01 to go cascaded in the same fashion. Only
high and Q2.Q3 and 04 low. Now as their clock inputs should be driven from
Q4 is connected back to pin 3 and 4, the the same clock source in parallel.
number 000 is circulated continuously
1
The reset switch S2 should be pushed
through the registers in 1C2 and as a on, in ‘run’ mode to bring all the out-

lETH ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

I
 Audio Running Lights
Pradeep G.

JJcrc is a circuit for audio running |

been used. The circuit employs seven- At low audio level, zener diodes
j

lights which uses filament bulbs in- channel darlington array IC ULN2004 having low breakdown voltages will
stead of LEDs. Note, no special run- '
and seven reverse biased zener diodes |
conduct and corresponding lamps will
ning light ICs (such as LB 1405) have | having different breakdown voltages.
'

light up. When output level increases,

the other diodes will also conduct.
As a you can see a very fine
result,

display of ‘moving’ light bulbs from

top tobottom or from left to right, as per

their arrangement.
AT input signal fed via capacitor Cl
is rectified by diodes D8 and 1)9. This
rectified audio signal is given to the
cathodes of all zener diodes,
i Adjust VR 1 . for satisfactory opera-
tion of the IC. At minimum input the
first lamp will glow and at maximum
input all the bulbs will light up.
Note: Zener diode values are not critic
I cal. If the given values are not availa-
. ble, nearest available, values may be
! used.

Hearing Aid
Kalpesh Dalwadi

T»
market are
hearing aids available in the
fully transistorised and gen-
in their simplest

AC
from its

amplifier with a gain of lOO.Op-

non-inverting ing to the condenser microphone, and
capacitor Cl is used for coupling. Fi-

The circuit
erally use a single pen cell. amp A1 forms the first -stage amplifier. nally. transistor Tl drives the earphones.

presented here uses an IC for the same Second-stage amplification is given This circuit is small enough to fit

purpose which gives better sensitivity through op-amp A2. Hence the total into amatch-box as it uses only one IC
and performance. I gain is 10,000. and few discrete components. It is very
R R2 sensitive and can pick even weak sig-
1

Operational amplifiers are used here Resistors 1 and provide bias-

i nals from a cir-
cular area of over
ten metres diame-
j

ter. This circuit

I

|
can also work as
l
a baby- phone by
using a speaker
instead of an ear-
phone.
The circuit
1

costs around
I
Rs35.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 159 I

 Readers' Comments: The author, Mr Kalpesh Dalwadi, re- No other change is required what-
plies: soever. In fact my prototype is work-
Hearing Aid circuit published in 1 used a condenser microphone (34K8P) ing very satisfactorilyand is not suf-
EFY Nov/92 issue is not working at in my prototype. As total gain of the fering from any kind of problem.
all. Anything wrong with the circuit? amplifier is very high (10,000), the mi- Readers who may still experience some
SKY WAVES RADIO E. ELECT. crophone impedance is of prime im- problem should check the connections
Ulhasnagar portance. properly and use IC C358 (NEC Ja-
have assembled the hearing
I Even if the readers have used a pan).
aid circuit on a veroboard and am using condenser microphone bearing some The circuit is very sensitive and a hiss-
the earphone normally used with small other number, they may have to ex- ing sound is coming in the earphone
transistor radio, but without success. periment with different values of the which is irritating.

On replacing the earphone with an series biasing resistors, R! and R2, DR S.K. SHARMA
LED. I found the LED
glowing on of the microphone. To reduce the hissing noise the
weaker signals. Please guide me. I hope In case a microphone other than feed back resistors R8 and R9 value
the circuit has been tested before pub- a condenser type is being used, the may be reduced form 1 Megohm to

lication. reader may have to experiment with 680 kilo-ohm.

V.P. OBEROI change of the coupling capacitor as AUTHOR
New Delhi well, whose value may not exceed
lOpF. 10V in any case.

Fuel Level Drop Indicator

K. R. Raghavendra
T^iis circuit lights up a bulb when
fuel in your vehicle or generator tank
goes below a level.
Probes must be fixed on an insulat-
ing material and fitted in the fuel lank at
the (low) level where indication is

needed. As long as fuel keeps a con- V V

ducting path between probes, Tl gets a phodcs
positive bias and remains non-conduct- ing. When fuel stops touching the pmbes, I Tl begins to conduct and the bulb glows.

tion suggested in my previous letter

Authors' comment:
(EFY Jan.’93, p. 14)
K.R. RAGHAVENDRA
The above-mentioned circuit was pub- Mysore
lished in EFY Oct. *92 issue for the
purpose of water level indication in a
radiator tank and not for the fuel tank.
Since the vehicle was being used by my
brother, and due to the long gap be-
tween the designing and submission of
the circuit for publication to EFY, 1 got
confused and stated that the circuit was
meant for fuel indication. I have found
that the circuit will not function as a
fuel level drop indicator since organic
deeply regret the
fluids are insulators. 1

inconvenience caused to the readers.

However, the same circuit is useful
as water drop indicator for radiator
tanks, water tanks and swimming pools,
etc. The circuit can also be used for fuel
drop indication by suitable modifica-

1601 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 ’ ,

Automatic Suction Tank Motor

Controller
Nilesh K. Rajbharti
^^[any of us use water pomps for dr- I

awing water from an underground tank.. :

Whenever the water level in the tank

Truth table for digital circuit

Condition II L V Remark*
Empty tank 0 0 0
Water is filled

up to ‘L* 0 1 0
Full tank i 1 I Motor is ‘on’
Waterfalls
below ‘H’ 0 I 1 Still motor is ‘ob
Again tank is

empty 0 0 0 Off
HIGH / Adi

goes low we have to switch ‘off the INLET

motor and when it reaches a high level VALVE

we have to switch ‘on’ the motor. The r

ATER TANK
circuit given here solves this problem.
The circuit uses RS flip-flop. The the higher level becomes ‘O’ from ‘1’ |
Three-way cables can be used as
arrangement of sensor probes in the !
and keeps the motor'on’cvcn if the t hree sensors, wound on a wooden st ick
tank is shown in the diagram.
1

higher level is at zero state. This is with their insulation cut at one end.
It is evident from the truth table that because of the property of RS flip-flop' Power may be derived from a suitable
|

the circuit identifies the point after which under *no change’ condition. I
power supply or battery.

12-Hindi Song Tunes Producer

Iyer Mahesh Nagarajan
Mnew
usical door- bells, musical horns,
touch sensitive door-bells etc are not
projects, especially for HFY read-
The UM 3481/82/83 or IC 481/8 2/83 and IC
4822/33 etc. *lso fall in the same category of
musical ICs as they can easily replace each
j

i
integrated circuit falls in the group of
door-bell IC
The UM348151 A
chips.
is a 16-pin DIL
ers, but this music producer (twelve other. Please note:
IC. It contains a ROM (read only
UM -348] cont a ins 8 ch ristnas ca rols
memory) with 512 musical notes, tone
UM-34K2. contains 12 tone* commonly
generator, rhythm generator, modula-
used in door-bells
UM-3483™, contains 10 tunes tor, oscillator's frequency divider and
UM-34S4 contains Westminster plus preamplifier. Very few components have
chime function.
to be externally connected to set up the
popular Hindi film song tunes in se- timing of the built-in oscillator and to
quence) gives a new dimension to build an external AF amplifier/driver
musical door- bells. Whenever a switch circuit.
is pressed it plays a popular Hindi film- The circuit can be operated by press-
song tune. 1 2 such tunes can be heard ing switch SI when a Hindi song-
j

in sequence. tune is played in an ascending order

J

The heart of the circuit incorporates i serially, i.c, song tune-1, song tune-2,
integrated circuit UM34815 A. This | etc.

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS 1161

 Transistor T1 (suooe ) is used as an ohm or 4-ohm speaker directly. The tor Rl.
amplifier-driver connected to on-chip speed of the tune being played can be The circuit Svould cost around
preamp output (pin 1
1) to drive any 8- changed by varying the values of rcsis- Rs 80 (including speaker).

Simple Frequency Meter

Saravanen Mallesan

JJere is a simple frequency meter ;

triggering. Each input pulse causes the TABI.E I
with which input frequency can be de- monostable’s output to go high for the
Valor ofC = Cl Cl Injwt Frequency lobe
terminal by simply measuring the val- period of its preset timing interval. The
measured
ues of two resistors and a little bit of flip-flop is triggered simultaneously,
C=47 nF 4 Hz to 2 kHz
calculation. but its output is determined by thestate 19 Hz lo 9 kHz
C=10 jiF
A rctriggerable monostablc multivi- of its D input at the time of trigger C=100 jiF 2 kHz lo 1 MHz
brator and a I) flip-flop can form a threshold. */? =/?/= H2 = 4.7k Unear Pol

simple, yet reliable frequency com para- If the period of the input frequency the value of the time period of fl and
tor that compares an input frequency is shorter than the preset timing of the f2. Some typical values for measuring
with a predetermined reference. To de- monostable, a constant high level will a range of input frequencies is given in

Tabic I.

One way to measure the frequency

is to increase f2 by decreasing the value
of R2 until
goes ‘on*. Then Rl
LED3 goes
is
W and
decreased so
LED4
that

LED1 goes ‘on’ and I.ED2 goes ‘off.

Now bothEDI and LED4 glow and
I.

the values of Rl and R2 are measured.

Frequencies fl and f2 are calculated by
the formulae
is- i

fl = and f2 =
1.1R1C1 I.1R2C2
l
and the input frequency f’ falls in
between fl and f2. If
termine whether an input frequency (f) be present at the D input, forcing the fl < f < f2. I,EDI and LED4 glows;

falls between two known frequencies, flip-flop's 0 output to remain high. If f2 < f <f 1 . LED2 and LED3 glows.
fl and 12, two one-shot/flip-flop com- the input frequency period becomes can be further noted that the val-
It

binations are used, as shown. greater than that of the monostable, the ues of the resistors and the capacitors
Here both the one-shot and the flip- flip-flop’s Q output will go low. can be taken according to one’s appli-
flop ICs arc wired for positive-edge VR1, VR2 and Cl, C2 determine cation.

100 Rung Exclusive Counter

Amrit Bir Tiwana

Digital counters are frequently etc for up to ten outputs (exclusive and more than these many outputs,
needed in all kinds of counting circuits, independent), or 1 6 atthe most. But the In such a case, the 40 17 -basal
test gear, sequential displays, timers, problem arises when it comes to using CMOS counter can be pul to use as a

lEM l ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

 1 OO-stage counter. The
circuit configuration
uses a dozen 4017
counter ICs.
IC12 sends clock
pulses to IC'l 1 at one
tenth of its input fre-
quency, which in turn
allows Qa through Qj
to go high in sequence.

IC1 is activated first

through Qa output,
whose outputs QO to
Q9 go high sequen-
tially for the next ten
pulses. It then turns the
positive rail of IC1 to
zero. <»nd switches IC2
to active state whose
oul puts go h igh for t he
next ten pulses. This
continues until the
lOOtti output goes high.
In this way, the out-
puts QO through Q99
go high one after the
other, turning the pre-
vious to low stale in
.
succession.
Thus a 100-stagc
counter may be imple-
mented using a few
discrete 4017s. If less
than 100 outputs are
needed, a counter stage
may be dropped for
1
every ten outputs. The
• lastneeded output
. may be connected to
j
the reset terminal
(pin 15) of the 4017
j

counter.
j

+5VTO0V

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
 Inexpensive Guitar Amplifier
Arup Kumar Roy
terras an electric guitar with our musically-gifted friends. It has been about 2.5 ems away from the resonance
60W PM PO (peak music power output) tried successfully even with standard hole, towards the bridge side of the

costs around Rs 5000, here is a cost- electric guitars. guitar. Play the guitar and find out the
effective solution toconvert a Hawaian Pick-up coil, the heart of the unit, is optimum position for finally mounting

guitar to an electric guitar. The circuit available in musical instrument shops the pick-up coil,

can also be used as an ampli-speaker as a ‘magnetic touch pick-up for Ha- Always maintain sufficient distance
with a tape recorders a radio receiver, wain guitars’. Its price varies from Rs between the guitar and the speaker to
The unit can easily be assembled on 70 to as much as Rs 1 20. Only a good- avoid feedback (a shrill sound). While
a standard TBA8 10 ampli-speaker PCB quality, high gain pick-up should be operating on AC mains, ensure that a
available in the market. It can also be used. good earth connection exists, or else
housed in an ampli-speaker box. After assembling the circuit, for test- humming sound will be produced. This
Do not try altering the single-tran- ing. switch it on and hit the pick-up humming sound will disappear if you
sistor preamplifier and power supply gently with a screwdriver- This should touch the chassis of the unit,

stages, or you may end up with severe produce some amplified sound. With the volume control at the maxi-
distortion and unwanted noises. After having tested it satisfactorily, mum. the uniishould give about 7 watts
81
ON-OFF

2MACP«AURY
to
pv-o w aoo-* see.
TAANSFORMtf*

The circuit has been extensively you may place the pick-up coil of the of noiseless PMPO.
tested and retested to the satisfaction of unit below the strings of the guitar.

Video Transmitter
Y.D.Nanadan

TP his circuit can be used lo trans- Doordarshan TV up to 15 to 20 1

Die circuit is wired sround sn npn

mit the signals of channels 3 or 4 of nietres. I

HF transistor. Channel 3 signal from a

iral ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

l
 VCR or VCP is fed at the base of the
transistor through a coupling capacitor.
•9V
The output is taken from its collector
and given to the coil for transmission
through an antenna.
The antenna should be a shielded
wire of not more than two metres. The
coil should be made carefully by wind-
ing 10 turns of 24SWG copper wire
over an 8mm coil former.

Wireless Code Practice Oscillator

Pradeep G.
H
practice
ams (amateur radio enthusiasts)
Morse code using an AF oscil-
lator with loudspeaker. Using the CPO
(code practice oscillator) circuit shown
here, the need for a loudspeaker can be
eliminated.
The AF signal is generated here by
astable multivibrator wired around tran-
sistors T1 and T2. The signal is modu-
lated with RF signal generated through
transistor T3. These signals can be
received on a shortwave radio receiver
placed nearby (within 10 metres). No
wiring is required between the CPO
and the receiver.
LI is an ordinary short wave oscilla- can be housed in a plastic soap-box; it *
15, excluding the battery. Instead of a
tor coil with a movable ferrite rod. The should not be enclosed in a metallic 9V PP3 battery, four to six cells in

Morse key may be connected in series box. series may be used.

with the battery, as shown. The circuit The circuit would cost around Rs

Light and Touch -Operated

Musical Bell
Shashi Babu Thawait

his novel circuit uses a photo- little light falls on the photo-transistor, producing music. After the music has
transistor (Tl) with an npn transistor in it gives a triggering pulse to SCR gate halted, no current flows through the
emitter-follower mode to increase sen- and the SCR starts conducting. SCR and the SCR switches off, till the
sitivity of the circuit. So even if very When SCR conducts, ICUM66 starts light falls once again on the photo-

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS IB 65
transistor. '
SCR which again produces music i.c. by pushing the bell switch.
If a touch-plate is inserted in paral- through the IC. So the same circuit can The circuit would cost approximately
leitoswitchSl,asshown in the circuit, be operated either by light or touch. Rs 50.
wheneverthe plate is touched by some- Pushbutton switch SI permits the dr-
one it gives' a triggering pulse to the cuit to be operated in the normal way, 1

Electronic Fuse
Amrit Bir Tiwana

Fuse protection for electronic

circuits seems to be an outmoded idea,
for there are circuits (in computers etc)
that consume high currents initially at
power-on which later reduce to a
lower stable value. In case higher rated
fuses arc employed in such equipment
to accommodate the initial surge cur-
rents, it defeats the very purpose of
protection.Slow-blow fuses often turn
out to be too slow while quick-action
fuses may blow out at the mere hint of
a surge.
An electronic fuse of the kind de-
scribed here provides an ideal solution
in such cases. It offers another advan-
tage as replacing of a fuse in this case is

done at the mere pressing of a button.

The circuit has a ‘slow-blow’ fea-
ture. When a gadget draws more than
the prescribed current, the circuit
monitors it for some time, and if across resistor R1 (in series with the
1
can be wired in parallel to the emitter/

the situation persists it ‘blows up’ the load) exceeds it, the output is taken collector of transistor TI.
|

fuse. high and the relay energised to discon- assembled circuit can be
The circuit uses a JFET type TT£)8 1 neet the load. . mounted on the upper stack of the trans-
op-amp. A small reference voltage is In case it is desired to latch up the i
former, whereas the relay can be placed

set up across the IC’s inverting input, relay, a twin-contact relay may be used, aI ,he P°’ nl whcre the switch would
j

and in case the sample voltage fed The other set of contacts in that case I
have heen -

166 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

|
 the load at a higher fating is not The author, Mr Amrit
Bir Tiwana
feasible, whereas by parallel replies .

connections it is possible to raise the

Readers’ Comments:
specified limit significantly.
R m *y ** used in •• vewire instead of
1

The “Electronic Fuse’ circuit published

Also this circuit is meant for AC
ncu wirc -

^?
in EFY Dec.*92 issue provides overload J>,ncc res,stors values lower than
supply only.
protection and does not blow out for s ecif,ed are not easi, available,
wire instead of neutral to detect over 5 y
over current due to earth fault because lhc ,oad at col,nectiom h is possible to
current due to earth fault?
of resistor R1 present in neutral line.
How can the operational load of ™sethc specified limit significantly.
Can we use R1 in series with the line the fuse 17,18 c,rcim ,s meant for AC su
PP y
be increased? !

R1 may be used in live wire instead of

Is it possible to use this fuse for
neutral wire.
DC supply as well as AC?
Since resistors of values lower than
those specified are not easily available,
RAMESHWAR
Itarei (M.P.)

Multisound Buzzer
Kalpesh T.Dalwadl
^
1 ^ he circuit presented here is built 3V TO ISVOC
around CD4049 CMOS inverters. Ba-
sically, the circuit comprises HF and
LF oscillators. An HF oscillator pro-
duces different audio frequencies by
properly adjusting potentiometers VR1
and VR2, while lone is produced by the
LF oscillator. The latter may be con-
tinuous or interrupted, and can be ad-
justed using potentiometers VR3 and
VR4.
N1 and N2, along with VR1, VR2,
Cl and C2, form the free-running as*
table multivibrator which produces the
HF sound. The LF oscillator comprises
N4, N5, VR3, VR4, C3 and C4. N3 and
N6 are used as buffers. m

Transistor T1 through T4 form AND be produced by properly adjusing po- To enhance the volume, while keeping
16-ohm speaker.
logic and also drive the
tentiometers VR1 through VR4. the current consumption low, connect
Different sounds such as a bird’s, a The circuit can be filled in any the speaker as shown in the diagram

cricket’s and a rising/falling siren ’s can

system that needs an aural indication, (optional).

Crystal Controlled Inverter

Manu Abraham
T he inverter presented here provides
a stable output frequency even when
The
mental
crystal operates in
mode
its

with a frequency of
funda- of transistor T2, Transistors
T7, T8 and T5 &
T4 &
T9. T10, Til are
T6,

there is a change in the DC voltage 3,276,800 Hz. C2 the trimmer can be connected as durlington pair configura-
applied to the inverter. This stable out- used to adjust the damping in the net- lions The advantage is that the transis-
put frequency is derived from a 3.2768 work and cause a small change in the torsT4 & T5 provide enough base drive

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS Hal

 *

MHz crystal. The heart of the circuit is frequency of oscillation of crystal. Ca- f° r P° wer sta ?cs flows through the

1C
the popular flip flop MM
5369 which pacitor Cl is used to balance the net- transformer which is connected to the

is a commonly used timcbase circuit, work, so as to compensate for C2. R is I

collectorsof T4 and T5. Since thisaddi-
Thecrystal oscillates at its fundamental used as a load so as to maintain the lional current flows through the trans-
frcquency of 3,276,800 Hz. MM5369 crystal oscillating in its fundamental former rather than through resistors and
mode of operation. R2 dissipated as heat in them, it causes an
chip contains a cascade of 1 6 flip Hops, Resistor is used
Due to this the chip is used as by 16 to limit the current flowing through the increase in theefficiency of the inverter,

counter in other words, the chip divides chip. Diode D serves as a protection for
I
Diodes D2 and D3 are used to protect

the input frequency by a factor of 2

IIV
the CMOS chip in event of a reversal of l^ e power stages from excessive PIV
Thus we get an output frequency polarities at the battery terminal generated in the transformer due to the
times.
Resistors R3, R4 and R5 are used to switching action of the power transis-
50 Hz. tors
t.e. 3,276,800 Hz/2 split the current so as to ensure that each
share of base drive The transformer is a step up type
This frequency is available at pin 1 transistor gets its

of the flip flop. The resonant frequency f rom the chip. Transistor T and T2 are
I
270V A with aprimary of 9V-0V-9V/
and a secondary of 230V. It can be
of the crystal can be adjusted by means connected as inverters, such that the 1

of the trimmer capacitor. The CMOS total inversion produced by them is 360" bought readymade as a usual 230V 9-0-
chip(MM 5369) cannot deliver or sink or 0". Transistor T3 is also connected as 9 V/ 5A,270VA step down transformer
1

more than 10mA, therefore a current an inverter and the output at the codec- which is used in the circuit exactly the
necessary to drive the driver tor of T3 is at a phase difference of 1 80“ other way round and works satisfacto-
amplifier is
with respect to the signal r 'ly-
ry predriver stages of the inverter. at the collector
Tech Editors’ Note: It is observed that
the division factor of IC1 (MM5369)
is not 2 I6
= 65536
but 60,000 and its
frequency using a Xtal of 3. 2768MHz
equals 54.6Hz. To obtain an exact fre-
quency of 50Hz, one may use a Xtal
of 6MHz to obtain lOOlIzand follow it
up by a flip-flop to obtain a symmetri-
cal (square wave) 50Hz output. The
modification is given here in the above
figure.

Modified circuit of crystal controlled inverter

[EDI ELECTRONICS PROJECTS

Top 20 Projects (Out of 105)
• Full Featured Touch Control Programmable • Electronic Ballast for Tubelight
Power Supply • Self Switching-off Power Supply
• Digital Frequency Counter • Telephone Amplifier cum Broadcaster
• Clap-operated Remote Control for Fans • Fully Automatic Induction Motor Starter
• Digital Volume Control • Programmable Frequency Multiplier
• Electronic Number Shooting Game Using PLL565
• The Universal Timer • Rain Sound Generator
• Digital Car Lock with Alarm • Automatic Suction Tank Motor Controller
• Electronic Switch Starter • Video Transmitter
• Staircase Light Switch • Light and Touch-operated Music Bell
• Conversion of DMM into Frequency Counter • Multisound Buzzer
• Battery Charger with Overcharge and Deep-
discharge Protection

EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd

D-87/1, Okhla Industrial Area, Phase!, New Delhi 110 020; Pfr -91-11-26810601*03
Fax: +91-11-26817563; E-mail: info@8fyTndia.com; Website: www.efymdia.com